· project specifications fairfax county government center generator replacement located at: 12000...

PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS

FAIRFAX COUNTY

GOVERNMENT CENTER GENERATOR REPLACEMENT

located at:

12000 GOVERNMENT CENTER PKWY FAIRFAX, VA 22035

Prepared for:

Fairfax County Facilities Management Division

Attn: Steve Bridges 12000 Government Center Pkwy

Fairfax, VA 22035

June 3, 2016 SWSG PN: 14-104

SWSG Shaffer, Wilson, Sarver & Gray, P.C.

555 Herndon Parkway, Suite 206 Phone (703) 471-6803 Herndon, Virginia 20170 Fax (703) 742-3975

Fairfax County Fairfax, VA Government Center Generator Replacement

SWSG 14-104 Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION ZERO PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Section 00030 General Conditions DIVISION ONE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01250 Contract Modification Procedures Section 01310 Management Coordination Section 01320 Construction Progress Section 01325 Phasing Plan Section 01330 Submittal Procedures Section 01600 Product Requirements Section 01700 Execution Requirements Section 01731 Cutting and Patching Section 01732 Selective Demolition Section 01770 Closeout Procedures Section 01782 Operation and Maintenance Data Section 01800 General Commissioning Requirements DIVISION THREE CONCRETE Section 03301 Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION FIVE METALS Section 05120 Structural Steel Section 05310 Steel Deck Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing Section 05500 Metal Fabrications Section 05530 Gratings Division SIX WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES Section 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry DIVISION SEVEN THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07412 Metal Wall Panels Section 07521 Modified Bitumen Roof Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07720 Roof Accessories Section 07841 Through-Penetration Firestop Systems Section 07920 Joint Sealants DIVISION NINE FINISHES Section 09910 Painting Section 09960 High Performance Coatings Section 09963 High Temperature Resistant Coatings DIVISION TEN SPECIALTIES Section 10200 Louvers and Vents DIVISION THIRTEEN SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section 13915 Fire Suppression Piping


SWSG 14-104 Page 2

DIVISION FIFTEEN MECHANICAL Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section 15055 Motors Section 15060 Hangers and Supports Section 15075 Mechanical Identification Section 15083 Pipe Insulation Section 15183 Refrigerant Piping Section 15191 Fuel Oil Piping Section 15732 Rooftop Air Conditioners Section 15815 Metal Ducts Section 15820 Duct Accessories Section 15838 Power Ventilators Section 15855 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles Section 15856 Intake and Relief Ventilators Section 15900 Direct Digital Control System Section 15940 Sequence of Operations Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Section 15995 Mechanical Systems Commissioning DIVISION SIXTEEN ELECTRICAL Section 16010 Basic Electrical Material and Methods Section 16055 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study Section 16056 Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study Section 16060 Grounding and Bonding Section 16073 Hangers and Supports Section 16075 Electrical Identification Section 16120 Conductors and Cables Section 16130 Raceways and Boxes Section 16231 Packaged Engine Generators Section 16235 Low Voltage Roll Up Generator Termination Cabinet Section 16410 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Section 16415 Transfer Switches Section 16435 Paralleling Switchgear Section 16441 Switchboards Section 16442 Panelboards Section 16491 Fuses Section 16995 Electrical Systems Commissioning APPENDIX A Rigging Plan


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 00030 - 1

SECTION 00030 - GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. The General Conditions of the Building Construction Contract, as provided by the Facilities Management Division of Fairfax County, are hereby made a part of these Specifications and are an integral component of the Contract Documents between the Owner and the Contractor on this project.

1.2 AVAILABILITY

A. General Conditions of the Building Construction Contract will be made available by the Fairfax County Facilities Management Division during the bid process.

1.3 RESPONSIBILITY AND RELATED WORK

A. The written Specifications and Construction Documents, shall be collectively referred to herein as the Contract Documents.

B. Contractor shall provide, based on the Contract Documents, a complete, turnkey system, tested and ready for acceptance testing. The Contract Documents are developed to the extent required to properly convey design intent, signal flow, and system infrastructure. It is understood by the Contractor that they are to supply additional equipment, as required, in order to provide a complete and working system.

C. System features or devices, which are mentioned in one part of the Contract Documents, may not be shown in the other. In case of conflict between the written specifications and the drawings, the Contractor must seek clarification from the Consultant. In the event that the Contractor fails to obtain such clarification, the interpretation of the Consultant shall prevail.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 00030


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 00030 - 2

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 1

SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Construction Manager will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Construction Manager are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 5 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Construction Manager.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 2

4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests.

1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Construction Manager will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Construction Manager may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1

SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). 5. Building and Trade permits.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting

Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general

installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in all Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.



4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. 10. Inspection reports.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings as indicated below:

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

b. Indicate required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of

dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).

3. Number of Copies: Submit six opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return four copies.

4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.

B. KEY PERSONNEL



1. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.

1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the

meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect and their consultants; Structural Engineer; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of Record Documents. l. Use of the premises and existing building. m. Work restrictions. n. Owner's occupancy requirements.



o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Construction waste management and recycling. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. u. Security. v. Progress cleaning. w. Working hours.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.



D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

4. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at weekly intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning,



coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. Send copies to the Owner.

1.8 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Date.



3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,

Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

C. Hard-Copy RFIs: CSI Form 13.2A.

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.

D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within three days of receipt of the RFI response.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within three days if Contractor disagrees with response.



G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as

appropriate.





CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 1

SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Field condition reports. 5. Special reports.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing

meeting and conference minutes. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.



1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G. Fragment: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail.

H. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.

I. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.

J. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships.

K. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals Schedule: Submit six copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit six opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.

C. Daily Construction Reports: Submit six copies at progress meetings.

D. Material Location Reports: Submit six copies at progress meetings.

E. Field Condition Reports: Submit six copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.

F. Special Reports: Submit six copies at time of unusual event.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.



1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling."

B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of Final Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 5 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

a. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.

2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.

3. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 3 days for startup and testing.



4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include

delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

3. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. i. Time restriction: The Work is in a low noise work environment and shall be

performed between 7:00 pm and 3:00 am.

5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

6. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. c. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion.

E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.



F. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 14 days of date established for the Notice of Award.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.

2.4 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. 20. Permit and Inspections.

B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation on CSI Form 13.2A. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.



List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At each progress meeting, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in

the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



PROJECT PHASING 01325 - 1

SECTION 01325: PROJECT PHASING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PHASING REQUIREMENTS

A. This document defines the Phasing requirements for the project. The project shall be constructed in several phases. During construction, government use and public areas of the building will remain occupied. Parking, emergency ingress/egress, fire protection systems and all utilities shall remain operational in all building areas throughout the project. Construction staging, parking, trailers, signage, barricades, entrances, temporary partitions, and dumpster locations shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor as required to adhere to this Phasing Plan in areas designated by Fairfax County. Vehicular access through the parking lots and to the loading docks for delivery and trash removal shall be maintained by the Contractor throughout the project.

B. This document provides guidance to the Contractor with regards to construction sequencing, phasing of construction, and on-going facility operations during construction. Using this document and the Phasing Schedule, the Contractor shall develop and submit a detailed Construction Schedule for review and approval by the County Project Manager. Once the Construction Schedule has been approved by the County Project Manager, the project will be implemented according to it. As the project progresses, if changes are required to the schedule, the Contractor shall submit proposed changes to the County Project Manager prior to initiating them in the field.

C. Public areas of the facility will remain occupied and operational during the Government Center’s normal operating hours. Members of the public will be using the facility and parking areas during construction. As such, the existing utility infrastructure shall be maintained in operation, as required, to provide a useable, secure, and safe environment for the occupants throughout the project. The contractor shall coordinate all construction and commissioning activities with on-going facility operations. The contractor shall provide prior notice, coordinate, and schedule all utility interruptions and outages with the County Project Manager.

D. Interruption of some utilities including electricity, generator, HVAC, fire alarm, sprinkler, communications, etc. will be required at various times during the project. All required utility outages shall be submitted for approval a minimum of 14 days prior to the proposed interruption. Interruptions will not be approved during normal operating hours for any reason. All utility outages shall be conducted during the maintenance window (9PM-5AM M-Th) and all utility services shall be restored a minimum of one hour prior to the next scheduled occupancy of the space.

E. The Contractor shall coordinate all electric service outages. Outages shall be scheduled 14 days in advance and last no more than 4 hours at a time.

F. The Contractor shall obtain individual trade inspections and final inspections from the Building, Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing inspectors and the Fire Marshall for each Phase of the project as the work is completed.

G. The Contractor shall adjust the overall Construction Schedule, including durations and start dates of the Contractor’s subcontractors, to coordinate and facilitate the work. The Contractor shall provide schedule updates and changes as required to coordinate and facilitate the work of all trades. The Contractor shall submit a “method of procedure” (MOP) for all work items in the project that involve the following:

1. Connection, disconnection or modification to any portion of the existing AC Power distribution system including breakers, disconnects, panels, ATS’s, and switchgear

2. Shutting down any portion of the HVAC system 3. Shutting down any portion of the fire suppression or detection systems



4. Shutting down the existing generators or generator fuel system. 5. Shutting down the BMS or security systems

H. All MOP work shall be conducted in the maintenance window 9PM – 5AM Monday through Thursday. Contractor personnel may move on site starting at 7PM each night to prepare for the work. But no work shall commence until the maintenance window begins. All contractor personnel, equipment and debris shall be completely removed from the site by 5AM each day. The contractor shall prepare and submit for approval a draft method of procedure (MOP) document that describes the step-by-step procedures that will be undertaken each night. All MOP’s shall be reviewed and approved by the County Project Manager prior to starting the work. The contractor shall edit and update all MOP’s based on review comments by the County Project Manager. Copies of the approved MOP’s shall be maintained on site at all times during the project.

1.2 PROJECT PHASING REQUIREMENTS

A. This phasing plan does not include every required step in each phase and it is not intended to quantify the scope for the project. It is provided as a guide to help coordinate the work flow with on-going operations and minimize disruptions to County operations. The phasing plan indicates major work elements and milestones. All service affecting tasks shall be pre-approved by the County Project Manager prior to initiating the work. The Contractor shall incorporate all required means, methods, manpower, mobilizations, re-mobilizations and logistics into the work, as required, to implement the work in the listed sequence. Several trades shall mobilize and demobilize multiple times to implement the work and the Contractor shall provide separate trade and final permits for each phase, as necessary. Conduct the work using multiple shifts each day to achieve the required dates in the Phasing Schedule. Many individual tasks shall be implemented separately and in stages. Utility interruptions and outages shall be conducted outside normal operating hours and only upon the County Project Manager’s prior approval. The Contractor shall develop and submit for approval a detailed Construction Schedule to incorporate these phasing requirements into the project. The Construction Schedule shall be reviewed and approved by the County Project Manager prior to mobilizing on site. The Construction Schedule shall be reviewed and updated, as directed by the County Project Manager, by the Contractor at all weekly progress meetings.

B. All utility outages (M/E/P/FP/FA) shall be pre-approved by the County Project Manager. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 14 days advance notice for all outage requests. The Contractor shall submit for review and approval a method of procedure (MOP) describing the detailed steps necessary to implement each outage and how the utility service will be restored afterwards. Utility outages shall not be implemented without an approved MOP. Utility outages will not be approved during normal operating hours. All utility outages for occupied areas shall be scheduled during the maintenance window and all utility services shall be restored a minimum of one hour prior to the next scheduled occupancy of the space. The contractor shall provide all public and private utility locates.

C. Unless and until new utility and fire protection systems are in service, the Contractor shall maintain all existing utility and fire protection infrastructure in full and approved operation. Certain new and existing utility systems shall be operational simultaneously throughout various phases of the project. This includes water, sewer, power, HVAC, fire protection, BMS, and others. The contractor shall provide phased installation and operation of all new infrastructure systems for the project in coordination with the phased removal of the existing systems and equipment to be replaced. If at any time the fire protection system is temporarily out of service, the Contractor shall provide full-time fire watch for the affected areas for the entire period of time the system is out of service.

D. Special Systems: Certain trades for the project will be contracted direct to the County Project Manager Fire Alarm, BMS system, security system, and 3rd party special inspections. The



General Contractor shall coordinate their trades and integrate the special system contractors into the overall construction schedule. Refer to the Phasing Schedule for specific milestones and starting dates for special system contractors.

E. The project phases shall be identified as follows:

Phase-A “Shop drawings and Site Preparation” Includes submission, resubmission, and approval for all shop drawings, cut sheets, and other documents as required by the project manual and preparation of the site to begin construction.

Phase-B “Pre-Demolition Construction”

Phase-C “Demolition and Replacement Generator Installation”

Phase-D “Inspection and Commissioning”

PART 2 – SCOPE OF PHASING 2.1 DETAILED BREAKDOWN OF PHASING REQUIREMENTS

A. Immediately following receipt of the NTP, the Contractor shall commence Phase-A.

B. Phase-A shall include preparation, submission, resubmission and approval of ALL shop drawings and submittals for the project, including the coordination Study and Arc flash Analysis. This Phase also includes Contractor placement of the required orders so that all materials and equipment are available on-site as required by the Phasing Schedule. Refer to the Phasing Schedule for specific durations and milestones related to all Phases. The Contractor shall procure all equipment and material expeditiously to avoid delays.

1. During Phase-A the Contractor shall make all necessary preparations to permit construction to begin in each phase. Procure all equipment and material expeditiously to avoid delays. Immediately upon receiving the NTP, prepare the site with the following logistical elements as required by the Phasing Plan:

a. Install construction trailers with trailer utilities; b. Install temporary fencing and barricades; c. Install construction dumpsters in the indicated area; d. Identify construction vehicle parking area; e. Install temporary signage; f. Verify access for service vehicles to reach the loading docks is maintained; g. Identify construction access and route through the parking lots; h. Obtain and post all building and trade permits;

2. All items noted above shall be ready to begin construction by the start date for Phase-B. 3. The project will replace the two existing generators and three existing ATSs and separate the

emergency electrical distribution system into emergency and stand-by systems. The contractor will provide a detailed construction schedule incorporating the following:

4. The remainder of the project will be conducted in four phases as follows:

Phase-B “Pre-Demolition Construction” includes the work required to separate and transfer the current emergency electrical distribution system to one supplied by the new Paralleling Switchgear and a temporary generator. This includes the installation of the Paralleling Switchgear, Automatic Transfer Switches, Stand-by and Emergency Panelboards, Stand-by and Emergency Transformers, Temporary generator connection, Control System Installation and Programming, and modification of the existing emergency distribution system as shown on the drawings. Some steps can occur concurrently but no power transfers will occur until the Paralleling Switchgear and temporary generator are tested, pre-commissioned and accepted. The Phase will include:

1. Install Elevator Room cooling system equipment and ductwork.



2. Remove FCU-1 currently serving the Elevator Room 3. Install the Paralleling Switchgear and Generator Control Panel. 4. Set Paralleling Switchgear circuit breakers per the recommendation for the Coordination

Study. 5. Mount the Automatic Transfer Switches with power and control conduit and wiring connecting

them to the Paralleling Switchgear and Generator Control Panel. 6. Install control wiring from the existing combination fire pump ATS/controller to Generator

Control Panel 7. Install Temporary Generator Control Box with associated power and control connections. 8. Install SWBD-CHW and rough-in feeders and branch circuits. 9. Mount and connect supply feeders to SWBD-CHW,EMH2,TEM2, EM2,EMH3,TEM3, EM3,

EMH4,TEM4, EM4, EMHP1N, EMHP1S, EMHP1C, ETMC1, ERPMC1, and DPSBP1C 10. Install feeder from Central SWBD to ATS-EM2 11. Install feeder from North SWBD to ATS-EM3 12. Install feeder from South SWBD to ATS-EM4 13. Install feeder from Central SWBD to ATS-SBP1C 14. Install feeder from South SWBD to ATS-SBP1S 15. Install feeder from Central SWBD to ATS-SBP1N 16. Install feeder from Central Penthouse SWBD to ATS-13 17. Install feeder from XFMR TO ERPMC1 18. Intercept feeder to temporary generator connection box and extend to Paralleling Switchgear 19. Install the temporary generator equipment and connect the County provided temporary

generator. 20. Install temporary 20A circuits to ATS-2, ATS-3, ATS-4, ATS-13, ATS-SBP1C, ATS-SBP1S,

ATS-SBP1N, and simulate a power failure to each ATS testing, verifying temporary generator starting and relays to new generators are operational. Test and accept operation before proceeding to live loads.

21. Once live loads are transferred to Paralleling Switchgear control, lock-out/tag-out procedures are in place and any interruption to a live electrical system must be performed in a maintenance window.

22. Lock all new ATSs in the utility position except ATS-EM2, ATS-EM3, and ATS-EM4 while the stand-by generator is protecting the Paralleling Switchgear.

23. Install replacement feeders and prepare for service changes to minimize the down time. In a maintenance window intercept the existing feeders to panelboard LPCCA

24. Install replacement feeders and prepare for service changes to minimize the down time. In a maintenance window intercept the existing feeders to the third floor electrical room panelboards: ELP3NA, ELP3NB, and ELP3NC and connect to replacement.

25. Extend existing feeders cleared in the previous step to transformers 3NA, 3NB, and 3NC via their associated disconnect switches. Replace feeder fuses as shown.

26. When the previous two steps are complete, the intercept the utility feeder to existing ATS- 3 to replacement ATS-3, using the existing ATS-3 cabinet as a pull box. Concurrently with the feeder change, replace the feeder to panelboard EDPN with one from replacement ATS-3. Schedule change over when the building is unoccupied on a weekend.

27. Install replacement feeders and prepare for service changes to minimize the down time. In a maintenance window intercept the existing feeders to the third and fourth floor electrical room panelboards: ELPELP4SA, ELP3SB, and ELP3SB and connect to replacement.

28. Extend existing feeders cleared in the previous step to transformers 4SAA, 3SB, and 3SD via their associated disconnect switches. Replace feeder fuses as shown.

29. When the previous two steps are complete, intercept the utility feeder to existing ATS- 4 to replacement ATS-4. Concurrently with the feeder change, replace the feeder to panelboard EDPS with one from replacement ATS-4, using the existing ATS-3 cabinet as a pull box. Schedule change over when the building is unoccupied on a weekend.

30. Install replacement feeders and prepare for service changes to minimize the down time. In a maintenance window intercept the existing feeders to the third floor electrical room panelboards: ELP3CA, ELP3CB, ELP3CC, and ELP3CD and connect to replacement.



31. Extend existing feeders cleared in the previous step to transformers 3CA, 3CB, and 3CD via their associated disconnect switches. Replace feeder fuses as shown.

32. When the previous two steps are complete, intercept the utility feeder to existing ATS- 2 to replacement ATS-2. Concurrently with the feeder change, replace the feeder to panelboard EDPC with one from replacement ATS-2, using the existing ATS-3 cabinet as a pull box. Schedule change over when the building is unoccupied on a weekend.

33. Intercept the existing generator switchboard feeder to the fire pump and extend to the Paralleling Switchgear.

34. Transfer electrical loads from MCC-EMCCP as shown. 35. Relocate Cooling Tower CT-2 variable speed drives, heat trace and control wiring.

C. Phase C “Demolition and Replacement Generator Installation” will begin immediately when Phase B is completed, tested and accepted. During this phase the existing generators, generator switchboard and all generator associated device will be removed from the generator room. The replacement generators will be installed with all associated equipment serving the reconfigured generator room.

1. Demolish equipment serving the generators including but not limited to: remote radiators, radiator piping, expansion tank, day tanks, fuel coolers, ductwork and dampers, fuel oil piping, exhaust fans, generator switchboard, MCC-EMCCP, ATS-7, generator battery charger, existing ATS-2, 3 & 4 with all associated conduit and wire.

2. Submit Commissioning Scripts and Operation and Maintenance manuals for approval. 3. Coordinate the arrival of the crane to remove the existing generators with removal of the

exterior wall, cooling tower catwalk and stair. 4. Remove the existing generators. 5. Provide temporary protection for the generator room, modifying as required as construction

progresses. 6. Install gravity intake hoods RC-1 & RC-2, protecting the generator room 7. Prepare the roof to accept the extension of the generator room. 8. Construct the generator room expansion coordinating the Rigging Contractor to allow the day

tanks and generators to be installed. 9. Repair floors and walls which will be inaccessible once the generators are in place. 10. Install the generators, including fuel oil piping, exhaust ductwork and silencer, power and

control wiring and all associated devices. Test the generators prior to connection to the Paralleling Switchgear utilizing a 1.5 mW load bank with temporary connections to the generator output circuit breaker as detailed in section 01800

11. Verify Paralleling Switchgear software and control, simulating generator starting and stopping and alarm reporting.

12. Provide power connection to the Paralleling Switchgear with lock-out/tag-out protection at the generator and Paralleling Switchgear circuit breakers.

13. Complete the generator room exterior wall construction with interior renovations. 14. Install the exhaust louvers and dampers including power and controls. 15. Install the exterior door and stairs by the elevator room. 16. Reinstall the cooling tower catwalk. 17. Repair the roofing and install walking pads. 18. Concurrent with the above complete the rollover of existing loads, including AHU-21,

AHU-22, EF-21, EF-22, MCC-P2 (after transfer of non stand-by loads) and Chiller #3. As with the panelboard changes-overs, install replacement feeders and prepare for service changes in advance to minimize the down time. Make actual change-overs in a maintenance window

19. When the above items are complete schedule weekend testing of the generators utilizing the building load, a 900 kW load bank and two 300 kW load banks as detailed in section 01800.

20. When both generators have completed and passed their testing and the automatic starting and load shedding by the Paralleling Switchgear has been verified, complete the demolition, removing the load banks and pack the temporary generator for removal by the County.



21. If testing fails reconnect the temporary generator and lock out the new generators at the Paralleling Switchgear.

22. Repeat above as required.

D. Phase-D, “Inspection and Commissioning” testing scripts were submitted and approved during Phase C, to allow the Commissioning process to begin immediately. All Commissioning will take place during maintenance windows following the approved script in lieu of MOPs. When commissioning is complete :

1. Perform final cleaning and trash removal. Remove the construction dumpster when complete.

2. Provide and install replacement engraved, color coded equipment labels reflecting new identification for all new and existing mechanical and electrical equipment.

3. Update all panelboard schedules (both new and existing) with typewritten schedules reflecting the final state of the remaining equipment using the new equipment designations

4. Install arc flash labels on new and existing equipment using the new equipment designations. 5. Close out all trade permits and the building permit 6. Submit final close out package for approval

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. The Contractor shall implement the work according to the approved Phasing Plan and in accordance with the approved Construction Schedule. The scope of work for shall include, but not be limited to the work indicated on the drawings and specifications, Section-2 above and by the RFP, Addendums issued for this project.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1

SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.

C. Review of shop drawings is for general conformance with the design intent and general compliance with the Contract Documents of the Project. Corrections, comments, or markings made do not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents nor allow for departure there from. Contractor remains responsible for detailing and accuracy, confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processing and techniques of construction, coordinating work with that of other trades and performing work in a safe and satisfactory manner.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect’s approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.



a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.

1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision number. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification.

E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect.

2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned.

G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will not accept and will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal.

2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents.

3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:



a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. i. Remarks. j. Signature of transmitter.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return four copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

2. Make each specified submittal as a coordinated package complete with all information. Uncoordinated sets will be returned without review.

B. Product Data:

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. l. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements.



C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control

wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three blue- or black-line prints of each submittal, unless prints

are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five prints where prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain one print; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned print as a Project Record Drawing.

D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:

1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 3. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared

from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer. c. Sample source.

5. Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, provide the following:

a. Size limitations. b. Compliance with recognized standards. c. Availability. d. Delivery time.



6. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations.

b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics.

7. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit one full set[s] of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

8. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned.

a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

9. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

E. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space.

F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in County Job Order Contract.

G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in County Job Order Contract.

H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.



1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Owner will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

C. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements.

D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.

F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

G. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements.

H. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.

I. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements.

J. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

K. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.

L. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.



M. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

N. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures and Operation and Maintenance Data."

O. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

P. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

Q. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

R. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Owner.

B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal. Submit within 10 days of contract award. Submit manufacturer’s product data sheets for each item of equipment that will be provided as part of this Contract in 3-ring binders sized to handle materials plus 50% excess. All equipment cut sheets shall be arranged per specification section number, with tabbed dividers between sections. Provide a Table of Contents at the beginning of the binder.

C. Submit shop drawings within 30 days of contract award. Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for evaluation shall not entitle the Contractor to an extension of Contract Time. There will be no work authorized on site without the prior submittal, and subsequent approval, of a complete set of shop drawings. Any exceptions to this must be in writing and approved by the Consultant.

D. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT’S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Owner will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and comment sheet and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:

1. No Exceptions Taken

2. Make Revisions Noted

3. Revise and Resubmit

4. Not Approved

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1

SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and

installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.



E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:

a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery

date.

3. Completed List: Within 45 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.

4. Owner's Action: Owner will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Owner’s response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Owner’s response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract Documents.

B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.



g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.

h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Owner's Action: If necessary, Owner will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. Owner will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Owner cannot make a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.



7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

9. Protect stored products from damage.

B. Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Owner will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is

Owner's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or

equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:



1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single product and manufacturer, provide the product named.

a. Substitutions may be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements.


3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.


4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.


5. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

7. Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that size, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable product or system by another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Product Substitutions" Article.

8. Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis-of-Design Product[s]" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers' names, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.


9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Owner's sample. Owner's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.



a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product.

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Owner will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Owner will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

11. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for processing such selections.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Owner will consider requests for substitution if received within 10 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Owner.

B. Conditions: Owner will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Owner will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product:



1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.




EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. General installation of products. 3. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project

Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.



B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation."



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.4 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.



2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.



3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

C. Provide test and balance reports.

3.8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.



CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1

SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.


1. Division 01 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building.

2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following:

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. 9. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity



to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following:

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.



B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.



3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.



SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 1

SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building. 2. Patching and repairs. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 1 Section “Cutting and Patching” for cutting and patching procedures. 2. Division 15 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items. 3. Division 16 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled,

salvaged, or to remain the Owner's property. B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's

property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to Owner's designated storage area.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them

for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling

during selective demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise

indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and

Division 1 Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated. B. Proposed dust-control measures. C. Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and

ending dates for each activity. 2. Interruption of utility services. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. D. Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged. E. Inventory of items to be removed by Owner. F. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural,

electrical, or mechanical conditions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed

selective demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

starting selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Building Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively

demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by

Owner as far as practical. B. Asbestos: It is not expected that asbestos will be encountered in the Work. If any materials

suspected of containing asbestos are encountered, do not disturb the materials. Immediately notify the Architect and the Owner.

C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Special Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or

damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces,

use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of

selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be

removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the

intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Architect.

E. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result

in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition.

F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective

demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage

during selective demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when

authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to governing authorities.

B. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility

services serving building to be selectively demolished.



1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

bypass connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with selective demolition.

4. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting,

removing, and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.

3.3 PREPARATION A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives,

acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations.

B. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with

roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities

without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.

C. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings

and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. 1. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and

are exposed during selective demolition operations. 2. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been

removed. D. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve

stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of building to be selectively demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective

demolition. 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust

and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. 1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or

objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and

areas. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device



that will convey debris to grade level. C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction

and as indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials

and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to

avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris

and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited.

10. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of selective demolition operations.

B. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures

with construction to remain, using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-driven impact tools.

3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by

selective demolition operations. B. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new

materials. C. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining

construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. D. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or



partitions extend one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and appearance.

1. Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface. 2. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified

tolerances. 3. Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire

unbroken surface containing the patch after the surface has received primer and second coat.

4. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

5. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation, where feasible.

E. Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of

uniform appearance. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to

accumulate on-site. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.8 CLEANING A. Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation. END OF SECTION 01732


CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1

SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements

for products of those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.



10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Owner will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Owner, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Owner's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Owner. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Owner will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.



3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Owner's reference during normal working hours. Submit all contract closeout documentation within 30 days after substantial completion.

B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations. d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing

actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings.

2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.

3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable.

5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, where applicable.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual



performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1.8 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Owner for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal

operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner at least seven days' advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of

instruction, and course content.



B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following:

1. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments. 5. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.



1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during

construction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 1

SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes,

systems and equipment.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for

operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance

manuals. 3. Divisions 3 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual

requirements for products in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return 1 copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

B. Final Submittal: Submit 1 copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.

2. Provide final copy of all Operational and Maintenance Data on CD format.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with the same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.



C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch, 20-lb/sq. ft. white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood.



3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping.



6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

G. Commissioning report per Section 01800 of the Specifications.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,



maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in the manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION



A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for the schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 01800 - 1

SECTION 01800 – GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Commissioning is a quality-oriented process for achieving, verifying, and documenting that the performance of facilities, systems, and assemblies meet defined objectives and criteria. The commissioning process includes specific tasks to be conducted during construction to verify that construction is performed in accordance with contract requirements, equipment installations provide adequate service access, systems perform in accordance with design intent, and training meets the Owner's requirements.

B. The commissioning process does not take away from or reduce the responsibility of the contractor

to provide finished and fully functioning systems.

C. The GC shall include the cost of commissioning in the total Contract Sum.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections apply to this section.

1.3 COMMISSIONING TEAM

A. Commissioning Team: The members of the commissioning team consist of:

1. The Owner’s representative (OR) 2. The commissioning authority (CA) 3. The architect and design engineers (AE) 4. The electrical engineer (EE) 5. The mechanical engineer (ME) 6. The General Contractor (GC) 7. The mechanical contractor (MC) 8. The electrical contractor (EC) 9. The testing and balancing contractor (TAB) 10. The controls contractor (CC) 11. The Owner’s facility operating and maintenance staff 12. Other installing subcontractors 13. Equipment suppliers and manufacturers representatives

B. For this project the CA will be hired by the Owner. The CA is TBD.

C. The CA directs and coordinates the project commissioning activities and reports to the Owner. All

team members work together to fulfill their contracted responsibilities and meet the objectives of the Contract Documents.

1.4 SCOPE

A. This section provides the general requirements that apply to the implementation of the commissioning process. The sequence of operations in Section 15900 “HVAC Instrumentation and Controls” shall be tested and verified.



B. The GC and its subcontractors, suppliers and vendors shall provide commissioning services as described in this specification, Section 15995, Section 16415, and Section 16995 for the following equipment, components, assemblies, and systems installed as part this project:

1. Generators 2. Paralleling Switchgear 3. ATSs 4. RTU-A 5. Fans 6. Dampers 7. Fueling System including day tanks, transfer pumps, and controls 8. Automatic Temperature Controls 9. Direct Digital Control System 10. Generator Remote Annunciation

C. Mobile Generator Commissioning Sequence, the GC and its subcontractors shall perform the

following in the order shown:

1. Install the Paralleling Switchgear and generator control panel complete with software and site specific software.

2. Provide and connect temporary mobile generator to the Paralleling Switchgear using a disconnect switch and existing riser as shown on the riser diagram.

3. Set new emergency ATSs (EM2, EM3, and EM4) 4. Set stand-by ATS:2, 3, 4, 13, SBP1S, and SBP1C 5. Connect and energize new utility feeders to emergency ATSs 6. Connect and energize Paralleling Switchgear feeders to all new ATSs. 7. Complete control wiring as shown on detail 5 of sheet E1. 8. Install temporary 20A circuits to the utility side of stand-by ATS: 2, 3, 4, 13, SBP1S, and

SBP1C.to verify ATS operation. 9. Simulate Paralleling Switchgear operation and receive manufacture concurrence to proceed

with the transfer. 10. Connect two 100 kW temporary load banks, one to the load side of ATS-EM2 and the other

to the Paralleling Switchgear fire pump circuit breaker. 11. Connect two 65 kW temporary load banks, one to the load side of ATS-EM3 and the other to

the load side of ATS-EM3. 12. Simulate utility failure at each ATS individually, and confirm the mobile generator starts and

load transfers to the Paralleling Switchgear at the ATS. 13. Simulate a complete building utility failure and confirm all ATSs (including fire pump) transfer

to the Paralleling Switchgear in the specified sequence (note there will be no load on ATS-2, 3, 4, 13, SBP1S, and SBP1C

14. Restore utility power to the Central Switchgear and confirm all ATSs return to their utility position..

15. Remove the temporary load banks and utility power connections 16. Lock out tag out the all of the Paralleling Switchgear circuit breakers supplying ATS-2, 3, 4,

13, SBP1S, and SBP1C. 17. ATS-EM2, EM3, and EM4 and the fire pump will remain operational as loads are transferred.

D. Building Generator Pre-Commissioning Sequence

1. Set new generators 2. Connect fuel system, control wiring and all systems required for operation 3. Confirm fuel system is operational 4. Provide and connect a 1.5kW of load bank to generator #1 5. Test generator #1 as shown in the Section 16231 Packaged Engine Generators. 6. Confirm generator #1 operates correctly. 7. Disconnect the 1.5kW of load bank from generator #1 8. Connect the 1.5kW of load bank to the generator #2



9. Test generator #2 as shown in the Section 16231 Packaged Engine Generators. 10. Confirm generator #2 operates correctly. 11. Disconnect the 1.5kW of load bank from generator #2 12. Proceed with the connection to the Paralleling Switchgear.

E. Building Generator/ Paralleling Switchgear Commissioning Sequence

1. The objective of the test is to verify the combined operation of the generators and the Paralleling Switchgear prior to removal of the temporary generator. The building load, a 900 kW load bank and two 300 kW load banks will be used.

2. The commissioning will take place when the building is unoccupied. 3. Temporarily connect the two 300 kW load banks to the output circuit breakers for ATS-

SBP1S and ATS-SBP1C. 4. Temporarily connect the 900 kW load bank at the existing tap box at the loading dock,

utilizing the three sets of unused 500 kcmil conductors 5. At the beginning of the test open the disconnect switch connecting the temporary generator

to the temporary generator circuit. 6. Set the loading dock load bank to 100 kW and the two 300 kW load banks to full capacity 7. Verify the system is operating normally and simulate a power failure 8. Verify the both generators start and synchronize to the bus. 9. Verify the ATSs close to the bus in the proper order. 10. Measure the combined generator output. If it is below 2.8 mW manually close the mobile

generator circuit breaker and increase the load in 100 kW stages. 11. Observe the Paralleling Switchgear automatically shed loads in the specified sequence until

the loading dock load bank is fully loaded at 900 kW. 12. Manually open the temporary generator circuit breaker and manually return the shed ATSs

to the bus and automatic operation. 13. When the building load plus the two 300 kW load banks are again closed to the bus simulate

a failure of Generator #1 and observe the non critical loads shed. 14. Return Generator #1 to operation and manually return the load to automatic operation. 15. When the building load plus the two 300 kW load banks are again closed to the bus simulate

a failure of Generator #2 and observe the non critical loads shed. 16. Return Generator #2 to operation and o return the load to automatic operation. 17. Return utility power to the ATSs and observe the ATSs switch to utility power and Paralleling

Switchgear disconnect the generators from the bus and into their cool down period. 1.5 COORDINATION

A. Project Commissioning Team: The members of the project commissioning team will consist of the commissioning authority and any support personnel, the Owner’s facility staff or designee, the Contractor, subcontractors and/or vendors as required, and the architect/ engineer.

B. Management: The CA coordinates the commissioning activities through the OR. All members shall

work together to fulfill their contracted responsibilities and meet the objectives of the Contract Documents.

C. Scheduling: The CA will provide a commissioning plan with sufficient information to the Contractor

for required commissioning activities. The Contractor will integrate all commissioning activities into the overall project schedule. All parties will address scheduling problems and make necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to expedite the commissioning process.



1.6 PROCESS

A. The following is a brief overview of the typical commissioning tasks during and after construction and the general order in which they occur.

1. Commissioning during construction begins with an initial commissioning meeting conducted by the CA where the commissioning process is reviewed with the project commissioning team members.

2. Additional meetings will be required throughout construction, scheduled by the CA, through the Owner and GC, with necessary parties attending to plan, scope, coordinate, and schedule future activities and resolve problems.

3. Equipment documentation is submitted to the CA, through the Owner and GC, during normal submittals, including detailed startup procedures.

4. The GC and its subcontractors shall implement all pre-functional checklists as required by the manufacturer’s start-up requirements. The GC shall submit copies of all pre-functional checklists as part of closeout documents.

5. The GC and its subcontractors shall schedule and implement all required startup processes for new equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s warranty requirements. The GC shall submit copies of all start-up reports as part of closeout documents.

6. All pre-functional checklists and equipment startup shall be completed before systems performance verification. Additionally, testing and balancing and automation system trending shall be completed before systems performance verification.

7. The GC shall implement all testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) procedures and submit reports as required by the contract documents. The CA will witness TAB procedures.

8. The ME shall review and approve the TAB report. 9. The Contractor shall verify that the subcontractors’ construction checklists are executed and

documented and that startup and initial checkout are performed. The CA will verify that the Testing and Balancing (TAB), construction checklists and startup were completed according to Contract requirements.

10. The CA will observe equipment and system performance verification test procedures and develop written commissioning scripts. Responsibilities for all parties will be identified in the scripts. The performance verification tests shall be executed and implemented by the Contractor and its subcontractors under the direction of the CA with participation of the Owner’s facility staff.

11. Issues discerned during construction, start-up, or performance verification will be documented by the CA. Rectification of issues resides with the Contractor or AE.

12. The CA reviews the O&M documentation for completeness and pertinence; and participates in Contractor’s instructions and training of Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel.

B. Other than deferred seasonal performance verification of HVAC systems, all equipment/systems

commissioning, including all Owner training, shall be completed before Substantial Completion. 1.7 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The general responsibilities of various parties in the commissioning process are provided herein; amplification of specific responsibilities is in Divisions 15 and 16.

B. All Parties shall:

1. Follow the Commissioning Plan. 2. Attend initial commissioning meeting and additional meetings as necessary.

C. Owner’s Representative (OR) shall:

1. Facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work by the CA, and, with the GC and CA, ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master schedule.

2. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other commissioning team meetings.



3. Furnish a copy of all construction documents, addenda, and Change documents. 4. At Owner’s option, review any performance test procedures submitted by the CA. 5. At Owner’s option, observe and witness startup and performance testing of selected

equipment. 6. Review commissioning progress and deficiency reports. Work to resolve CA-cited

noncompliance issues and deficiencies. 7. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in

commissioning team activities and Contractor’s instructions and training. 8. Assist the CA as necessary in the seasonal or deferred performance verification and

deficiency corrections required by the specifications. 9. Acknowledge completion of commissioning process.

D. Architect/Engineer (AE) shall:

1. Architect: In addition to performing its contractual construction contract administration functions, architect shall:

a. Attend initial commissioning meeting and selected commissioning team meetings. b. Coordinate CA review and approval of Contractor-submitted submittals and shop

drawings related to commissioned equipment. Architect will forward a set of relevant documents at time of receipt. A/E will coordinate receipt of CA review documents within fourteen (14) days of receipt and shall incorporate any CA comments into the submittals and shop drawings returned to the Contractor.

c. Provide any design documentation requested by the CA. d. Coordinate with OR to assure that the CA is:

1) Provided copies of approved shop drawings as they are returned to the Contractor.

2) Notified of time, date, and place of all regularly scheduled progress meetings, and of any special meetings that may be called regarding commissioned systems.

3) Copied on all correspondence pertinent to the commissioned systems including but not limited to minutes of progress meetings, responses to Contractor requests for information and Change documentation.

e. Coordinate resolution of cited deficiencies (as appropriate).

2. Engineers: In addition to performing its contractual construction contract administration functions of submittals review, site visits, O&M manuals and As-Built documents review, the Engineers shall:

a. Attend initial commissioning meeting and other selected commissioning team meetings.

b. Provide any design narrative and sequences documentation requested by the CA. Assist in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings, or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing performance verification procedures.

c. Participate in the resolution of cited deficiencies (as appropriate). d. When requested by the OR, participate in training of Owner’s operating and

maintenance personnel, including providing systems design intent. e. When requested by the OR, witness commissioning procedures and performance

verification of selected equipment and systems

E. Contractors: The Contractor (GC) and its subcontractors, suppliers, and vendors shall:

1. Provide representatives with expertise and authority to act on their behalf and schedule them to participate in and perform all commissioning activities including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Incorporate commissioning activities into the project schedule.



b. Conduct detailed startup procedures for all commissioned equipment/systems. c. Implement specific test procedures as required by the individual commissioning

scripts. d. Document all test results and submit written test results to the CA. e. Attend initial commissioning meeting and other selected commissioning team

meetings. f. The GC shall execute the commissioning responsibilities according to the Contract

Documents and ensure that all its subcontractors, suppliers and vendors do likewise. Among other requirements:

1) The CA shall be notified to witness construction milestones. 2) Pre-functional checklists shall be completed by contractors as work progresses. 3) Written responses are to be provided to deficiencies/issues resolution logs

issued by the CA; responses are to be returned to the CA within a maximum of 2-weeks of date of issue (earlier as needed to maintain project progress without project delay).

4) O&M manuals shall be submitted by the GC for review no later than 60 days after the last shop drawing/submittal has been approved or a minimum of eight (8) weeks before Substantial Completion, whichever is earlier.

5) Provide training of the Owners personnel prior to Substantial Completion. Training plan shall be submitted for approval at least four weeks prior to first training session. Approved O&M manuals must be employed in training.

6) Provide equipment/systems performance verification under CA direction, allowing for seasonal or deferred verification. The GC shall provide all tools or the use of tools to start, check-out and test equipment and systems. Evaluate performance deficiencies and, in collaboration with entity responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective action.

2. Provide all test equipment, temporary connections and cables, load banks and other temporary equipment required for testing.

F. Commissioning Authority (CA) shall:

1. Coordinate and direct the commissioning activities in a logical, sequential and efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized documentation, clear and regular communications and consultations with all necessary parties, frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical expertise.

2. Coordinate the commissioning work and, with the GC and OR, help integrate commissioning activities into the master schedule.

3. Plan and conduct an initial commissioning meeting and other commissioning meetings as required.

4. Request and review additional information from the Contractor required to perform commissioning tasks, including O&M materials, Contractor startup and checkout procedures.

5. Review AE approved Contractor submittals applicable to systems being commissioned for compliance with commissioning needs.

6. Write and distribute construction pre-functional checklists. Monitor execution of checklists during construction and provide approval when warranted.

7. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system installations. Attend selected planning and job-site meetings to obtain information on construction progress. Review construction meeting minutes for revisions/substitutions relating to the commissioning process. Assist in resolving discrepancies.

8. Witness and document milestone events. 9. Recommend approval of systems startup by reviewing startup reports and by selected site

observation. 10. With necessary assistance and review from AE, GC and its subcontractors and vendors;

develop the performance verification procedures (commissioning scripts) for equipment and



systems. Analyze any performance trend logs and monitoring data to verify performance. Direct, coordinate, and/or witness equipment/systems performance verification and recommend approval. Coordinate retesting as necessary until satisfactory performance is achieved.

11. Maintain a Master Issues Log. Provide the Owner with written progress reports and test results with recommended actions.

12. Witness performance testing and commissioning of listed equipment and systems. 13. Witness performance testing of select systems over which the CA may not have direct

control such as smoke control systems tested by Fire Marshall, tests by manufacturer’s personnel, and other Owner contracted tests. Assure that tests documentation is in O&M manuals.

14. Review equipment warranties to ensure adequacy and that the Owner’s responsibilities are clearly defined.

15. Witness and participate in the Contractor’s training of the Owner’s operating personnel. 16. Review the O&M manuals. 17. Provide a final commissioning report (as described in this section).

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: Systems commissioning may be construed to be in three parts:

installation verification, training and demonstrations, and performance verification.

A. Installation verification utilizes Pre-Functional Check Lists, documenting that equipment/systems are installed per Contract Documents, are serviceable, and are started in accordance with Contract requirements and/or manufacturers’ recommendations.

B. Contractor’s training of and demonstrations for Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel

occurs after Pre-Functional Checks are complete and all test and inspection reports and operation and maintenance manuals have been submitted and approved. Training and demonstrations usually precede Performance Verification; some training, such as use and operations of the automation system, occurs during and after performance verifications.

C. Performance verification employs Functional Performance Verification forms and occurs only after

all work required in related Sections has been successfully completed. HVAC systems require functional performance verification in distinct heating and cooling seasons; i.e. a minimum of two sessions of performance verification.

3.2 MEETINGS:

A. Initial Meeting. Within 60 days of the Notice to Proceed, CA shall schedule an initial commissioning meeting. All commissioning parties are required to attend. CA will issue an agenda and chair the meeting. General content of the meeting will be for the CA to provide an overview of the commissioning process for the project and to establish lines of communications.

B. Post-Submittal Meeting: Within 30 days of the final mechanical submittal approval, the CA will

schedule a coordination meeting for the concerned parties. CA will issue an agenda and chair the meeting. General content of the meeting will be for the CA to deliver the pre-functional checklists.

C. Miscellaneous Meetings. Other meetings may be planned and conducted by the CA as

construction progresses to address coordination, deficiency resolution, and planning issues.



3.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. The CA will review the Contractor’s submittals related to the commissioned equipment for conformance to the Contract Documents as it relates to the commissioning process, to the performance of the equipment and adequacy for developing test procedures. This review is intended primarily to aid in the development of performance verification procedures and only secondarily to verify compliance with equipment specifications. The CA will notify the Owner, and the A/E of items missing or areas that are not in conformance with Contract Documents.

B. The CA may request additional submittal documentation to facilitate the commissioning work.

These requests may entail manufacturer’s printed installation and detailed startup procedures, full sequences of operation, O&M data, performance test procedures, control drawings and details of Owner contracted tests. All documentation requested by the CA shall be included by the subcontractors in the O&M manuals.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS AND START-UP:

A. Pre-Functional checklists are employed to verify that the equipment and systems are fully connected and operational. Installation elements of the checklists for a given system must be successfully completed and approved prior to startup. Contractors assert completion of installations, CA verifies contractors’ assertions.

B. Equipment startups are performed by responsible contractors and/or factory authorized technicians

as required by pertinent specification sections. The primary role of the CA in the start-up process is to ensure that there is written documentation that each of the specified start-up requirements or the manufacturer-recommended procedures has been completed. Successful start-ups shall be documented on the Pre-Functional Checklists.

C. Execution of Pre-Functional Checklists and Startup:

1. The pre-functional checklists will be provided by the CA at the Post Submittal Commissioning Meeting. The sample pre-functional checklists will be revised in response to approved submittals.

2. The execution and approval of the pre-functional checklist and startup shall be directed and performed by the Contractor, subcontractor or vendor. Signatures are required of the applicable subcontractors for verification of completion of their work.

3. The Contractor/subcontractor responsible for the purchase of the equipment shall develop the full startup plan by combining the manufacturer’s detailed startup and checkout procedures and the construction checklists and document the successful start-up. CA shall witness startups and verify successful startup documentation.

4. The Contractor shall coordinate startup and checkout with the Owner, AE, and CA. In general, startup of all major pieces of equipment shall be witnessed; a sampling strategy will be used for witnessing startup of multiple similar pieces of equipment.

D. Issues, Non-Conformance, and Approval in Checklists and Startup (Issues Log):

1. During the commissioning process, the Commissioning Authority may identify issues that require corrective action. The Commissioning Authority has no authority to dictate ways and means of issues resolution other than enforcing the dictates of Contract Drawings and Specifications. Resolution of issues that require interpretations or modifications to the Contract Documents shall be the responsibility of the Architect and Owner.

2. Written responses shall be made to issues reported by the Commissioning Authority. The Commissioning Authority shall provide status reports and issues logs as deemed appropriate during the commissioning process with original provided to Owner and copies to the General Contractor, and Architect. The General Contractor and/or Architect shall provide the Owner with a written response to each issue cited by the Commissioning Authority as to corrective actions implemented. The written response shall be provided to the Owner within



a minimum of two (2) weeks of the date of the Commissioning Authority's issues citing correspondence (or earlier as required by the project schedule); copies shall be provided to the Commissioning Authority, General Contractor, and Architect. Issues that have not been fully resolved within the two-week period shall be noted as such with explanation of intended resolution; and subsequent status reports of the continued issue resolution shall be made in writing at two week intervals until such time as the issue has been fully rectified. The Owner reserves the right to withhold partial payment for construction contract or professional services until satisfactory resolution of commissioning issues have been documented and verified.

3.5 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. The commissioning process requires detailed O&M documentation as identified in this section, Section 01782, and technical specifications.

B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer for review at least

eight (8) week before requesting inspection for substantial completion. AE shall provide the Operating and Maintenance Manuals to the Commissioning Authority after the AE’s review. The Manuals with AE and Commissioning Authority’s review comments will be returned to the Contractor for preparation for use in training of Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel. Return of the reviewed Manuals shall be approximately six weeks after Contractor submission.

C. Manuals format and content shall be as specified in Section 01782.

3.6 DEMONSTRATIONS AND TRAINING:

A. The Contractor shall provide demonstrations and training in accordance with Section 01770 and technical specification sections.

B. Demonstration and training plan shall be submitted to the Commissioning Authority at the time of

submission of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Plan shall fully detail all demonstrations and training that is to be provided by the Contractor to the Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel and include a time allocation schedule. Actual dates and times, if used, shall be understood as tentative and subject to change based upon actual construction progress. However, at a minimum, the Demonstration and Training schedule shall include time allocations (i.e. hours) for each piece of equipment or system for which demonstration and training are specified. Commissioning Authority review comments will be provided when Operating and Maintenance Manuals are returned to the Contractor. The plan shall, as a minimum, cover the following elements:

1. Equipment/system 2. Intended audience 3. Location of training 4. Subjects covered (description, duration of discussion, special methods, etc. 5. Methods of training (classroom lecture, manufacturer’s quality video, site walk-through,

actual operational demonstrations, written handouts, etc.).

C. The approved O&M manuals shall be incorporated into all training sessions.

1. Use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material included in the O&M manuals.

2. Review the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include startup, operation in all modes possible, shutdown, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures.

3. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns. 4. Discussion of warranties and guarantees.



5. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 6. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.

D. The majority of training and demonstrations shall precede Performance Verification; some training,

such as use and operations of the automation system, occurs during and after performance verifications. All training shall occur before Substantial Completion.

E. The CA participation in demonstration and training is largely observational, verifying that training

has given to the satisfaction of Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel. The CA may amplify the training sessions by explaining design concepts and systems interactions.

3.7 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION:

A. Requirements: Performance verification shall demonstrate that each system is operating according to the design intent and Contract Documents. Performance verification facilitates bringing the systems from a state of individual substantial completion to full dynamic operation. All major systems shall have performances verified by the CA.

B. Coordination and Scheduling: The Contractor shall provide sufficient notice, regarding their

completion schedule for the pre-functional checklists and startup of all equipment and systems to allow the performance verification to be scheduled and conducted before Substantial Completion. The commissioning team shall oversee, witness, and document the performance all equipment and systems. The CA in association with the Contractor/subcontractors and facility staff shall execute the verifications.

1. Performance verification shall be conducted after the pre-functional checklists and startup has been satisfactorily completed.

2. For HVAC systems, air balancing and water balancing shall be completed and all systems shall be satisfactorily operating under automation system control programming (automatic control) prior to performance verification.

3. Performance verification proceeds from components to sub-systems to systems. When the proper performance of all interacting individual systems has been achieved, the interface or coordinated responses between systems shall be verified.

C. Procedures: CA will provide detailed performance verification procedures and forms after all

submittals, including controls, have been approved. Equipment performance shall be tested or verified per the parameters and requirements of the pertinent technical specifications and/or manufacturers’ recommendations. Systems performances shall be verified per procedures of pertinent technical specifications, including Testing and Balancing of Division 15, and as further amplified by the CA.

1. Performance testing and verification may be achieved by manual testing or by monitoring the performance and analyzing the results using the control system’s trend log capabilities or by stand-alone data loggers. The CA may substitute specified methods or require an additional method to be executed other than what was specified, with the approval of the AE and Owner. The CA will determine which method is most appropriate for tests that do not have a specified method.

2. Performance verification and testing shall be performed under design conditions as closely as is practically possible. Simulation of design conditions may be employed to verify performance. When simulation is used, the actual results may also require re-verification under design load conditions.

3. The Installing Contractor shall operate all equipment and systems in support of the commissioning work effort and shall provide all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to allow operational and performance verification of all commissioned equipment and systems.



D. Non-Conformance:

1. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during performance verification at the discretion of the CA. In such cases the deficiency and resolution will be documented on the procedure form or on an attached sheet.

2. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified that cannot be immediately rectified, the CA shall discuss the issue with the commissioning team:

a. When there is no dispute on the issue and the Contractor accepts responsibility to correct it, the CA will document the issue in the Issues Log. After the Contractor acknowledges correction of the deficiency in writing in the Issues Log, the Contractor shall reschedule the test; and the test shall be repeated.

b. If there is a dispute about an issue, regarding whether it is a Contractor issue or a design issue:

1) The apparent issue shall be documented in the Issues Log. 2) The Owner will determine the responsible party and the responsible party shall

indicate the resolution on the Issues Log and the performance verification shall be repeated responsive to the resolution.

3. The Contractor shall acknowledge in writing the status of each outstanding issue identified in the Issues Log. A maximum two week time interval will be allowed between the date of issuance of the Issues Log and the Contractor’s resolution of deficiency and its response; however a faster Contractor correction and/or response will be required as necessary to maintain the project schedule and not delay project completion. When deficiencies have not been rectified within the allotted two weeks, Contractor’s response shall provide explanations.

4. Failure Due to Manufacturer Defect: If 10% (or three, whichever is greater) of identical pieces of equipment fail to perform in accordance with the Contract Documents (mechanically or substantively) due to a manufacturing defect, not allowing it to meet its submitted performance specification, all identical units may be considered unacceptable by the Owner, AE or CA. In such case, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with the following:

a. The Contractor or manufacturer’s representative shall examine all other identical units making a record of the findings. The findings shall be signed and dated, written explanation of the problem, cause of failures, etc., and all proposed solutions.

b. The Owner will determine whether a repair is acceptable or whether a replacement of all identical units is required.

c. Performance verification shall be repeated after all repairs/replacements have been completed.

E. Deferred Performance Verification:

1. Unforeseen Deferred Tests. If any check or test cannot be completed due to the project completion level or required occupancy condition, execution of checklists and performance verification may be delayed upon approval of the CA and Owner. These tests will be conducted in the same manner as originally required as soon as possible.

2. Seasonal Testing: During the warranty period, seasonal testing (tests delayed until weather conditions are closer to the system’s design) shall be completed as part of this contract. The CA shall coordinate this activity through the Owner. Tests will be executed, documented by the CA and deficiencies should be corrected by the appropriate Contractor/ subcontractors with the CA witnessing. Any final adjustments to the O&M manuals and record drawings due to the testing shall be made by the Contractor.

F. Costs for Re-Testing: Contractor is responsible for costs of performance verification. The cost of

the work of the CA is covered by the Owner. However, where re-testing of a system is required due to a deficiency having been cited and the re-test again fails due to un-rectified deficiencies, the costs of the CA associated with all subsequent re-testing may be withheld from Owner’s payment



to the Contractor. Required retesting shall not be considered a justified reason for a claim of delay or for a time extension by the Contractor.

3.8 RECOMMENDED ACCEPTANCE:

A. The CA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on the performance verification forms. CA provides all forms in final commissioning manual delivered to the Owner with an executive summary recommending acceptance of the installation as complete and operating in accordance with contract requirements. Recommendation of acceptance may be conditional where:

1. The vast majority of the work was found to be installed and operating per Contract requirements, but some minor deficiencies remain. Final acceptance would be predicated upon the condition that all known issues have been corrected and accepted by the Owner.

2. The HVAC system may be conditionally accepted in the initial season of operation, with the condition that the operations in the opposite season must meet performance verification. Final acceptance of the HVAC system requires two season (i.e. heating season and cooling season) performance verification.

END OF SECTION – 01800


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 1

SECTION 03301 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for noncritical applications of concrete and for projects using small quantities of concrete.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: In addition to the following, comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following sections, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

D. Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMWORK

A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301.



2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II

2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag cement.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M; potable.

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Vapor Retarder: Multi-ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 6 mils (0.25 mm) thick.

B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.



2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.

B. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of floor

slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.

3.2 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643.

1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape.

3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.



C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.

D. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.

3.5 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm).

B. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

3.6 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface.

1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.

C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, fluid-applied or direct-to-deck-applied membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.

E. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods:



1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article.

B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301.

1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m) but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

2. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.

3.9 REPAIRS

A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section.



STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1

SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Structural steel. 2. Grout.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other

metal items not defined as structural steel. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs." 3. Division 9 painting Sections for surface-preparation and priming requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360.

B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.

C. Construction: Special moment frame; Special concentrated braced frame.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings.



3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint qualified by testing, including the following:

1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

F. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE.

C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1 or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification.

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel



nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-washer type with plain finish.

B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

C. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain.

D. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain.

E. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: Comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

2.4 GROUT

A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.



B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning”.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or

erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

D. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).



2.8 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2. Galvanize lintels attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

E. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.



B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Base Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to-cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.



3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.

B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.



STEEL DECK 05310 - 1

SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Roof deck.


1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous

steel shapes.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:

1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.

G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."



C. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Steel Deck:

a. ASC Profiles, Inc. b. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group. c. Consolidated Systems, Inc. d. DACS, Inc. e. D-Mac Industries Inc. f. Epic Metals Corporation. g. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. h. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. i. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. j. Roof Deck, Inc. k. United Steel Deck, Inc. l. Valley Joist; Division of EBSCO Industries, Inc. m. Verco Manufacturing Co. n. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40 (275) zinc coating.

2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 5. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 6. Side Laps: Overlapped.



2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch (1.52 mm) thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter.

H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

I. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of abutting panels.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.



F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Space welds as indicated. 3. Weld Washers: As indicated.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 36 inches (910 mm), and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, as indicated.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum.

D. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.



E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1

SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Load-bearing wall framing. 2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 3. Floor joist framing. 4. Roof rafter framing.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections.


A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As follows:

a. Dead Loads: Weights of materials and construction. b. Wind Loads: Per IBC 2009.

2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall

height.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

a. Upward and downward movement of 3/4 inch (19 mm).

B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."



1. Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.


A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Allied Studco. 2. AllSteel Products, Inc. 3. California Expanded Metal Products Company. 4. Clark Steel Framing. 5. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 6. Craco Metals Manufacturing, LLC. 7. Custom Stud, Inc. 8. Dale/Incor. 9. Design Shapes in Steel. 10. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. 11. Formetal Co. Inc. (The). 12. Innovative Steel Systems. 13. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries. 14. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. 15. SCAFCO Corporation. 16. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc. 17. Steel Construction Systems. 18. Steeler, Inc. 19. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 20. United Metal Products, Inc.

2.2 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Coating: G60 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm)

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows:



1. Coating: G60 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches

C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Coating: G60 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches

2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Coating: G60 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Coating: G60 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches

C. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: 1. Coating: G60 2. Flange Width: 2 inches

2.4 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING

A. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated, punched with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Coating: G60 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches

B. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Coating: G60 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches

2.5 ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING

A. Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Coating: G60 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches

2.6 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.



B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers and knee braces. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates.

2.7 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

C. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

D. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.



4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

A. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

D. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.


A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.



1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:

1. Anchor Spacing: As shown on Structural Drawings.

B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As shown on Structural Drawings



C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

E. Align floor and roof framing over studs according to AISI S200, Section C1. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated.

G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Structural Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads.

H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing.

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.

I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced vertically as indicated on Structural Drawings. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of two screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches (150 mm) deep.

2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure.

K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.5 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:



1. Stud Spacing: As indicated

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Structural Drawings. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 18 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.

2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

4. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.6 JOIST INSTALLATION

A. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.

B. Space joists not more than 2 inches (51 mm) from abutting walls, and as follows:

1. Joist Spacing: As indicated

C. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.

D. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.



C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections. 3. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards, steel edgings and loading-

dock edge angles. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other

Sections.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:

1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts

indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs." 3. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings." 4. Division 5 Section "Gratings."


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Grout.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.



B. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3. Provde stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325M, Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated, flat washers.

D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1).

E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

F. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.

G. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).

H. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

I. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.

J. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).

K. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).

L. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in



concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.



H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

2.8 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.



C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.10 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.



2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.

1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless otherwise indicated.

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



GRATINGS 05530 - 1

SECTION 05530 - GRATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal bar gratings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural-steel framing system components. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for grating treads and landings of steel-framed stairs. 3. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube handrails and

railings.


A. Delegated Design: Design gratings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Gratings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Walkways and Elevated Platforms Used as Exits: Uniform load of 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79

kN/sq. m).

C. Seismic Performance: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual".

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:


GRATINGS 05530 - 2

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with gratings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or ASTM A 1018/A 1018M.

C. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use.


A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.


GRATINGS 05530 - 3

B. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

E. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.

F. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

1. Fabricate toeplates to fit grating units and weld to units in shop unless otherwise indicated.

2. Toeplate Height: 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company. 2. All American Grating. 3. BarnettBates Corporation. 4. Borden Metal Products (Canada) Limited. 5. Fisher & Ludlow; Division of Harris Steel Limited. 6. Grating Pacific, Inc. 7. Grupo Metelmex, S.A. de C.V. 8. IKG Industries; a division of Harsco Corporation. 9. Marwas Steel Co.; Laurel Steel Products Division. 10. Ohio Gratings, Inc. 11. Seidelhuber Metal Products; Division of Brodhead Steel Products.

2.6 STEEL FINISHES


B. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly.

C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.


GRATINGS 05530 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or masonry.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

E. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated.

F. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.

G. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details.

B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown.

C. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above.



MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 1

SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following:

1. Miscellaneous blocking, grounds, nailers, and panels. 2. Plywood substrate for FRP Panels 3. Wall sheathing

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Wood treatment data from chemical treatment manufacturer. Include chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 1. Fire-Retardant Treatment (FRT): Include certification by treating plant that treated wood complies with specified requirements. 2. Warranty: Include warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack material above ground level on uniformly spaced supports to prevent deformation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. B. Grade Stamps: Furnish lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection agency that indicates grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.



C. Sizes: Provide nominal sizes indicated, complying with PS 20 except where actual sizes are specifically noted as being required. D. For FRP Panels installation, use 3/4” min fire retardant plywood (FRT) substrate. Plywood shall be free of knots. E. Surfacing: Dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. F. Plywood Wall Sheathing 2.2 WALL SHEATHING

A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 48/24. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch.

2.2 BOARDS FOR CONCEALED CONDITIONS A. Species: Any wood species listed by PS 20. B. Moisture Content: S-DRY, KD 19 or MC 19 (19 percent maximum moisture content). C. Grade: No. 2, 2 Common, or Construction Boards. 2.4 FASTENERS

A. Nails, Wire, Brads and Staples: FS FF-N-105.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

C. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. 2.5 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. General: Identify treated wood with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Inspect each piece after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of miscellaneous carpentry and in sizes that would require an excessive number or poor arrangement of joints.



B. Cut and fit miscellaneous carpentry accurately. Install members plumb and true to line and level. C. Securely fasten miscellaneous carpentry as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized standards.

D. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood.

E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of

structural support elements.

G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install where shown and where required for attachment of other work. Cut and shape to required size. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 PLYWOOD SHEATHING INSTALLATION

B. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

C. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Wall Sheathing:

a. Nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.

3.3 FRT PLYWOOD SUBSTRATE FOR FRP PANELS A. Install where shown and where required for attachment of other work. Coordinate location with other work involved. END OF SECTION 06105


METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 1

SECTION 07412 –METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes

1. Factory-formed: concealed-fastener, metal wall panels.

2. Finish must conform to the "Metal Construction Association Certified Premium Painted™" designation

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 5 Section “Cold Formed Metal Framing”

B. Division 6 Section “Miscellaneous Carpentry”

C. Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”


A. General: Provide metal wall panel assemblies that comply with performance requirements specified as determined by testing manufacturers' standard assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project, by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

B. System shall meet performance criteria as installed. Either test data or signed and sealed engineering calculations shall document the performance of the panel system to meet design loads required.

C. Wind Loading: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by wind pressures as follows:

1. Positive pressure: 22 psf normal to panel.

2. Negative pressure: -28 psf normal to panel.

D. Maximum Deflection under Design Loads:

1. 1/180 of span.

E. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 6.24lbf/sq. ft.



F. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting, wind-load design pressure of not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. and not more than 12 lbf/sq. ft.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's current product specifications and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Include small-scale elevations, as required. Show details of trim and flashing conditions, fastening and anchorage methods, weatherproofing techniques, terminations, and penetrations.

C. Samples:

1. Selection Samples: Submit actual metal chips with full range of colors available for Architect's selection.

2. Verification Samples: Submit two samples of each type of metal panel required, not less than 12 inches (305mm), and illustrating finished panel profile.

D. Product Test Reports: Submit copies of test reports or load tables verifying performance capability of panel system:

1. Metal Wall Panels: Include reports for UL 790/ASTM E 108, UL 580, ASTM E 283, ASTM E 331, Field Tested, ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Rating, Paint Performance Tests, AAMA 2605.

2. Fastener test and pull-out calculations

3. Load tables

4. Maintenance Data


A. Installer: Company specializing in the type of work required for this project, with not less than 2 years of documented experience.

B. Pre-Installation meeting: Convene meeting not less than one week prior to beginning installation between general contractor, installing contractor, owner's representative and manufacturer.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Do not deliver materials of this section to project site until suitable facilities for storage and protection are available.

B. Protect materials from damage during transit and at project site. Store under cover, but sloped to provide positive drainage. Do not expose materials with strippable protective film to direct sunlight or extreme heat.

C. Do not allow storage of other materials or allow staging of other work on installed metal panel



system.

D. Upon receipt of delivery of metal panel system, and prior to signing the delivery ticket, the installer is to examine each shipment for damage and for completion of the consignment.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form in which Wall Installer agrees to repair or replace components of custom-fabricated sheet metal wall that fail in materials or workmanship within 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: All panels are to be factory formed and packaged per job requirements.

1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience in the factory fabrication of metal wall panels.

2. Manufacturer must be certified to ISO 9001:2008 with design.

B. Specification is based upon the products of ATAS International, Inc., subject to verification of availability of products capable of matching existing adjacent panels.

C. Metal wall panels shall match existing in all aspects. General contractor shall field verify the existing metal panels system.

D. Secondary framing members as required for load criteria and wind requirements.

2.2 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS

A. Concealed-fastener, Lap seam Metal Wall Panels: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Panels:

1. Panels to be Factory fabricated in a controlled environment.



2. Panels to be tension leveled during roll forming process.

3. Panels to be produced in continuous lengths to interface with existing panel configuration.

B. Form all components true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or defects. Cut panels to precise lengths indicated on approved shop drawings or as required by field conditions.

C. Accessories: Factory fabricates trim and flashing components in standard lengths.

1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp and buckle.

2. Fabricate wall panels as required to maintain fabrication tolerances and to withstand design loads.

D. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.

E. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

F. Panels, fabrication and installation shall meet the requirements of the Metal Construction Association Preformed Metal Wall Guidelines

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements

1. Field measurements should be taken by the installer for verification of dimensional correctness in relationship to original plans, prior to providing manufacturer with a bill of material.

B. Delivery, Storage and Handling

1. Do not deliver materials of this section to project site until suitable facilities for storage and protection are available.

2. Protect materials from damage during transit and at project site. Store under cover, but sloped to provide positive drainage. Do not expose materials with strippable protective film to direct sunlight or extreme heat.

3. Do not allow storage of other materials or allow staging of other work on installed metal panel system.

4. Upon receipt of delivery of metal panel system, and prior to signing the delivery ticket, the installer is to examine each shipment or damage and for completion of the consignment.

C. Sequencing and Scheduling



1. Installer shall coordinate with general contractor as to scheduled delivery time after receipt of field verified bill of material by manufacturer as it relates to actual project scheduling.

3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Field cutting of metal wall panels by torch is not permitted.

2. Rigidly fasten metal wall panels and allow for thermal expansion and contraction as required by the panel manufacturer. Pre-drill panels as required.

3. Install screw fasteners.

4. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.

5. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing and material compatibility.

6. Provide weatherproof seals for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.

B. Fasteners: Use fasteners of size and length as required for compatibility with substrate.

1. Aluminum Wall Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners or metallic coated fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and aluminum or galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

2. Concealed fasteners shall have a high performance coating

3. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

4. Coat back side of aluminum wall panels with bituminous coating where wall panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal wall panel assemblies.

D. Provide water and air infiltration retarder / barriers as noted within project documents.

3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.



1. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and NRCA Waterproofing Manual. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

2. Panels, fabrication and installation shall meet the requirements of the Metal Construction Association Preformed Metal Wall Guidelines.

B. Coordinate with installation of:

1. Cold Formed Metal Framing, as noted in Section 5

2. Rough Carpentry, as noted in Section 6

3. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim, as noted in Section 7

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Protection:

1. Provide as required completed work of this section will be without damager or deterioration at date of substantial completion.

C. Touch up minor abrasions with matching paint provided by panel manufacturer. Remove and replace panels that cannot be satisfactorily touched up. See Metal Construction Association Technical Bulletin #95-1051.

D. Sweep and remove chips, shavings and dust from roof on a daily basis during installation period. Leave installed work clean, free from grease, finger marks and stains. Remove all protective masking from material immediately after installation of product.

E. Upon completion of installation, remove scraps and debris from project site.

F. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt and sealant.



MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07521 - 1

SECTION 07521 – Modified Bitumen Roofing

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, cants, curbs, and blocking.

C. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counter flashings.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section is based upon the products of Johns Manville roofing. No other manufacturer of roofing shall be accepted as an alternate product.

B. This Section specifies modified bitumen roofing, including, SBS-modified bituminous membrane roofing, cover board, roof insulation, and vapor retarder. The new roofing shall match existing roofing system in all aspects. The General contractor shall contact the manufacturer and verify all information.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to the following publications for definitions of roofing work related terms in this Section:

1. ASTM D 1079 “Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing.” 2. Glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.” 3. Roof Consultants Institute “Glossary of Roofing Terms” for definition of terms related to

roofing work in this Section.

B. Sheet Metal Terminology and Techniques: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.4 DESIGN Criteria

A. General: Installed roofing membrane system shall remain watertight; and resist specified wind uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Wind Uplift Performance: Roofing system shall be identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist wind uplift pressure calculated in accordance with ASCE-7.



1. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: <Insert number> lbf/sq. ft. (kN/sq. m). 2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: <Insert number> lbf/sq. ft. (kN/sq. m). 3. Corner Uplift Pressure: <Insert number> lbf/sq. ft. (kN/sq. m).

D. FMG Listing: Roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials shall comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in FMG's “RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90 2. Hail Resistance: SH

E. LEED Credits:

1. Roofing system shall be eligible for LEED Credit SS 7.1 and/or SS 7.2. 2. Insulation and cover board materials shall contribute to LEED credit MR 4.1. 3. Insulation package shall contribute to LEED EA credit. 4. Materials with minimal VOC shall contribute to LEED credit EQ 4.

F. EPA Energy Star:

1. Roofing membrane shall achieve an initial reflectance of greater than 0.65 and a three year aged reflectance of greater than 0.50.

G. T24/CRRC-1:

1. Roofing system shall comply with the requirements of Title 24. 2. Roofing membrane shall be tested by CRRC-1.

H. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets for each product to be provided.

I. Detail Drawings: Provide roofing system plans, elevations, sections, details, and details attachment to other Work, including:

1. Base flashings, cants, and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes. 4. Insulation fastening patterns.

J. Verification Samples: Provide for each product specified.

K. Maintenance Data: Refer to Johns Manville’s latest published documents on www.specJM.com.

L. Guarantees: Special guarantees specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive the specified manufacturer's guarantee.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing for roofing system identical to that used for this Project.



C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain all components from the single source roofing system manufacturer guaranteeing the roofing system. All products used in the system shall be labeled by the single source roofing manufacturer issuing the guarantee.

E. Provide evidence of CERTA training for any installer of torch-applied modified bitumen membrane. Copies of certifications are required prior to award and must be maintained on the jobsite for inspection at any time.


A. Deliver roofing materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when current and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and guarantee requirements.

1.8 GUARANTEE

A. Provide manufacturer's system guarantee equal to Johns Manville's Peak Advantage No Dollar Limit Roofing System Guarantee.

1. Single-Source special guarantee includes roofing plies, base flashings, liquid applied flashing, roofing membrane accessories; granule surfaced roofing membrane, roof insulation, fasteners, cover board, vapor retarder, walkway products, manufacturer’s expansion joints, manufacturer’s edge metal products, and other single-source components of roofing system marketed by the manufacturer.

2. Guarantee Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Wind Rider: Guarantee shall not exclude coverage for wind events up to 115 mph. 4. Hail Rider: Guarantee shall have no exclusions for hail events up to 2 inches. 5. Accidental Puncture Rider: Guarantee shall provide coverage for accidental puncture for

up to 16 billed repair hours per year for the life of the guarantee.

B. Installer’s Guarantee: Submit roofing Installer's guarantee, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system, for the following guarantee period:



1. Guarantee Period: Five Years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SBS-MODIFIED ASPHALT-SHEET MATERIALS

A. Roofing Membrane Sheet: [ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I, glass-fiber-reinforced] SBS-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. Basis of Design: DynaWeld Base to match existing - Verify in field.

B. Roofing Membrane Cap Sheet: [ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type I, glass-fiber-reinforced] SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified. Basis of Design: DynaWeld Cap FR to match existing - Verify in field.

2.2 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS - SBS

A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber sheet, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides. Basis of Design: PermaPly 28 to match existing- Verify in field.

B. Backer Sheet: [ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I, glass-fiber-reinforced] SBS-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. Basis of Design: DynaWeld Base to match existing – Verify in field.

C. Flashing Sheet: [ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type I, glass-fiber-reinforced [ASTM D 6298, embossed aluminum foil surfaced, glass-fiber-reinforced], SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified. Basis of Design: DynaWeld Cap FR to match existing – Verify in field.

D. Liquid Applied Flashing: A liquid and fabric reinforced flashing system created with a stitchbonded polyester scrim and a two-component, moisture cured, elastomeric, liquid applied flashing material, consisting of an asphalt extended urethane base material and an activator. Basis of Design: PermaFlash System to match existing – Verify in field

2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE - Bituminous

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with built-up roofing.

B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. Basis of Design: Asphalt Primer to match existing – Verify in field.

C. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. Basis of Design: Bestile Industrial Roof Cement to match existing – Verify in field.

D. Cold-Applied Flashing Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's asphalt-based, two-component, asbestos-free, trowel-grade, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with flashing applications. Basis of Design: MBR Flashing Cement to match existing – Verify in field.



E. Mastic Sealant: As required by Johns Manville.

F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and provided by the roofing system manufacturer. Basis of Design: All Purpose Fasteners and Plates to match existing – Verify in field.

G. Roofing Granules: Ceramic-coated roofing granules matching specified cap sheet, provided by roofing system manufacturer.

H. Coating: Acrylic elastomeric coating with unique bleed-blocking properties particularly well suited for coating over asphalt surfaces. Basis of Design: JM CR Seam Coating to match existing – Verify in field.

I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer.

2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING System Components

A. Expansion Joints: Provide factory fabricated weatherproof, exterior covers for expansion joint openings consisting of flexible rubber membrane, supported by a closed cell foam to form flexible bellows, with two metal flanges, adhesively and mechanically combined to the bellows by a bifurcation process. Provide product manufactured and marketed by single-source membrane supplier that is included in the No Dollar Limit guarantee. Basis of Design: Expand-O-Flash to match existing – Verify in field.

B. Metal Flashing Sheet: Metal flashing sheet is specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

2.5 WALKWAYS

A. Walkway Pads: Mineral-granule-surfaced, reinforced modified asphalt composition, slip-resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic provided by roofing system manufacturer, with a pad size of 32 inch x 32 inch. Basis of Design: Johns Manville DynaTred verify in field

2.6 COVERBOARD

A. Perlite Board: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders and waterproofing agents with top surface seal-coated. Basis of Design: : 1/2" DuraBoard to match existing – verify in field

2.7 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Basis of Design: ENRGY 3

1. Provide insulation package with R Value greater than



2. Provide insulation package with minimum thickness 4 inches with ½” perlite board to match existing.- Verify in field.

2.8 TAPERED INSULATION

A. Tapered Insulation: ASTM C 1289, provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches to meet existing roofing material. Verify slope in field prior to fabrication. Basis of Design: Tapered ENRGY 3

2.9 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.

B. Provide factory preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. Basis of Design: Tapered Pre-Cut Cricket

C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and furnished by roofing system manufacturer. Basis of Design: UltraFast Fasteners and Plates

D. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's No VOC, two-component cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. Basis of Design: MBR Bonding Adhesive

E. Urethane Adhesive: Manufacturer’s two component urethane adhesive formulated to adhere insulation to substrate. Basis of Design: JM Green Two-Part Urethane Insulation Adhesive

F. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. Basis of Design: FesCant Plus to match existing- Verify in field.

G. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."

2.10 VAPOR RETARDER

A. Torch Applied SBS Vapor Retarder : [ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I, glass-fiber-reinforced] [ASTM D 6164, Grade S, Type I, polyester-reinforced], SBS-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. Basis of Design: DynaWeld Base to match existing – Verify in field

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements affecting performance of roofing system:




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and remove from substrate sharp projections, dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction.

C. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate recommended by roofing manufacturer and allow primer to dry.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 RE-ROOF PREPARATION

A. Remove all roofing membrane, surfacing, coverboards, insulation, fasteners, asphalt, pitch, adhesives, etc.

1. Remove an area no larger than can be re-roofed in one day.

B. Tear out all base flashings, counterflashings, pitch pans, pipe flashings, vents and like components necessary for application of new membrane.

C. Remove abandoned equipment curbs, skylights, smoke hatches, and penetrations.

1. Install decking to match existing as directed by Owner's Representative.

D. Raise (disconnect by licensed craftsmen, if necessary) all HVAC units and other equipment supported by curbs to conform with the following:

1. Modify curbs as required to provide a minimum 8" base flashing height measured from the surface of the new membrane to the top of the flashing membrane.

2. Nail top of flashing and install new metal counterflashing prior to re-installation of unit. 3. Perimeter nailers must be elevated to match elevation of new roof insulation.

E. Immediately remove all debris from roof surface. Demolished roof system may not be stored on the roof surface.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.4 RECOVER PREPARATION

A. Prepare existing roof according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, applicable recommendations of the roofing manufacturer, and requirements in this Section.

B. Tear out all base flashings, counterflashings, pitch pans, pipe flashings, vents and like components necessary for application of new membrane.

C. Disable existing roof membrane by cutting a minimum 5 foot x 5 foot grid pattern.

D. “Skin” existing membrane at substrate.



E. Remove existing membrane at fasteners.

F. Remove and replace wet, deteriorated or damaged roof insulation and decking as identified in moisture survey.

G. Remove abandoned equipment curbs, skylights, smoke hatches, and penetrations. Install decking to match existing as directed by Owner's Representative.

H. Raise, (disconnect by licensed craftsmen, if necessary) all HVAC units and other equipment supported by curbs to conform with the following:

1. Modify curbs as required to provide a minimum 8" base flashing height measured from the surface of the new membrane to the top of the flashing membrane.

2. Nail top of flashing and install new metal counterflashing prior to re-installation of unit. 3. Perimeter nailers must be elevated to match elevation of new roof insulation.

I. Immediately remove all debris from roof surface. Demolished roof system may not be stored on the roof surface.

J. Prime existing cap sheet to prepare for recover application.

K. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Install modified bituminous vapor retarder sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows:

1. Torch apply vapor retarder to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer’s instruction.

2. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period required by manufacturer.

B. Laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids.

1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed.

C. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into membrane roofing system.


3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof system components so insulation and cover board is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installation of roof insulation and cover board.



C. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at junctures of roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees per manufacturer’s instruction.

D. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

E. Install insulation boards with long joints in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with like material.

F. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall thickness is 4 inches (101.6 mm) or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. Match existing roofing configuration. Verify existing conditions in field.

G. Trim surface of insulation boards where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

H. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.

I. Preliminarily Fastened Insulation for Mechanically Fastened Systems: Install insulation with fasteners at rate required by roofing system manufacturer or applicable authority, whichever is more stringent.

J. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and cover board and adhere to substrate as follows:

1. Install each layer in a two-part cold fluid-applied adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s instruction.

2. Install each layer in a two-part urethane adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s instruction.

K. Loose Laid Insulation: Loose lay all layers of insulation with staggered joints.

1. Install all layers according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Install all layers to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

L. Loose Laid Insulation with Top Insulation Layer Mechanically Fastened: Loose lay insulation with staggered joints and secure top layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type to deck type.

1. Fasten top layer according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten top layer to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

M. Mechanically Fastened with Subsequent Layers Adhered Insulation: Secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type to deck type.

1. Fasten first layer according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten first layer to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 3. Install subsequent layers in a cold fluid-applied adhesive according to roofing system

manufacturer’s instruction.



4. Install subsequent layers in a two-part urethane adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s instruction.

N. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.7 COVER BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so cover board is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof cover board.

C. Install cover board with long joints of cover board in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with cover board.

1. Cut and fit cover board within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

D. Trim surface of cover board where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

1. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.

E. Preliminarily Fastened Insulation for Mechanically Fastened Systems: Install insulation with fasteners at rate required by roofing system manufacturer or applicable authority, which ever is more stringent.

F. Adhered Cover Board: Adhere cover board to substrate as follows:

1. Install using a cold fluid-applied adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s instruction.

2. Install in a two-part urethane adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s instruction.

G. Mechanically Fastened Cover Board: Install each layer of cover board and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof cover board to deck type.

1. Fasten according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

H. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.8 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing membrane in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, applicable recommendations of the roofing manufacturer and requirements in this Section.

B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.



C. Where roof slope exceeds 1/2 inch per 12 inches (1:24, contact the membrane manufacturer for installation instructions regarding installation direction and backnailing

D. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing roofing system.

E. Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is imminent.

1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt with joints and edges sealed.

2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system.

3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

F. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction.

G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.9 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install two modified bituminous roofing membrane sheets and cap sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows:

1. Adhere to substrate in cold-applied adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s instruction.

2. Torch apply to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer’s instruction. 3. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period

required by manufacturer.

B. Laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids.

1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. 2. Apply roofing granules to cover exuded bead at laps while bead is hot.

C. Install roofing membrane sheets so side and end laps shed water.


3.10 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION

A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer. 2. Backer Sheet Application: Install backer sheet and adhere to substrate in approved

adhesive applied at rate required by roofing system manufacturer.



3. Backer Sheet Application: Install backer sheet and torch apply substrate as required by roofing system manufacturer.

4. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in approved adhesive applied at rate required by roofing system manufacturer.

5. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in approved asphalt roofing cement; apply cement at rate required by roofing system manufacturer.

6. Flashing Sheet Application: Torch apply flashing sheet to substrate as required by roofing system manufacturer.

B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above roofing membrane and 4 inches (100 mm) onto field of roofing membrane.

C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.

1. Seal top termination of base flashing with a strip of glass-fiber fabric set in MBR Flashing cement.

D. Roof Drains: Existing roof drain shall be used. Slope new roof as required by the manufacturer’s guidelines and specifications to drain into existing roof drain.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.11 COATING INSTALLATION

A. Ensure that all surfaces are clean, dry and free of any dirt, grease, oil or other debris that may interfere with proper adhesion.

B. Apply coating to roofing membrane and base flashings as recommended by the manufacturer using approved spray apparatus. Apply in two coats allowing the first coat to completely dry before applying the second coat.

3.12 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Sweep away loose aggregate surfacing and set walkway pads in additional flood coat of hot roofing asphalt.

B. Walkway Cap Sheet Strips: Install roofing membrane walkway cap sheet strips over roofing membrane [in hot roofing asphalt] [in cold-applied adhesive] [by torch application]. – SBS

C. Roof-Paver Walkways: Install walkway roof pavers according to manufacturer's written instructions in locations indicated, to form walkways. Leave 3 inches (75 mm) of space between adjacent roof pavers.



A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.



B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's Registered Roof Observer (RRO) to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.

C. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.14 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories: 1. Metal flashing. 2. Coping. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing, coping, and trim to withstand wind loads, structural

movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and

Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of roof specialty indicated with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For copings, roof-edge flashings, roof-edge drainage systems, and counterflashings made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components including fasteners, cover joints, and attachments.

E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance manual.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal



flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of

each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Copper: ASTM B 370; temper H00, cold rolled except where temper 060 is required for

forming; not less than 16 oz./sq. ft., unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G 90, commercial quality, or ASTM A 527, G 90,

lock-forming quality, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with 0.20 percent copper, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; not less than 0.0396 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 167, Type 304, soft annealed, with No. 2D finish, except

where harder temper is required for forming or performance; minimum 0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, used with rosin flux. B. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as

recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.

C. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and

containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. D. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and

fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,

recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior and interior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

F. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and

weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal. G. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar

accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material



being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with

recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated.

B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and

result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be

seamed, form seams, and solder. E. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate

elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. F. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed

surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not

allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. H. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component

being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.

1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for

application but never less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.4 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with

performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal. B. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. C. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material: 2. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. D. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following material:



1. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. E. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0396 inch thick. F. Coping: 1. Extruded Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. Verify and match profile and color of existing coping in field. 2. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be

installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with

performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.

B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

C. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin

edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work.

1. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder

into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate

elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant.

1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.



E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

F. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating

concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

G. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counter-flashings with installation of assemblies

to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and bed with sealant.

H. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans from pipe and install drain line to plumbing

waste or drain line.

I. Coping: 1. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 10-foot long, sections.

Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight.

2. Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.

a. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24-inch centers.

b. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch centers.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or

deterioration of finishes. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim

Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion.



ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 1

SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof curbs. 2. Equipment supports.


1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders. 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing, wood cants, and wood nailers 3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal

flashing and counterflashing, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. 4. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for fascia, copings, and gravel stops.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. Show layouts of roof accessories including plans and elevations. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section. 2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure. 3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,

piping, and conduit.

D. Samples: For each type of exposed factory-applied color finish required and for each type of roof accessory indicated, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.




A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated.


A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent damage.


A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coated and mill phosphatized for field painting.

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coated.

2. Factory-Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is indicated, provide pretreatment and white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat; with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil.

B. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, 1 inch thick.



B. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

C. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners.

D. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of EPDM rubber

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, polyurethane sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

2.4 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof Curbs: Provide metal roof curbs, internally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported on roof curbs. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, with stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation and integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Colony Custom Curbs. b. Commodity Products Company, Inc. c. Conn-Fab Sales, Inc. d. Curbs Plus Inc. e. Custom Curb, Inc. f. LM Curbs. g. Loren Cook Company. h. Metallic Products Corporation. i. Pate Company (The). j. Roof Products & Systems Corporation. k. Roof Products, Inc. l. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. m. ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. n. Uni-Curb, Inc. o. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick.

a. Finish: Prime painted

3. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish. 4. Factory install wood nailers at tops of curbs. 5. Factory insulate curbs with 1-1/2-inch- thick, glass-fiber board insulation. 6. Curb height may be determined by adding thickness of roof insulation and minimum base

flashing height recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.



2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Equipment Supports: Provide metal equipment supports, internally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, with stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation and integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.


a. Colony Custom Curbs. b. Commodity Products Company, Inc. c. Conn-Fab Sales, Inc. d. Curbs Plus Inc. e. Custom Curb, Inc. f. LM Curbs. g. Loren Cook Company. h. Metallic Products Corporation. i. Pate Company (The). j. Roof Products & Systems Corporation. k. Roof Products, Inc. l. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. m. ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. n. Uni-Curb, Inc. o. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick.

a. Finish: Prime painted

3. Factory-install continuous wood nailers 5-1/2 inches wide at tops of equipment supports. 4. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard removable counterflashing, fabricated of

same metal and finish as equipment support. 5. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories.

2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory



installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.

B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance.

D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.

E. Roof Curb Installation:

1. Set roof curb so top surface of roof curb is level.

F. Equipment Support Installation:

1. Set equipment support so top surface of equipment support is level.

G. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.

3.3 TOUCH UP

A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting in accordance with Division 9 painting Sections.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.



THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1

SECTION 07841 – THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes firestopping for the following: 1. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated floor and roof construction including both

empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items.

2. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated walls and partitions including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items.

3. Sealant joints in fire-resistance-rated construction. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive-rated joint sealants. 2. Division 15 Sections specifying ducts and piping penetrations. 3. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of

fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases. B. F-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop

systems with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the constructions penetrated.

C. T-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop

systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where indicated and where systems protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. T-rated assemblies are required where the following conditions exist:

1. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities. 2. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft

enclosures. 3. Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4 inch diameter

nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall cross-sectional area. D. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as

determined per ASTM E 119, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs.



E. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products

that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide

moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches or more in width and

exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting the floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

F. For firestopping exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread values of less than 25

and smoke-developed values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1

Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. 1. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local

regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and are nontoxic to building occupants.

C. Shop drawings detailing materials, installation methods, and relationships to adjoining

construction for each through-penetration firestop system, and each kind of construction condition penetrated and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting

agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop configuration for construction and penetrating items.

2. Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration to suit a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration approved by firestopping manufacturer's fire protection engineer with modifications marked.

D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their

products comply with specified requirements. E. Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and

inspecting agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products.

F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.




A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following requirements and those specified under the "System Performance Requirements" article:

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A

qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 under conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01 inch of water is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of

qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by

reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory," by Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency.

3. Fire-resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire-response

characteristics per ASTM E 119 under conditions where the positive furnace pressure differential is at least 0.01 inch of water, as measured 0.78 inch from the face exposed to furnace fire. Provide systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Fire-Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to

design designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Joint sealants, including backing materials, bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency.

B. Information on drawings referring to specific design designations of through-penetration

firestop systems is intended to establish requirements for performance based on conditions that are expected to exist during installation. Any changes in conditions and designated systems require the Architect's prior approval. Submit documentation showing that the performance of proposed substitutions equals or exceeds that of the systems they would replace and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed firestopping

that is similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and that has performed successfully.

D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems for each kind of

penetration and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer. E. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the

method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."

F. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure

that designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements.



1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages

with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to

moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate

temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural

means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Do not cover up those firestopping installations that will become concealed behind other

construction until authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each

other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill

materials and to comply with "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories include but are not limited to the following items:

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following: a. Semirefractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation. b. Ceramic fiber. c. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. d. Fire-rated formboard. e. Joint fillers for joint sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials.



3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. C. Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section

that comply with system performance and other requirements. 2.2 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating: Ceramic fibers in bulk form formulated for use with

mastic coating, and ceramic fiber manufacturer's mastic coating. B. Ceramic-Fiber Sealant: Single-component formulation of ceramic fibers and inorganic

binders. C. Endothermic, Latex Compound Sealant: Single-component, endothermic, latex formulation. D. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex formulation. E. Intumescent Putty: Nonhardening, dielectric, water-resistant putty containing no solvents,

inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one

side. G. Job-Mixed Vinyl Compound: Prepackaged vinyl-based powder product for mixing with water

at Project site to produce a paintable compound, passing ASTM E 136, with flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of zero per ASTM E 84.

H. Mortar: Prepackaged dry mix composed of a blend of inorganic binders, fillers, and

lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogenous mortar.

I. Pillows/Bags: Re-usable, heat-expanding pillows/bags composed of glass-fiber cloth cases

filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives.

J. Silicone Foam: Two-component, silicone-based liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands

and cures in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. K. Silicone Sealant: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing

elastomeric sealant of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other

horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/ gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) grade for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces.

3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag grade for openings in vertical and other surfaces.

L. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealant: Solvent-release-curing, single-component,

synthetic-polymer-based sealant of grade indicated below:



1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other

horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/ gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) grade for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces.

3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag grade for openings in vertical and other surfaces.

M. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating: a. FireMaster Bulk and FireMaster Mastic, Thermal Ceramics. 2. Ceramic-Fiber Sealant: a. Metacaulk 525, The RectorSeal Corporation. 3. Endothermic, Latex Sealant: a. Fyre-Shield, Tremco Inc. 4. Endothermic, Latex Compounds: a. Flame-Safe FS500/600 Series, International Protective Coatings Corp. b. Flame-Safe FS900/FST900 Series, International Protective Coatings Corp. 5. Intumescent Latex Sealant: a. Metacaulk 950, The RectorSeal Corporation. b. Fire Barrier CP 25WB Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products. 6. Intumescent Putty: a. Pensil 500 Intumescent Putty, General Electric Co. b. Flame-Safe FSP1000 Putty, International Protective Coatings Corp. c. Fire Barrier Moldable Putty, 3M Fire Protection Products. 7. Intumescent Wrap Strips: a. Dow Corning Fire Stop Intumescent Wrap Strip 2002, Dow Corning Corp. b. CS2420 Intumescent Wrap, Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip, 3M Fire Protection Products. 8. Job-Mixed Vinyl Compound: a. USG Firecode Compound, United States Gypsum Co. 9. Mortar: a. K-2 Firestop Mortar, Bio Fireshield, Inc. b. Novasit K-10 Firestop Mortar, Bio Fireshield, Inc.



c. KBS-Mortar Seal, International Protective Coatings Corp. 10. Pillows/Bags: a. Firestop Pillows, Bio Fireshield, Inc. b. KBS Sealbags, International Protective Coatings Corp. 11. Silicone Foams: a. Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam 2001, Dow Corning Corp. b. Pensil 200 Foam, General Electric Co. 12. Silicone Sealants: a. Dow Corning Firestop Sealant 2000, Dow Corning Corp. b. Dow Corning Firestop Sealant SL 2003, Dow Corning Corp. c. Pensil 100 Firestop Sealant, General Electric Co. d. CS240 Firestop Sealant, Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. Metacaulk 835, The RectorSeal Corporation. f. Metacaulk 880, The RectorSeal Corporation. g. Fyre-Sil, Tremco Inc. h. Fyre-Sil S/L, Tremco Inc. 13. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealants: a. Biostop 500 Intumescent Firestop Caulk, Bio Fireshield, Inc. b. Fire Barrier CP 25N/S Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products. c. Fire Barrier CP 25S/L Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products. 2.3 FIRE-RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing,

elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses, and requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire-resistive joint sealants.

B. Single-Component, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;

exposure-related Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.

1. Additional Movement Capability: Provide sealant with the capability to withstand the

following percentage changes in joint width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated:

a. 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100

percent movement. C. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related

Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.

1. Additional Movement Capability: Provide sealant with the capability to withstand the



following percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated:

a. 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100

percent movement. D. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT,

M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Single-Component, Neutral-Curing, Silicone Sealant: a. Dow Corning 790, Dow Corning Corp. b. Dow Corning 795, Dow Corning Corp. c. Silpruf, General Electric Co. d. Ultraglaze, General Electric Co. e. 864, Pecora Corp. 2. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: a. Vulkem 922, Mameco International Inc. b. Dynflex, Pecora Corp. c. Dynatred, Pecora Corp. d. Dynatrol II, Pecora Corp. e. Sikaflex 2cn NS, Sika Corp. f. Sonolastic NP 2, Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc. g. Dymeric, Tremco Inc. 3. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: a. Isoflex 880 GB, Harry S. Peterson Co., Inc. b. Isoflex 881, Harry S. Peterson Co., Inc. c. Vulkem 921, Mameco International Inc. d. Sikaflex--15LM, Sika Corp. 2.4 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping

manufacturer's directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions



have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping

to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from

penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. 2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound

surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that

manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces

that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and the

through-penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill

materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce

the following results: 1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials,

accessories, and penetrating items. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and

penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1, with ASTM

C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated.



B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to

produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required.

C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully

wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed.

D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or

curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce fire-resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until reports of examinations

are issued by local governing authority. B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with

requirements. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work

progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur.

B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating

substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements.



JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below: a. Perimeter joints between dissimilar materials and any penetration through exterior

wall. b. Joints between different materials. c. Perimeter joints between dissimilar materials and frames of door and louver

openings d. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,

windows, and louver openings. c. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section " Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sealing joints related to flashing and

sheet metal for roofing. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain

watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to establish and

maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint substrates.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification

Sections.



B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of

strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. D. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealant

samples in 1/2-inch wide joints formed between two 6-inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

E. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with

specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. F. Qualification data complying with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" article. Include

list of completed projects with project names addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified.

G. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that

materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.

H. Product test reports for each type of joint sealants indicated, evidencing compliance with

requirements specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant

applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single

manufacturer for each different product required. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating

manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their

deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following

conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint

sealant manufacturer.



2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.

3. When joint substrates are wet.

B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are

less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants

capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for

products of type indicated. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric

sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet at end of this Section, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.

B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealants that may be

incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Elastomeric Sealant Data Sheet.

2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable latex

sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively.

B. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 that accommodates joint

movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent.

C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, latex joint sealants that may be

incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



1. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: a. "AC-20," Pecora Corp. b. "Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. c. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc. 2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with

joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing,

nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

1. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in

unruptured state. C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with

ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to -26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION



A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply

with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint

sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.

4. Clean metal, glass, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant

manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining

surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to

products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following

requirements: 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at

position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.



a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and

replace with dry material.

2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints.

D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly

contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or

curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated. a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.

2. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess depth and at locations indicated.

3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods

and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances

or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations: a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units. c. Joints between metal panels. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and] louvers.



f. Control and expansion joints in overhead surfaces. g. Other joints as indicated.

2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, Class 25

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of concrete walls and partitions. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors. e. Other joints as indicated.

2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, Class 25 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic

surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant Location: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Other interior joints in wet areas where needed to limit mold and mildew growth. c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Silicone. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed bedding sealant joint

1. Applications:

a. Bedding joints under metal thresholds and saddles b. Bedding joints between sheet metal flashing and other materials.

2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, Class 25 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.



PAINTING 09910 - 1

SECTION 09910 – PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and

exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition

to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where a

surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available.

1. Painting includes field-painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts

(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.

C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces,

operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished

components unless otherwise specified on the drawings: a. Acoustic materials. b. Architectural woodwork and casework. c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. d. Light fixtures. e. Switchgear. f. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following

generally inaccessible areas: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Utility tunnels. d. Pipe spaces. e. Duct shafts. f. Areas below access floor system. 3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include:


PAINTING 09910 - 2

a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze. f. Brass. 4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment, such

as the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-

required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop-priming structural steel. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop-priming ferrous metal. 3. Division 9 Section "Wall Coverings" for substrate sealer under wall coverings. 4. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting mechanical and electrical work is specified in

Divisions 15 and 16, respectively. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1

Specification Sections. B. Product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers. 1. Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and

instructions for handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use. 2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and

application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) if applicable.

C. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts. 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. D. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be

applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.

1. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including primers. Use

representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.

2. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application.


PAINTING 09910 - 3

3. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only:

a. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4 x 8-inch samples of natural and

stained wood finish on actual wood surfaces. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting

system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same

manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and

containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum

ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and

waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and

surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and

surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85

percent; or at temperatures less than 5 F deg above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted

are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods.


PAINTING 09910 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Duron, Inc.- OWNER PREFERRED 2. Fuller O'Brien (Fuller). 3. The Glidden Company (Glidden). 4. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 5. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG). 6. Pratt and Lambert (P & L). 7. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W) 8. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe) 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related

materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the

various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate

colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of

standard colors. 2.3 PRIMERS A. Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated primers that are

compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, prime coat materials that may

be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Concrete and Masonry Primers: Interior, flat, latex-based paint. a. Duron: Block Kote Latex Block Filler b. Fuller: 202-XX Interior - Exterior Acrylic Latex Wall Paint. c. Glidden: 5300 Ultra-Hide Flat Wall Paint. d. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal #201. e. PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint.


PAINTING 09910 - 5

f. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. g. S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Flat B30W200. h. S-W: Wall and Wood Primer B49W2.

i. Devoe: 51701 Wonder-Prime Interior All Purpose Latex Primer Sealer &Vapor Barrier

2. Gypsum Drywall Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer. a. Duron: Interior Latex Drywall Primer b. Fuller: Pro-Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer. c. Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer. d. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal #201. e. PPG: 6-2 Quick-Dry Latex Primer Sealer. f. P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z30001. g. S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. h. Devoe: 50801 Wonder- Tones Latex Primer and Sealer 3. Ferrous Metal Primers: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primers. a. Devoe: 13101 Mirrolac Cover Up Rust Penetrating Primer. b. Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer. c. Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast-Dry Metal Primer. d. Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163. e. PPG: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer. f. P & L: Effecto Rust-Inhibiting Primer. g. S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1. 4. Ferrous Metal Primers: Alkyd-type primers. a. Duron: Dura Clad Alkyd Metal Primer b. Fuller: 621-05 Blox-Rust Latex Metal Primer. c. Glidden: 5205 Glid-Guard Tank and Structural Primer. d. Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163. e. PPG: 6-612 Speedhide Inhibitive White Primer. f. P & L: Effecto Primer Red or White. g. S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.

h. Devoe: 41820 Bar-Ox Alkyd Shop/Field Primer Grey.

2.4 UNDERCOAT MATERIALS A. Undercoat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated

undercoat materials that are compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, undercoat materials that may

be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel. a. Duron: Interior Acrylic Enamel Undercoater b. Duron: Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoater c. Fuller: 220-06 Interior Alkyd Wall Primer Sealer. d. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi-Gloss Enamel. e. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. f. PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater.


PAINTING 09910 - 6

g. P & L: E6 Enamel Undercoater. h. S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. i. Devoe: 51701 Wonder-Prime Interior All Purpose Latex Primer Sealer & Vapor Barrier j. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. k. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. l. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. m. S-W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel B34W200. n. S-W: Wall and Wood Primer B49W2. o. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Enamel. p. Glidden: 310 Glidden Wood Undercoater. q. S-W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200. 2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated finish-coat

materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, finish coat materials that may

be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Quick-drying, flat, acrylic paint. a. Duron: Duron Signature Lifetime Exterior 100% Acrylic Latex Flat House

Paint. b. Fuller: 262-XX 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat Finish. c. Glidden: 3525 Spred Glide-On. d. Moore: Moore's Flat Exterior Latex Masonry & House Paint #105. e. PPG: 72 Line Sun-Proof Acrylic Latex House Paint. f. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat House Paint. g. S-W: A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish A-6 Series. h. Devoe: 15XX Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint. 2.6 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated finish-coat

materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, finish coat materials that may

be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Interior, Flat, Latex-Based Paint: Ready-mixed, latex-based paint for a flat finish. a. Duron: Genesis Odor Free Latex Flat, 60 Series b. Fuller: 602XX Liquid Velvet Latex Wall c. Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall Paint. d. Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215. e. PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. f. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. g. S-W: Classic 99 Wall and Trim Paint A27W10. h. Devoe: 36XX Wonder-Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint.

2. Interior, Semi-Gloss, Latex-Based Paint. Ready-mixed, latex-based paint for a semi-gloss finish.


PAINTING 09910 - 7

a. Duron: Genesis Odor Free Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, 83 Series 3. Interior, Flat, Odorless, Alkyd Paint: Ready-mixed, interior, flat, low-odor, alkyd

enamel. a. Devoe: 21XX Velour Alkyd Flat Wall Paint. b. Fuller: 101XX Liquid Velvet Alkyd Flat Wall Paint. c. Glidden: 5700 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Flat Wall Enamel. d. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Sani-Flat #204. e. PPG: 6-50 Series Speedhide Alkyd Flat Wall Paint. f. P & L: Lyt-All Flowing Flat. g. S-W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Flat Wall Paint B32W101. 4. Interior, Semigloss, Odorless Alkyd Enamel: Semigloss, low-odor, alkyd enamel. a. Duron: Interior/ Exterior Porch & Floor Alkyd Enamel Low Gloss b. Fuller: 110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. c. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. d. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. e. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. f. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. g. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. h. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance

with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied.

1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and

conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure

compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over

substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting

fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of


PAINTING 09910 - 8

substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the

manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify

Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others.

2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint

manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing

appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.

c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.

3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,

mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white

shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.

c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other

wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat

of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been

shop-coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).

a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system

manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10.

b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.

c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint


PAINTING 09910 - 9

manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents

so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

D. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's

directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of

foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as

required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and

techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions

detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the

application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions.

4. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.

6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint.

8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

9. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 11. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or

otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not


PAINTING 09910 - 10

recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other

applicators according to the manufacturer's directions. Use of spray equipment is restricted to unoccupied areas.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as

recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended

by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. Use of spray equipment is restricted to unoccupied areas.

E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's

recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.

F. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items

exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. G. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Supports. 7. Motors and mechanical equipment. 8. Accessory items. H. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. I. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete

coverage with pores filled. J. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended

by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

K. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of

uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

L. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of

even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.

1. Provide satin finish for final coats.


PAINTING 09910 - 11

M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,

refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often

as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the

paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor.

2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner:

a. Quantitative materials analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. c. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. l. Color retention. m. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified

requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing, repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.

3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other

discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove

spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting.

Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective

wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore

damaged or defaced painted surfaces.


PAINTING 09910 - 12

3.7 PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. B. Concrete and Masonry (other than concrete masonry units): 1. Lusterless (Flat), Odorless, Latex Finish: Two coats. a. Primer: Interior, flat, latex-based paint. 1) Duron: Interior Acrylic Undercoater 2) Fuller: 202-XX Interior-Exterior Acrylic Latex Wall Paint. 3) Glidden: 5300 Ultra-Hide Flat Wall Paint. 4) Moore: Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal #201. 5) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. 6) P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 7) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Latex Flat B30W200. 8) Devoe: 36XX Wonder-Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. b. Second Coat: Interior, flat, odorless paint. 1) Duron: Genesis Odor Free Latex Flat, 60 Series 2) Fuller: 101XX Liquid Velvet Alkyd Flat Wall Paint. 3) Glidden: 5700 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Flat Wall Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Sani-Flat #204. 5) PPG: 6-50 Series Speedhide Alkyd Flat Wall Paint. 6) P & L: Lyt-All Flowing Flat. 7) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Alkyd Flat Wall Paint B32W101. 8) Devoe: 21XX Velour Alkyd Flat Wall Paint. 2. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5

mils. a. Primer: Interior, flat, latex-based paint. 1) Duron: Interior Acrylic Undercoater 2) Fuller: 202-XX Interior-Exterior Acrylic Latex Wall Paint. 3) Glidden: 5300 Ultra-Hide Flat Wall Paint. 4) Moore: Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal #201. 5) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. 6) P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 7) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Latex Flat B30W200. 8) Devoe: 36XX Wonder-Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1) Duron: Interior Acrylic Undercoater. 2) Fuller: 220-06 Interior Alkyd Wall Primer Sealer. 3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi-Gloss Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 5) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater. 6) P & L: E6 Enamel Undercoater. 7) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200.


PAINTING 09910 - 13

8) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. c. Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless enamel. 1) Duron: Genesis Odor Free Latex Semi-Gloss, 83 Series 2) Fuller: 110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. 5) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6) P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7) S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. 8) Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: Two finish coats over filled surface. a. Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler. 1) Duron: Block Kote Block Filler. 2) Fuller: 280-00 Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler. 3) Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler. 4) Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler #173. 5) PPG: 6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler. 6) P & L: Pro-Hide Plus Block Filler. 7) S-W: Heavy-Duty Block Filler B42W46. 8) Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil Acrylic Latex Block Filler. b. First and Second Coats: Interior, flat, latex-based paint. 1) Duron: Genesis Odor Free Latex Flat, 60 Series 2) Fuller: 602XX Liquid Velvet Latex Wall Paint. 3) Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall Paint. 4) Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215. 5) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. 6) P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 7) S-W: Classic 99 Wall and Trim Paint A27W10. 8) Devoe: 36XX Wonder-Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. 2. Semigloss, Enamel Finish: Two coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness

not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat. a. Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler. 1) Duron: Block Kote Block Filler. 2) Fuller: 280-00 Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler. 3) Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler. 4) Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler #173. 5) PPG: 6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler. 6) P & L: Pro-Hide Plus Block Filler. 7) S-W: Heavy-Duty Block Filler B42W46. 8) Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil Acrylic Latex Block Filler. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.


PAINTING 09910 - 14

1) Duron: Genesis Odor Free Latex Semi-Gloss, 83 Series 2) Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi-Gloss Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 5) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater. 6) P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 7) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. 8) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. c. Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless enamel. 1) Duron: Genesis Odor Free Latex Semi-Gloss, 83 Series 2) Fuller: 110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. 5) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6) P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7) S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. 8) Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. D. Gypsum Drywall Systems: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: Two coats. a. Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer. 1) Duron: Interior Acrylic Latex Drywall Primer & Sealer 2) Fuller: Pro-Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer. 3) Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer. 4) Moore: Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal #201. 5) PPG: 6-2 Quick-Dry Latex Primer Sealer. 6) P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z30001. 7) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. 8) Devoe: 50801 Wonder-Tones Latex Primer and Sealer. b. Finish Coat: Interior, flat, latex-based paint. 1) Duron: Genesis Odor Free Latex Flat, 60 Series 2) Fuller: 602XX Liquid Velvet Latex Wall Paint. 3) Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall Paint. 4) Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215. 5) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. 6) P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 7) S-W: Classic 99 Wall and Trim Paint A27W10. 8) Devoe: 36XX Wonder-Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. 2. Odorless Semigloss Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness not

less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer. 1) Duron: Interior Acrylic Latex Drywall Primer & Sealer


PAINTING 09910 - 15

2) Fuller: Pro-Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer. 3) Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer. 4) Moore: Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal #201. 5) PPG: 6-2 Quick-Dry Latex Primer Sealer. 6) P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z30001. 7) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. 8) Devoe: 50801 Wonder-Tones Latex Primer and Sealer. b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless, enamel. 1) Duron: Genesis Odor Free Latex Semi-Gloss, 83 Series 2) Fuller: 110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. 5) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6) P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7) S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. 8) Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. F. Ferrous Metal: (Interior) 1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry film thickness not

less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer. 1) Duron: Dura Clad Alkyd Metal Primer 2) Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer. 3) Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast-Dry Metal Primer. 4) Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163. 5) PPG: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer. 6) P & L: Effecto Rust-Inhibiting Primer. 7) S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1. 8) Devoe: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1) Duron: Genesis Odor Free Latex Semi-Gloss, 83 Series 2) Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi-Gloss Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 5) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater. 6) P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 7) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200. 8) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. c. Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel. 1) Duron: Genesis Odor Free Latex Semi-Gloss, 83 Series 2) Fuller: 110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. 5) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6) P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.


PAINTING 09910 - 16

7) S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. 8) Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2. Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry film thickness not

less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer. 1) Duron: Dura Clad Alkyd Metal Primer 2) Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer. 3) Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast-Dry Metal Primer. 4) Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163. 5) PPG: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer. 6) P & L: Effecto Rust-Inhibiting Primer. 7) S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1. 8 Devoe: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1) Duron: Ultra Deluxe Interior Acrylic Latex High Gloss Enamel 2) Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3) Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Alkyd Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 5) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater. 6) P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 7) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200. 8) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. c. Finish Coat: Exterior, gloss enamel. 1) Duron: Ultra Deluxe Interior Acrylic Latex High Gloss Enamel 2) Fuller: 312XX EPA Compliant Heavy Duty Enamel. 3) Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. 4) Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133. 5) PPG: 54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel. 6) P & L: Effecto Enamel. 7) S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. 8) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. G. Ferrous Metal: (Exterior when not specified as galvanized.) 1. Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: [Two finish coats] over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer. 1) Duron: Dura Clad Alkyd Metal Primer b. Finish Coats: Exterior gloss acrylic enamel. 1) Duron: Dura Clad Direct to Metal Acrylic High Gloss END OF SECTION 09910


HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 1

SECTION 09960 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates:

1. Interior Substrates: a. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).

b. Structural Steel Framing


1. Division 09 painting Sections for general field painting. 2. Division 09 High Temperature Resistant Coatings Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of finish coat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.



D. Product List: For each product indicated. Cross-reference products to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.


A. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and coating systems indicated.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.



2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

3. Products shall be of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing 1 or more benzene rings).

2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride.

D. Colors: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range

2.2 METAL PRIMERS

A. Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Acrylic Metal Primer, M04. b. Duron Inc.; Dura Clad Universal Acrylic Metal P, 33-105. c. ICI Paints; Devoe Coatings, Devflex TDM Flat Int/Ext W.B. Primer, 4020 d. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Pitt-Tech, Rust Inhibitive Primer (W.B.), 90-712. e. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish, B66W1.



2.3 WATER-BASED, LIGHT-INDUSTRIAL COATINGS

A. Eggshell, Water-Based, Light-Industrial Coating: MPI #110-G3. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Columbia Paint & Coatings; High Performance, Acry-Shield Eggshell Enamel, 05-265.

b. Dunn-Edwards Corporation; Permashell, Interior and Exterior 100% Acrylic E, W 940.

c. ICI Paints; Devoe Coatings, Devflex 4210, 4210. d. Mills Paint; Enviro-Lac Legacy, Acrylic Waterborne Coatings, 2400. e. Porter Paints; Porter Guard, DTM Acrylic Satin Enamel, 2805.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

a. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

3. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

4. Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.

1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the trades involved.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce coating systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale.

1. Clean using methods recommended in writing by coating manufacturer.



E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

F. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content, alkalinity of surfaces, or alkalinity of mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 100 to 600 psi at 6 to 12 inches

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

C. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. CMU Substrates:

1. Clear (Two-Component) Polyurethane System [MPI INT 3.2K]:



a. Prime Coat: Two-component polyurethane matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Two-component polyurethane, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two component (MPI Gloss Level 6 or

MPI Gloss Level 7)

1) Sherwin-Williams, Hi-Solids Polyurethane-2 components

B. Steel Substrates:

1. Water-Based, Light-Industrial Coating System

a. Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer (water based), MPI #107 b. Intermediate Coat: Water-based, light-industrial coating, MPI #110, gloss matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Water-based, light-industrial coating, MPI #110-G5, semi-gloss



HIGH-TEMPERATURE-RESISTANT COATINGS 09963 - 1

SECTION 09963 - HIGH-TEMPERATURE-RESISTANT COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of high-temperature-resistant coating systems on steel substrates subject to high temperatures.


1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section.

2. Division 09 Painting Sections for special-use coatings and general field painting. 3. Division 09 High Performance Coating Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of finish coat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Label each Sample for location and application area.


A. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and coating systems indicated.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.




A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 104 deg F.

B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HIGH-TEMPERATURE-RESISTANT COATINGS

A. Colors: Black

B. Primer: Undercoating recommended in writing for use in coating system by manufacturer of high-temperature-resistant coating under conditions indicated.

C. High-Heat-Resistant Coating: MPI #22.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Silicone Alkyd High Heat Aluminum, M64-78. b. General Paint; High Heat Silicone Aluminum, 37-001. c. ICI Paints, Devoe Coatings; Heat Resistant Silicone, HT-10. d. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Speedhide, Aluminum Heat Resistant Coating, 6-

220. e. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Industrial & Marine, Silver-Brite Hi Heat

Aluminum, B59S8.

3. VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E3.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving coating are dry.

D. Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.

1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the trades involved.

C. Clean steel substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers as required to produce coating systems indicated.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-temperature-resistant coating systems according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment same as similar exposed surfaces. Before

final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment with prime coat only.


A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when coatings are being applied:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with specified requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials

being used do not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.



C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.6 HIGH-TEMPERATURE-RESISTANT COATING SCHEDULE

A. High-Heat-Resistant Coating System:

1. Surface Preparation: Clean using methods recommended in writing by finish-coat manufacturer, but not less than blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Prime Coat: Primer. 3. Finish Coat(s): High-heat-resistant coating, MPI #22, in number of coats recommended

in writing by manufacturer for conditions indicated.



LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 1

SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed, formed-metal louvers.


1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in perimeter joints between louver frames and adjoining construction.


A. Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, Air-Leakage, and Wind-Driven Rain Ratings: Provide louvers complying with performance requirements indicated, according to AMCA 500-L.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Show blade profiles, angles, and spacing.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.




A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Louvers:

a. Model ELF6375DX, approved drainable fixed blade louver as manufactured by Ruskin or approved equal.

B. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each louver is based on the product named.

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

B. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.

1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.


A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

1. Frame Type: Channel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

E. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less.



1. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction.

F. Where indicated, provide extended sills for recessed louvers.

G. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL


B. Finish louvers after assembly.

2.5 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and other contaminants. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780. Apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.

B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range,

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION



A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.

G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.



FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 - 1

SECTION 13915 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building:

1. Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Combined Standpipe and Sprinkler System: Fire-suppression system with both standpipe and sprinkler systems. Sprinkler system is supplied from standpipe system.

B. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated.


A. Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig.

B. Fire-suppression sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: According to NFPA 13. 3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: According to NFPA 13. 4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing and NFPA 13. 5. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


1. Piping materials, including dielectric fittings and sprinkler specialty fittings.



2. Pipe hangers and supports, including seismic restraints. 3. Valves, including listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, and specialty

valves and trim. 4. Air compressors, including electrical data. 5. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting,

finish, and other pertinent data. 6. Hose connections, including size, type, and finish. 7. Alarm devices, including electrical data.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Fire flow data/Fire-hydrant flow test report.

D. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations, if applicable.

E. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."

F. Welding certificates.

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For standpipe and sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-suppression systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

C. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Threaded-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795, hot-dip galvanized where indicated and with factory- or field-formed threaded ends.

1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3. 3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4. 4. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106,

Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe hot-dip galvanized where indicated. Include ends matching joining method.

5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865 hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe where indicated.

B. Grooved-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795, hot-dip galvanized where indicated and with factory- or field-formed, square-cut- or roll-grooved ends.

1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:

a. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching steel-pipe OD.

b. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated rubber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.

2.2 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Assembly shall be copper alloy, ferrous, and insulating materials with ends matching piping system.

B. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated assembly, designed for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. Include insulating material that isolates dissimilar materials and ends with inside threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

C. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 175-psig minimum working-pressure rating as required for piping system.

D. Dielectric Flange Insulation Kits: Components for field assembly shall include CR or phenolic gasket, PE or phenolic bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining and threaded ends and 300-psig working-pressure rating at 225 deg F.

F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved ends and 300-psig working-pressure rating at 225 deg F.

2.3 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS



A. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum working-pressure rating, and made of materials compatible with piping. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall have 250-psig minimum working-pressure rating if fittings are components of high-pressure piping system.

B. Outlet Specialty Fittings:

1. Mechanical-T and -Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with gaskets, bolts and nuts, and threaded, locking-lug, or grooved outlets.

2. Snap-On and Strapless Outlet Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing or casting with gasket and threaded outlet.

C. Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded or locking-lug inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.

D. Sprinkler Branch-Line Test Fittings: Brass body with threaded inlet, capped drain outlet, and threaded outlet for sprinkler.

E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fitting: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with threaded inlet and drain outlet and sight glass.

F. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, adjustable with threaded inlet and outlet, and seals.

2.4 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES

A. Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Valves shall have 250-psig minimum pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping system.

B. Gate Valves with Wall Indicator Posts:

1. Gate Valves: UL 262, cast-iron body, bronze mounted, with solid disc, nonrising stem, operating nut, and flanged ends.

2. Indicator Posts: UL 789, horizontal-wall type, cast-iron body, with hand wheel, extension rod, locking device, and cast-iron barrel.

C. Ball Valves: Comply with UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc.

1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 2. NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with

grooved ends. 3. NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.

D. Butterfly Valves: UL 1091.

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with flanged

or grooved ends.

E. Check Valves NPS 2 and Larger: UL 312, swing type, cast-iron body with flanged or grooved ends.

F. Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type.



1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends.

G. Indicating Valves: UL 1091, with integral indicating device and ends matching connecting piping.

1. Indicator: Electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch. 2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball or butterfly valve with bronze body and threaded ends. 3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Butterfly valve with cast- or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with

flanged or grooved ends.

2.5 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Sprinkler System Control Valves: UL listed or FMG approved, cast- or ductile-iron body with flanged or grooved ends, and 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Control valves shall have 250-psig minimum pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping system.

1. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, single-hinge pin, and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.

a. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping.

b. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.

B. Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, brass or bronze, NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2-1/2, 400-psig minimum rating. Include female NPS inlet and outlet, adjustable setting feature, and straight or 90-degree-angle pattern design as indicated.

C. Automatic Drain Valves: UL 1726, NPS 3/4, ball-check device with threaded ends.

2.6 SPRINKLERS

A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Sprinklers shall have 250-psig minimum pressure rating if sprinklers are components of high-pressure piping system.

B. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:

1. UL 199, for nonresidential applications. 2. UL 1626, for residential applications. 3. UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.

C. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

1. Provide high temperature-rated sprinklers for generator rooms.

D. Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows:

1. High temperature-rated sprinklers.



2. Upright sprinklers.

E. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated, bronze, and painted.

F. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.

G. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat or chrome-plated steel, 2 piece, with 1-inch vertical adjustment.

H. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.7 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm: UL 753, mechanical-operation type with pelton-wheel operator with shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction and 10-inch- diameter, cast-aluminum alarm gong with red-enamel factory finish. Include NPS 3/4 inlet and NPS 1 drain connections.

C. Electrically Operated Alarm: UL 464, with 8-inch- minimum-diameter, vibrating-type, metal alarm bell with red-enamel factory finish and suitable for outdoor use.

D. Water-Flow Indicator: UL 346, electrical-supervision, paddle-operated-type, water-flow detector with 250-psig pressure rating and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.

E. Pressure Switch: UL 753, electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard feature. Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design that operates on rising pressure and signals water flow.

F. Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.

G. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully open position.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Obtain fire flow data for the existing building in a manner approved by the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).



B. If required by the AHJ, perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

C. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping connections before installation.

B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thicknesses, fire- and smoke-rated construction, framing for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and stations are to be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

A. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.

B. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Standard-Pressure, Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System, 175-psig Maximum Working Pressure:

1. Sprinkler-Piping Fitting Option: Specialty sprinkler fittings, NPS 3 and smaller, including mechanical-T and -cross fittings, may be used downstream from sprinkler zone valves.

2. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Threaded-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

3. NPS 2: Threaded-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

4. NPS 2: Grooved-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.

5. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Threaded-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

6. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Grooved-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.

7. NPS 4 to NPS 6: Threaded-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

8. NPS 4 to NPS 6: Grooved-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.

3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:



1. Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.

a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.

3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread pipe smaller than NPS 8 (DN 200) with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by authorities having jurisdiction and threads are checked by a ring gage and comply with ASME B1.20.1.

C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.

1. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Dissimilar-Metal Piping Joints: Construct joints using dielectric fittings compatible with both piping materials.

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions, couplings, or nipples. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges. 3. NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange insulation kits.

3.7 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.

B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.

C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.

E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger connections.

F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized and located according to NFPA 13.

G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.



H. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

I. Install drain valves on standpipes.

J. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.

K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

L. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.

1. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.

M. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water.

3.8 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Specialty Valves:

1. Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.

3.9 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not indicated, use the following sprinkler types:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. 2. Generator Room Sprinklers: High temperature-rated upright sprinklers. 3. Sprinkler Finishes:

a. Upright and Pendent Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.

3.10 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and accessories.



D. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16.

E. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.

F. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

G. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

H. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.11 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 4. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"

Chapter. 5. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required. 6. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

C. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.

3.14 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.



BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1

SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Sleeves. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Grout. 7. Mechanical demolition. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing. 10. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.



G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Dielectric fittings. 2. Mechanical sleeve seals. 3. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.



D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates

to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.5 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.



1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed or exposed-rivet hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.7 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.



3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips and chrome-

plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Wall, Ceiling, and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-

piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw

or spring clips. g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate

type.

2. Existing Piping: Use the following:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish. b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring

clips.



c. Bare Piping at Wall, Ceiling, and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.

e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw or spring clips.

f. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

Q. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 materials.



R. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

S. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS



A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9.

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.8 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.



F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.



MOTORS 15055 - 1

SECTION 15055 - MOTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory- and field-installed motors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a component of equipment.

B. Field-Installed Motor: A motor installed at Project site and not factory installed as an integral component of motorized equipment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for Field-Installed Motors: For each type and size of motor, provide nameplate data and ratings; shipping, installed, and operating weights; enclosure type and mounting arrangements; size, type, and location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground lug locations; and information on coatings or finishes.

B. Shop Drawings for Field-Installed Motors: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the following:

1. Each installed unit's type and details. 2. Nameplate legends. 3. Diagrams of power, signal, and control wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for

each type of motor and for each control scheme.

C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around field-installed motors. Show motor layout, mechanical power transfer link, driven load, and relationship between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E. Source quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For field-installed motors to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


MOTORS 15055 - 2


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain field-installed motors through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Options for Field-Installed Motors: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of motors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices and features that comply with the following:

1. Compatible with the following:

a. Magnetic controllers. b. Multispeed controllers. c. Reduced-voltage controllers.

2. Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use throughout speed range without overheating.

3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load. 4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

B. Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and motor replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of sliding rails for belt tensioning.

C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Motor requirements apply to factory- and field-installed motors except as follows:


MOTORS 15055 - 3

1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for motor are specified in another Section.

2. Motorized-equipment manufacturer requires ratings, performance, or characteristics, other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Motors 3/4 HP and Larger: Three phase.

B. Motors Smaller Than 3/4 HP: Single phase.

C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.

D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which motor is connected.

E. Service Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.

F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

H. Enclosure: Open dripproof.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.

D. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

I. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp.

1. Finish: Gray enamel.


MOTORS 15055 - 4

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output. 2. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation. 3. Insulation: Class H. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

C. Rugged-Duty Motors: Totally enclosed, with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings insulated with non-hygroscopic material.

1. Finish: Chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer.

D. Source Quality Control for Field-Installed Motors: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1:

1. Measure winding resistance. 2. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency. 3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency. 4. Perform high-potential test.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split-phase start, capacitor run. 3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.

C. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

D. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.

E. Source Quality Control for Field-Installed Motors: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1:

1. Measure winding resistance. 2. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency. 3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.


MOTORS 15055 - 5

4. Perform high-potential test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive field-installed motors for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before motor installation.


3.2 FIELD-INSTALLED MOTOR INSTALLATION

A. Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align with load transfer link.

B. Install motors on concrete bases complying with Division 3.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR FIELD-INSTALLED MOTORS

A. Prepare for acceptance tests.

1. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys, and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Verify bearing lubrication. 3. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and speed at

motor design load. 4. Test interlocks and control and safety features for proper operation. 5. Verify that current and voltage for each phase comply with nameplate rating and

NEMA MG 1 tolerances.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform electrical tests and visual and mechanical inspections including optional tests and inspections stated in NETA ATS on factory- and field-installed motors. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CLEANING


MOTORS 15055 - 6

A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean motors, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 1

SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Pipe stands. 7. Equipment supports.


1. Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for pipe hangers for fire-protection piping. 2. Division 15 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."


A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.



3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports.

C. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 4. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel." 5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

C. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

D. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components.

B. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

C. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.



2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated or stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.6 PIPE STAND FABRICATION

A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic or stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. Base: Plastic or stainless steel. 2. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-

thread rods. 3. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-

steel, roller-type pipe support.

E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. Bases: One or more plastic. 2. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.



3. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 4. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structural-steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.



1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

N. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.



a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:




2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 - 1

SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:

1. Equipment nameplates. 2. Equipment markers. 3. Equipment signs. 4. Access panel and door markers. 5. Pipe markers. 6. Duct markers. 7. Stencils. 8. Valve tags. 9. Valve schedules. 10. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Valve numbering scheme.

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies) to include in maintenance manuals.


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.



C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent adhesive.

1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. 2. Data:

a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,

and speed.

3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment.

B. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment.

1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing direction of flow.

1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each

application length. 3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers

extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. 4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type

pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label. 5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or

as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

B. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor barrier.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

D. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.



1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch minimum.

2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2 inches minimum.

2.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent adhesive.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door markers, equipment markers, equipment signs, and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Metal or fiberboard. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may

be in pressurized spray-can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless

otherwise indicated.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Engineer. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener.

1. Material: 0.032-inch- thick brass. 2. Material: 3/32-inch- thick laminated plastic with 2 black surfaces and white inner layer. 3. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

2.6 VALVE SCHEDULES

A. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws.

2. Frame: Finished hardwood or extruded aluminum. 3. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness

glass.

2.7 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.



1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT

OPERATE. 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.

3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be omitted if both are indicated.

1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.

3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general categories of equipment:

a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets.

b. Fire department hose valves and hose stations. c. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units. d. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units. e. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. f. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and

similar equipment. g. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. h. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. i. Tanks and pressure vessels. j. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

B. Stenciled Equipment Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of laminated-plastic equipment markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

C. Stenciled Equipment Sign Option: Stenciled signs may be provided instead of laminated-plastic equipment signs, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

D. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.



3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.

1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch wide, lapped at least 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.

3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

B. Stenciled Pipe Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of manufactured pipe markers, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe markers with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles complying with ASME A13.1 on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

C. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.

3.4 DUCT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Green: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts. 3. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. 4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. 5. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

B. Stenciled Duct Marker Option: Stenciled markers, showing service and direction of flow, may be provided instead of laminated-plastic duct markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.



C. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Fire Protection: 1-1/2 inches, round. b. Gas/Fuel Oil: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Color: Comply with ASME A13.1. 3. Letter Color: Comply with ASME A13.1.

3.6 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION

A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.

3.7 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.



PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 1

SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.


1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.

2. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums. 3. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection

saddles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation. 3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of

insulation. 5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections. 6. Application of field-applied jackets.

C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.




A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Rubatex Corp.

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS



A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

B. Insulation Blanket: Flexible, removable, reusable insulation blanket complying with the following:

1. Cold Face: Aluminum coated fiberglass cloth 2. Insulation: Ceramic fiber matt 3. Hot Face: Stainless steel knitted mesh 4. Capstan Rivets: Fastened through cold face only. Laced up with stainless steel lacing

wire.

C. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aluminum Jacket: Factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.

2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick. 3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick. 4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick. 5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.

B. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each piping system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.

E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.

H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.

L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.

1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.



4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and shield.

M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.

O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.

4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.

5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with vapor-retarder mastic.

P. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.

Q. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors.

3.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:

1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation. 2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of the pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:



1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to strainer basket.

3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with bands compatible with metal jacket 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.6 INSULATION BLANKET APPLICATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.7 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Flexible connectors. 2. Vibration-control devices. 3. Fire-suppression piping. 4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury. 7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.


A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Architect.



B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these Specifications.

C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to these Specifications.

3.9 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and field-applied jackets.

B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material, thickness, and jacket requirements.

3.10 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: HVAC condensate.

1. Operating Temperature: 32 to 140 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Pipes 1-1/2-inch and smaller: 1”. b. Pipes 2 to 5-inch: 1-1/2”. c. Pipes 6-inch and larger: 2”.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: Painted if exposed.

B. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Pipes 2-inch and smaller: ¾”. b. Pipes 2-1/2-inch and larger: 1”.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: Manufacturer’s recommended protective coating.

C. Service: Diesel-engine exhaust piping and exhaust silencer.

1. Operating Temperature: 850 deg F and lower. 2. Insulation Material: Insulation blanket.

3.11 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE



A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building. Loose-fill insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution Sections.

B. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot gas.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Pipes 2-inch and smaller: ¾”. b. Pipes 2-1/2-inch and larger: 1”.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: None.



REFRIGERANT AND CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING 15183 - 1

SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT AND CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant and condensate drain piping used for air-conditioning applications.


1. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs, piping supports, and roof penetration boots.

2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.

3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through exterior walls.

4. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports and installation requirements.

5. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying refrigerant piping.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for thermostatic expansion valves, solenoid valves, and pressure-regulating valves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and equipment.

1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size piping and design the actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes, to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

E. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.




A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX; "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

C. ASME Standard: Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."

D. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant and condensate drain piping and suspension system components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7.

C. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.

D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR and ASTM B88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver).

2.2 VALVES

A. Service Valves: 500-psig pressure rating; forged-brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, and with solder-end connections.

2.3 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALITIES



A. Straight- or Angle-Type Strainers: 500-psig working pressure; forged-brass or steel body with stainless-steel wire or brass-reinforced Monel screen of 80 to 100 mesh in liquid lines up to 1-1/8 inches, 60 mesh in larger liquid lines, and 40 mesh in suction lines; with screwed cleanout plug and solder-end connections.

B. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 500-psig maximum working pressure and 200 deg F operating temperature; all-brass body with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window with color-coded moisture indicator; with solder-end connections.

C. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 350-psig maximum operating pressure and 225 deg F maximum operating temperature; steel shell and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; molded-felt core surrounded by desiccant.

2.4 REFRIGERANTS

A. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

2.5 AUTOMATIC CONDENSATE PUMP UNITS

A. Description: Packaged units with corrosion-resistant pump, plastic tank with cover, and automatic controls. Include factory- or field-installed check valve and a 72-inch- minimum, electrical power cord with plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Refrigerant: Aboveground: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing.

B. Condensate Drain:

1. Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.

3.2 SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver, and on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.

B. Install moisture-liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostatic expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.

C. Install permanent filter-dryers in low-temperature systems, in systems using hermetic compressors, and before each solenoid valve.

D. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open drain. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.




A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

C. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.

D. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.

E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.

F. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed to mechanical injury.

G. Slope condensate drain piping at a uniform grade of 1 percent (1/8” per foot) downward in direction of flow.

H. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

I. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion valve bulb.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long. 2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet or longer, supported by a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

D. Support vertical runs at each floor.



3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint construction requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing and solvent-welded joints for PVC piping.

B. Fill refrigerant pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent scale formation.


A. Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

1. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure.

2. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower of the design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and low side of system.

a. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test.

b. Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerine solution over joint.

c. Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig or higher as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.

B. Test and inspect automatic condensate pump units for proper operation.

C. Test and inspect condensate drain piping for leaks. Repair any leaks found.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of the conditioned air controllers to the system design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. 2. Check compressor oil level above center of sight glass. 3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open refrigerant valves, except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. 5. Check compressor-motor alignment, and lubricate motors and bearings.

3.8 CLEANING



A. Before installing copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with trichloroethylene.

3.9 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter-dryer after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500 micrometers.

If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide full-operating

charge.



FUEL OIL PIPING 15191 - 1

SECTION 15191 - FUEL OIL PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fuel oil and diesel fuel piping, day tanks, transfer pump sets, specialties, and accessories.


1. Division 16 Section "Generators” for fuel oil day tanks. 2. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for flexible connectors. 3. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages.


A. Minimum working-pressure ratings for piping are the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Fuel Oil Distribution Piping: 150 psig. 2. Vent, Gage, and Fill Piping Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: 100 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Specialty valves.

B. Shop Drawings: Fuel oil piping and equipment. Include plans and attachments to other Work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of oil transfer pumps and are based on the specific model indicated. Other manufacturers' products complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."



B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for fuel oil piping materials, installation, inspection, and testing.

D. Comply with NFPA 30, "Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code," NFPA 31, "Installation of Oil Burning Equipment," and NFPA 37, “Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines” for fuel oil piping materials, components, installations, inspection, and testing.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of generator, fuel tank, day tank, piping, valves, and accessories.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel oil day tanks and fuel oil transfer pump sets that fail in materials or workmanship for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B, Schedule 40, black.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

2. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

3. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125. 4. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel. 5. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to

ASME B1.20.1. 6. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. 7. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fuel oil.

C. Transition Fittings: Type, material, pressure rating, and end connections to match piping being joined.

D. Pipe Connectors: UL 567, swivel or compression type for connection to equipment.

E. Y-Pattern Strainers: Minimum 125-psig working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), threaded connections, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.



F. Flexible Connectors: UL listed for fuel oil systems; stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature.

G. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joining materials not in this Section.

2.2 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Pressure-Reducing Valves: UL listed for fuel oil service. Include bronze body with 150-psig minimum pressure rating.

B. Oil Safety Valves: UL listed for fuel oil service. Include metal body; broken-line, oil shutoff feature; and 40-psig minimum pressure rating.

C. Bronze Gate Valves: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 200. Include ends threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.

D. Bronze Ball Valves: MSS SP-110; 3-piece bolted-body; 400-psig- minimum, WOG, nonshock, working-pressure rating. Include full-port, cast-bronze, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE seats; lever handle; and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

E. Bronze Check Valves: MSS SP-80, Type 3, Class 200. Include ends threaded according to ASME B1.20.1. Valves with solder ends may be furnished for use with copper tube.

F. Bronze Vertical Ball Check Valves: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, 2-piece construction; and 400-psig WOG, nonshock, working-pressure rating. Include integral bronze seats, replaceable stainless-steel ball, and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Cast-Iron Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, Type I, Class 250. Include OT construction, all-bronze trim, and flanged ends.

H. Steel Ball Valves: MSS SP-72; full-port, chrome-plated steel ball; TFE seats; and flanged ends.

I. Cast-Iron Check Valves: MSS SP-71, Type I, Class 250. Include flanged ends.

J. UL Valves: UL 842, listed for fuel oil service.

K. Special-Purpose, General-Duty Valves: Valves made in shape or configuration for specific fuel oil service and complying with requirements of fuel-gas code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. General: Flanges, unions, transition, valves, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, Fuel Oil Piping and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range:



1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded

joints. 3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded

joints.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Shutoff Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Use gate or ball valves.

B. Gate and Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Use general-duty valves that comply with MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, suitable for fuel oil service, with "WOG" indicated on body. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for selection.

1. Gate Valves: With solid wedge. 2. Swing Check Valves: With bronze disc. 3. Lift Check Valves: Vertical pattern; two-piece construction with bronze disc.

C. Drain Valves: Use hose-end drain valves that comply with MSS SP-110, bronze ball valve with outlet connection according to ASME B1.20.7 for garden-hose thread with cap. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for selection.


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation requirements.

B. Install piping free of sags and bends.

C. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

D. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

E. Install flexible pipe connectors at piping connections to vibration-producing equipment. Use according to the following applications:

1. Steel Piping: Stainless-steel-hose, flexible connectors.

F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

G. Install strainer on inlet side of control valves, pressure-reducing valves, and fuel oil pumps.

H. Install sediment traps at points where sediment or condensate may collect. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing.

1. Construct sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap.



I. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping of each fuel oil pump set.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from possible damage.

B. Install metal tag attached with metal chain indicating fuel oil piping systems.

C. Install valves at branch connections to supply mains and at equipment.

D. Install drain valves at piping low points.

E. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general installation requirements.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 3/4 to NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 84 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

C. Support vertical steel pipe at each floor and at spacing not greater than 15 feet.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

B. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

C. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having threaded pipe connection.

D. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection.

E. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

F. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."



G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.8 FIELD PAINTING OF ABOVEGROUND PIPING

A. Paint exposed metal piping, valves, and piping specialties except units with factory-applied paint or protective coating.


A. Inspect and test fuel oil piping according to NFPA 30, "Testing" Paragraph and according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining fuel oil pump sets.

B. Review data in maintenance manuals.

C. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.



ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15732 - 1

SECTION 15732 - ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following rooftop air conditioners:

1. Cooling and heating units 6 tons and smaller.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer:

1. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 4. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For rooftop air conditioners to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of rooftop air conditioners and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."




C. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

D. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

E. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

F. Comply with NFPA 54 for gas-fired furnace section.

G. ARI Certification: Units shall be ARI certified and listed.

H. ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities Less Than 135,000 Btuh: Rate rooftop air-conditioner capacity according to ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment."

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

B. Coordinate size, location, and installation of rooftop air-conditioner manufacturer's roof curbs and equipment supports with roof installer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of rooftop air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than one year from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Warranty Period for Electronic Thermostats: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than one year from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 6 TONS AND SMALLER

A. Manufacturers:

1. Carrier Corp. 2. McQuay International. 3. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group. 4. YORK International Corporation.

B. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting of compressor, indoor and outside refrigerant coils, indoor fan and outside coil fan, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.

C. Casing: Galvanized-steel construction with enamel paint finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 1/2-inch-thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.

D. Indoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven by single-speed motor.

E. Outside Coil Fan: Propeller type, directly driven by motor.

F. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor.

G. Compressor: Hermetic scroll compressor with integral vibration isolators, internal overcurrent and overtemperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.

H. Refrigeration System:

1. Compressor. 2. Outside coil and fan. 3. Indoor coil and fan. 4. Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator. 5. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 6. Refrigerant dryer. 7. High-pressure switch. 8. Low-pressure switch. 9. Thermostat for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or loss

of air. 10. Low-ambient switch. 11. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines. 12. Charge of refrigerant.



I. Filters: 1-inch- thick, fiberglass, pleated, throwaway filters in filter rack.

J. Electric Heat: Helix-wound, nickel-chrome, electric-resistance elements, factory wired for single-point wiring connection; with time delay for element staging, and overcurrent and overheat protective devices.

K. Economizer: Return- and outside-air dampers with neoprene seals, outside-air filter, and hood.

1. Damper Motor: Fully modulating spring return with adjustable minimum position. 2. Control: Electronic-control system uses mixed-air temperature and selects between

outside-air and return-air enthalpy to adjust mixing dampers. 3. Relief Damper: Gravity actuated with bird screen and hood.

L. Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with control-circuit transformer with built-in circuit breaker.

M. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features:

1. Indoor fan on/off delay. 2. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption. 3. Service relay output. 4. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage. 5. Field-adjustable control parameters. 6. Defrost control. 7. Economizer control. 8. Electric heat staging. 9. Indoor-air quality control with carbon dioxide sensor. 10. Low-ambient control, allowing operation down to 0 deg F. 11. Minimum run time. 12. Night setback mode. 13. Return-air temperature limit. 14. Low-refrigerant pressure control.

N. Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with seven-day programming; and the following:

1. Touch sensitive keyboard. 2. Automatic switching. 3. Deg F readout. 4. LED indicators. 5. Hour/day programming. 6. Manual override capability. 7. Time and operational mode readout. 8. Status indicator. 9. Battery backup. 10. Subbase with manual system switch (on-heat-auto-cool) and fan switch (auto-on). 11. Fan-proving switch to lock out unit if fan fails. 12. Dirty-filter switch.

O. Optional Accessories: Refer to schedule on drawings.

P. Roof Curb: Steel with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 12 inches.



2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances. Install according to ARI Guideline B.

B. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level and secure, according toNRCA's "Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts" and ARI Guideline B. Install and secure rooftop air conditioners on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction. Secure units to curb support with anchor bolts.

C. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure units to structural support with anchor bolts.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install ducts to termination in roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking

under entire roof curb. 3. Connect supply ducts to rooftop unit with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 15

Section "Duct Accessories."

C. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.

D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field quality-control tests and inspections and prepare test reports:



1. After installing rooftop air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.

C. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following:

1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled outside coil, and fans. 4. Inspect internal insulation. 5. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 7. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 8. Verify that filters are installed. 9. Clean outside coil and inspect for construction debris. 10. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris. 11. Connect and purge gas line. 12. Adjust vibration isolators. 13. Inspect operation of barometric dampers. 14. Lubricate bearings on fan. 15. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 16. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 17. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Start refrigeration system in summer only. b. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

18. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 19. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 20. Calibrate thermostats. 21. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 22. Inspect outside-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. 23. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following:

a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. c. Outside-air, dry-bulb temperature. d. Outside-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

24. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown.

25. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.



a. Supply-air volume. b. Return-air volume. c. Relief-air volume. d. Outside-air intake volume.

26. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:

a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures. b. Short circuiting of air through outside coil or from outside coil to outside-air intake.

27. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following:

a. Warm-up for morning cycle. b. Freezestat operation. c. Economizer to limited outside-air changeover. d. Alarms.

28. After startup and performance testing, change filters, vacuum heat exchanger and cooling and outside coils, lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and inspect operation of power vents.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose, without additional cost.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop air conditioners.

1. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining units.

2. Review data in maintenance manuals.



METAL DUCTS 15815 - 1

SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include the following:

1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.


1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and -distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Drawn to scale. Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes. 3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts. 4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 5. Fittings. 6. Reinforcement and spacing. 7. Seam and joint construction. 8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 10. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels. 11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration

isolation, and seismic restraints.



B. Coordination Drawings: Plans drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Other systems installed in same space as ducts. 2. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to

dampers and other operating devices.


D. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. NFPA Compliance:

1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces that will be painted.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.

B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.



C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.

E. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.

2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.

3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted with zinc-chromate primer.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.

2.4 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.

1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class.

2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."



B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement.

C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.

1. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class. 2. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.

D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS

A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:

1. Supply Ducts: 3-inch wg. 2. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg. 3. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.

B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel.

3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

C. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.

D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.

E. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

H. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated.



I. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.

J. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.

K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

L. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

M. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

N. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." and NUSIG.

O. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."

P. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.

1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.

B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.

3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.

C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-test) load.

D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.



E. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:

1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg.

4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum allowable.



DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 1

SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Volume dampers. 3. Motorized control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct-mounting access doors. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Duct accessory hardware.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Volume dampers. 3. Motorized control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct-mounting access doors. 7. Flexible connectors.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Special fittings. 2. Manual-volume damper installations. 3. Motorized-control damper installations. 4. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire- and smoke-damper installations,

including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors. 5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounting items. Show ceiling-mounting access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories.




A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces that will be painted.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with center-pivoted blades of maximum 6-inch width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

B. Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.

C. Blades: 0.052-inch- thick galvanized sheet steel.

D. Blade Seals: Neoprene.

E. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

F. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

G. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

2.3 VOLUME DAMPERS



A. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.

1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

B. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.

2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 4. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze. 5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

2.4 MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS

A. General Description: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design; minimum of 0.1084-inch- thick, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; minimum of 0.0635-inch- thick, galvanized-steel damper blades with maximum blade width of 8 inches.

1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 3. Provide parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable seal blade edging, or

replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is being held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.

B. Electronic Damper Actuators powered and controlled by hard wired controls and not the BMS: Direct-couplet type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

1. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper. c. Dampers with 2 to 3 inches wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to

2500 FPM: Multiply the minimum full-stroke cycles above by 1.5. d. Dampers with 3 to 4 inches wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to

3500 FPM: Multiply the minimum full-stroke cycles above by 2.0.

2. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, tooted cradle. 3. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 4. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual

gear release on non-spring-return actuators. 5. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 120-V ac.



6. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback signal.

7. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F. 8. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F. 9. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.

2.5 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Fire dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555.

B. Fire Rating:

1. 1-1/2 hours for openings requiring less than 3 hour fire resistance rating. 2. 3 hours for openings requiring 3 hours or more fire resistance rating.

C. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick as indicated and of length to suit application.

2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with sleeve requirements.

E. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

F. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

G. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

H. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.

2.6 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- wide, single-vane, curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

2.7 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS

A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.



1. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 2. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:

a. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks. b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside

and inside handles. d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches and Larger: One additional hinge.

C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and 1-inch thickness. Include cam latches.

1. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin-in notched frame.

D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.

E. Insulation: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.

B. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.

C. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

D. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber.

1. Minimum Weight: 16 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 285 lbf/inch in the warp and 185 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F.

2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION



A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.

D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.

E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff.

F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.

H. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows:

1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from volume dampers, motor operated dampers, turning vanes, and

equipment. 3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links. 4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum

50-foot spacing. 5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.

I. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

J. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter. 5. Body Access: 24 inches in diameter.

K. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

L. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.



M. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

N. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.

C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."



POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 1

SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Propeller fans.


A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.



C. Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.



B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Belts: One Insert number set for each belt-driven unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Propeller Fans:

a. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. b. Carnes Company HVAC. c. Chicago Blower Corp. d. Cook, Loren Company. e. Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co. f. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.



2.2 PROPELLER FANS

A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-driven propeller fans consisting of fan blades, hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive assembly, and accessories.

B. Housing: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-enamel finish coat applied after assembly.

C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub.

D. Direct-Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing

E. Accessories:

1. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications, removable for maintenance.

2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."


A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.

C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

3.2 CONNECTIONS



A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment.

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Equipment Startup Checks:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.

B. Starting Procedures:

1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm. 2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

F. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

G. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.



B. Adjust variable-speed controller for balancing.

C. Lubricate bearings.

3.5 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet.

B. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain power ventilators.

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.

2. Review data in maintenance manuals. 3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance

notice.



DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 1

SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.


1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.

2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS

A. Fixed Face Grille:


a. Carnes.


DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 2

b. Krueger. c. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc. d. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. e. Titus. f. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Blade Arrangement: 45 degree fixed blade. 5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide. 6. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed-blade assembly if specified on drawings.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.



INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS 15856 - 1

SECTION 15856 - INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of roof-mounting intake and relief ventilators:

1. Roof hoods.


1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for ventilator assemblies provided as part of the general construction.

2. Division 15 Section "Power Ventilators" for roof-mounting exhaust fans.


A. Structural Performance: Intake and relief ventilators shall be capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads, wind loads, seismic loads, and thermal movements without permanent deformation of components, noise or metal fatigue, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For intake and relief ventilators. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and ventilator attachments to curbs and curb attachments to roof structure.



A. Source Limitations: Obtain ventilators through one source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of intake and relief ventilators and are based on the specific equipment indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."



1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

D. Fasteners: Same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.

1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 2. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise

indicated.

E. Post-Installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.




A. Factory or shop fabricate intake and relief ventilators to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units to the minimum extent as necessary for shipping and handling. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Fabricate frames, including integral bases, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

C. Fabricate units with closely fitted joints and exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Fabricate supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

E. Perform shop welding by AWS-certified procedures and personnel.

2.4 ROOF HOODS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. 2. Carnes. 3. Greenheck. 4. Loren Cook Company. 5. Penn Ventilation.

B. Factory or shop fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figures 5-6 and 5-7.

C. Materials: Aluminum sheet, minimum 0.063-inch- thick base and 0.050-inch- thick hood; suitably reinforced.

D. Roof Curbs: Aluminum sheet with mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to fit roof opening and ventilator base.

1. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange. 2. Overall Height: Minimum 9 inches.

E. Bird Screening: Galvanized-steel, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.041-inch wire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install intake and relief ventilators level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Secure intake and relief ventilators to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.

C. Install intake and relief ventilators with clearances for service and maintenance.



D. Install perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

E. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as installation progresses. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during installation.

F. Label intake and relief ventilators according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

G. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.

H. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.



HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 1

SECTION 15900 – HVAC INSTRUMENATION AND CONTROLS

PART 1: GENERAL

1. PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Section 15820 – Duct Accessories 1. Automated dampers

2. PRODUCTS NOT FURNISHED OR INSTALLED UNDER BUT INTEGRATED WITH THE WORK OF THIS SECTION

A. Section 16231 – Generator and Synchronizing Switchboard

3. RELATED SECTIONS

A. The General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements are part of this specification and shall be used in conjunction with this section as part of the contract doc-uments.

B. The following sections constitute related work: 1. Section 01600 - Submittal Requirements 2. Section 01800 - Commissioning 3. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 4. Section 15732 – Rooftop Units 5. Section 15815 – Metal Ducts 6. Section 15950 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 7. Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 8. Section 16120 – Conductors 9. Section 16130 - Raceway

4. DESCRIPTION

A. General: The control system shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of DDC controllers and an existing operator workstation. The operator workstation shall provide for overall system supervision and configuration, graphical user interface, management report generation, and alarm annunciation. The existing building has a Trane Tracer Summit building automation system installed. All of the new equipment shall be connected to the existing building automation system. The intent is to reuse existing controllers, graphics, points, and operator interface as much as possible.

5. APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

A. The following are approved control system suppliers, manufacturers, and product lines:

Supplier Manufacturer Product Line

Boland Trane Trane Tracer

1. The Contractor shall use only operator workstation software, controller software, custom application programming language, and controllers from the corresponding manufacturer and product line unless Owner approves use of multiple manufacturers.

2. Other products specified herein (such as sensors, valves, dampers, and actuators) need not be manufactured by the above manufacturers.

6. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer and Manufacturer Qualifications 1. Installer shall have an established working relationship with Control System Manufacturer.



2. Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer’s control system training. Upon request, Installer shall present record of completed training including course outlines.

7. CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the most restrictive of local, state, and federal authorities' codes and ordinances or these plans and specifications. As a minimum, the installation shall comply with the current editions in effect 30 days prior to the receipt of bids of the following codes:

1. National Electric Code (NEC) 2. International Building Code (IBC)

a. Section 719 Ducts and Air Transfer Openings b. Section 907 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems c. Chapter 28 Mechanical

3. International Mechanical Code (IMC)

8. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Performance Standards. System shall conform to the following minimum standards over network connections. Systems shall be tested using manufacturer’s recommended hardware and software for operator workstation (server and browser for web-based systems).

1. Graphic Display. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall display with current data within 10 sec. 2. Graphic Refresh. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall update with current data within 8

sec.and shall automatically refresh every 15 sec. 3. Configuration and Tuning Screens. Screens used for configuring, calibrating, or tuning points, PID

loops, and similar control logic shall automatically refresh within 6 sec. 4. Object Command. Devices shall react to command of a binary object within 2 sec. Devices shall

begin reacting to command of an analog object within 2 sec. 5. Alarm Response Time. An object that goes into alarm shall be annunciated at the workstation

within 45 sec. 6. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as

often as once every 5 sec. Select execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.

7. Performance. Programmable controllers shall be able to completely execute DDC PID control loops at a frequency adjustable down to once per sec. Select execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.

8. Multiple Alarm Annunciation. Each workstation on the network shall receive alarms within 5 sec of other workstations.

9. Reporting Accuracy. System shall report values with minimum end-to-end accuracy listed in Table 1.

10. Control Stability and Accuracy. Control loops shall maintain measured variable at setpoint within tolerances listed in Table 2.



Table-1 Reporting Accuracy

Measured Variable Reported Accuracy

Space Temperature ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)

Ducted Air ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)

Outside Air ±1.0ºC (±2ºF)

Dew Point ±1.5ºC (±3ºF)

Water Temperature ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)

Delta-T ±0.15º (±0.25ºF)

Relative Humidity ±5% RH

Water Flow ±2% of full scale

Airflow (terminal) ±10% of full scale (see Note 1)

Airflow (measuring stations) ±5% of full scale

Airflow (pressurized spaces) ±3% of full scale

Air Pressure (ducts) ±25 Pa (±0.1 in. w.g.)

Air Pressure (space) ±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)

Water Pressure ±2% of full scale (see Note 2)

Electrical ±1% of reading (see Note 3)

Carbon Monoxide (CO) ±5% of reading

Carbon Dioxide (CO2) ±50 ppm

Note 1: Accuracy applies to 10%–100% of scale Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure Note 3: Not including utility-supplied meters Table 2 Control Stability and Accuracy Controlled Variable Control Accuracy Range of Medium

Air Pressure ±50 Pa (±0.2 in. w.g.) ±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)

0–1.5 kPa (0–6 in. w.g.) -25 to 25 Pa (-0.1 to 0.1 in. w.g.)

Airflow ±10% of full scale

Space Temperature ±1.0ºC (±2.0ºF)

Duct Temperature ±1.5ºC (±3ºF)

Humidity ±5% RH

Fluid Pressure ±10 kPa (±1.5 psi) ±250 Pa (±1.0 in. w.g.)

MPa (1–150 psi) 0–12.5 kPa (0–50 in. w.g.) differential



9. SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data and Shop Drawings: Meet requirements of Section 01600 on Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. In addition, the contractor shall provide shop drawings or other submittals on hardware, software, and equipment to be installed or provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project until submittals have been approved for conformity with design intent. Provide drawings as AutoCAD 2006 (or newer) compatible files on magnetic or optical disk (file format: .DWG, .DXF, .VSD, or comparable) and three 11” x 17” prints of each drawing. When manufacturer’s cutsheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each submitted piece of literature and drawing shall clearly reference the specification and/or drawing that the submittal is to cover. General catalogs shall not be accepted as cutsheets to fulfill submittal requirements. Select and show submittal quantities appropriate to scope of work. Submittal approval does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to supply sufficient quantities to complete work. Submittals shall be provided within 12 weeks of contract award. Submittals shall include:

1. DDC System Hardware a. A complete bill of materials to be used indicating quantity, manufacturer, model number,

and relevant technical data of equipment to be used. b. Manufacturer’s description and technical data such as performance curves, product

specifications, and installation and maintenance instructions for items listed below and for relevant items not listed below:

i. Direct digital controllers (controller panels) ii. Transducers and transmitters iii. Sensors (including accuracy data) iv. Actuators v. Valves vi. Relays and switches vii. Control panels viii. Power supplies ix. Batteries x. Operator interface equipment xi. Wiring

c. Wiring diagrams and layouts for each control panel. Show termination numbers. d. Schematic diagrams for all field sensors and controllers. Provide floor plans of all sensor

locations and control hardware. Riser diagrams showing control network layout, communication protocol, and wire types.

2. Central System Hardware and Software a. A complete bill of material of equipment used indicating quantity, manufacturer, model

number, and relevant technical. b. Manufacturer’s description and technical data such as product specifications and

installation and maintenance instructions for items listed below and for relevant items furnished under this contract not listed below:

i. Central Processing Unit (CPU) or web server ii. Monitors iii. Keyboards iv. Power supplies v. Battery backups vi. Interface equipment between CPU or server and control panels vii. Operating System software viii. Operator interface software ix. Color graphic software x. Third-party software

c. Schematic diagrams for all control, communication, and power wiring. Provide a schematic drawing of the central system installation. Label all cables and ports with computer manufacturers’ model numbers and functions. Show interface wiring to control system.

d. Network riser diagrams of wiring between central control unit and control panels.



3. Controlled Systems a. Riser diagrams showing control network layout, communication protocol, and wire types. b. A schematic diagram of each controlled system. The schematics shall have all control

points labeled with point names shown or listed. The schematics shall graphically show the location of all control elements in the system.

c. A schematic wiring diagram of each controlled system. Label control elements and terminals. Where a control element is also shown on control system schematic, use the same name.

d. An instrumentation list (Bill of Materials) for each controlled system. List each control system element in a table. Show element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data sheet number.

e. A mounting, wiring, and routing plan-view drawing. The design shall take into account HVAC, electrical, and other systems’ design and elevation requirements. The drawing shall show the specific location of all concrete pads and bases and any special wall bracing for panels to accommodate this work.

f. A complete description of the operation of the control system, including sequences of operation. The description shall include and reference a schematic diagram of the controlled system.

g. A point list for each control system. List I/O points and software points specified in Section 15900 Appendix A. Indicate alarmed and trended points.

4. Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed but are the responsibility of the Contractor. 5. Description of process, report formats, and checklists to be used in Section 15900 Article 3.17

(Control System Demonstration and Acceptance). B. Schedules

1. Within one month of contract award, provide a schedule of the work indicating the following: a. Intended sequence of work items b. Start date of each work item c. Duration of each work item d. Planned delivery dates for ordered material and equipment and expected lead times e. Milestones indicating possible restraints on work by other trades or situations

2. Monthly written status reports indicating work completed and revisions to expected delivery dates. Include updated schedule of work.

C. Project Record Documents. Upon completion of installation, submit three copies of record (as-built) documents of the documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and shall include:

1. Project Record Drawings. As-built versions of submittal shop drawings provided as AutoCAD 2006 (or newer) compatible files on magnetic or optical media (file format: .DWG, .DXF, .VSD, or comparable) and as 11" x 17" prints.

2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. Completed versions of reports, checklists, and trend logs used to meet requirements of Section 15900 Article 3.17 (Control System Demonstration and Acceptance).

3. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. 4. As-built versions of submittal product data. 5. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of installing contractors and service representatives

for equipment and control systems. 6. Operator’s manual with procedures for operating control systems: logging on and off, handling

alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control, and changing setpoints and variables.

7. Programming manual or set of manuals with description of programming language and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of point database creation and modification, of program creation and modification, and of editor use.

8. Engineering, installation, and maintenance manual or set of manuals that explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; how to perform preventive maintenance and calibration; how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace hardware.

9. Documentation of programs created using custom programming language including setpoints, tuning parameters, and object database. Electronic copies of programs shall meet this



requirement if control logic, setpoints, tuning parameters, and objects can be viewed using furnished programming tools.

10. Graphic files, programs, and database on magnetic or optical media. 11. List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers. 12. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for furnished

third-party hardware including computer equipment and sensors. 13. Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating systems, custom

programming language, operator workstation or web server software, and graphics software. 14. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents for equipment and systems. 15. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components, including schedule

of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time between tasks; and task descriptions.

D. Training Materials: Provide course outline and materials for each class at least six weeks before first class. Training shall be furnished via instructor-led sessions, computer-based training, or web-based training. Engineer will modify course outlines and materials if necessary to meet Owner’s needs. Engineer will review and approve course outlines and materials at least three weeks before first class.

10. WARRANTY

A. Warrant work as follows: 1. Warrant labor and materials for specified control system free from defects for a period of 12

months after final acceptance. Control system failures during warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to Owner. Respond during normal business hours within 24 hours of Owner’s warranty service request.

2. Work shall have a single warranty date, even if Owner receives beneficial use due to early system start-up. If specified work is split into multiple contracts or a multi-phase contract, each contract or phase shall have a separate warranty start date and period.

3. If the engineer determines that equipment and systems operate satisfactorily at the end of final start-up, testing, and commissioning phase, the engineer will certify in writing that control system operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of this specification. Date of acceptance shall begin warranty period.

4. Provide updates to operator workstation or web server software, project-specific software, graphic software, database software, and firmware that resolve the contractor-identified software deficiencies at no charge during warranty period. If available, Owner can purchase in-warranty service agreement to receive upgrades for functional enhancements associated with above-mentioned items. Do not install updates or upgrades without Owner’s written authorization.

5. Exception: Contractor shall not be required to warrant reused devices except those that have been rebuilt or repaired. Installation labor and materials shall be warranted. Demonstrate operable condition of reused devices at time of Engineer’s acceptance.

11. OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL

A. Project-specific software and documentation shall become Owner's property. This includes, but is not limited to:

1. Graphics 2. Record drawings 3. Database 4. Application programming code 5. Documentation

12. DEFINITIONS

Term Definition

Control Systems Server A computer(s) that maintain(s) the systems configuration and pro-gramming database.



Term Definition

Controller Intelligent stand-alone control device. Controller is a generic refer-ence to building controllers, custom application controllers, and ap-plication specific controllers.

Direct Digital Control Microprocessor-based control including Analog/Digital conversion and program logic.

Gateway Bi-directional protocol translator connecting control systems that use different communication protocols.

Local Area Network Computer or control system communications network limited to local building or campus.

Master-Slave/Token Passing Data link protocol as defined by the Lonworks standard.

Point-to-Point Serial communication as defined in the Lonworks standard.

Primary Controlling LAN High speed, peer-to-peer controller LAN connecting BCs and op-tionally AACs and ASCs. Refer to System Architecture below.

Protocol Implementation Con-formance Statement

A written document that identifies the particular options specified by Lonwork that are implemented in a device.

Router A device that connects two or more networks at the network layer.

Wiring Raceway, fittings, wire, boxes and related items.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use new products the manufacturer is currently manufacturing and selling for use in new installations. Do not use this installation as a product test site unless explicitly approved in writing by Owner. Spare parts shall be available for at least five years after completion of this contract.

2.2 COMMUNICATION

A. Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers shall comprise a unified control network. A gateway (translator) shall communicate with third-party equipment furnished or installed by others.

B. Install new wiring and network devices as required to provide a complete and workable control network.

C. Use existing control wiring backbone for network segments. D. Each controller shall have a communication port for temporary connection to a laptop computer or

other operator interface. Connection shall support memory downloads and other commissioning and troubleshooting operations.

E. Internetwork operator interface and value passing shall be transparent to internetwork architecture. 1. An operator interface connected to a controller shall allow the operator to interface with each

internetwork controller as if directly connected. Controller information such as data, status, and control algorithms shall be viewable and editable from each internetwork controller.

2. Inputs, outputs, and control variables used to integrate control strategies across multiple controllers shall be readable by each controller on the internetwork. Program and test all cross-controller links required to execute control strategies specified in Section 15900 Appendix A. An authorized operator shall be able to edit cross-controller links by typing a standard object address or by using a point-and-click interface.

F. System shall automatically synchronize controller time clocks daily from an operator-designated controller via the internetwork. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight saving and standard time as applicable.

G. System shall be expandable to at least twice the required input and output objects with additional controllers, associated devices, and wiring.



2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Operator Interface is existing. B. System Software.

1. Operating System is existing. 2. System Graphics. The operator interface software shall be graphically based and shall

include at least one graphic per piece of equipment or occupied zone, graphics for each chilled water and hot water system, and graphics that summarize conditions on each floor of each building included in this contract.

a. Functionality. Graphics shall allow operator to monitor system status, to view a summary of the most important data for each controlled zone or piece of equipment, to use point-and-click navigation between zones or equipment, and to edit setpoints and other specified parameters.

b. Animation. Graphics shall be able to animate by displaying different image files for changed object status.

c. Alarm Indication. Indicate areas or equipment in an alarm condition using color or other visual indicator.

d. Format. Graphics shall be saved in an industry-standard format such as BMP, JPEG, PNG, or GIF. Web-based system graphics shall be viewable on browsers compatible with World Wide Web Consortium browser standards. Web graphic format shall require no plug-in (such as HTML and JavaScript) or shall only require widely available no-cost plug-ins (such as Active-X and Adobe Flash).

3. Custom Graphics. Custom graphic files shall be created with the use of a graphics generation package furnished with the system. The graphics generation package shall be a graphically based system that uses the mouse to create and modify graphics that are saved in the same formats as are used for system graphics.

4. Graphics Library. Furnish a complete library of standard HVAC equipment graphics such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, and unit ventilators. This library also shall include standard symbols for other equipment including fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping, dampers, and ductwork. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the graphics generation package program.

C. System Applications. System shall provide the following functionality to authorized operators as an integral part of the operator interface or as stand-alone software programs. If furnished as part of the interface, the tool shall be available from each workstation or web browser interface. If furnished as a stand-alone program, software shall be installable on standard IBM-compatible PCs with no limit on the number of copies that can be installed under the system license.

1. Automatic System Database Configuration. Each workstation or web server shall store on its hard disk a copy of the current system database, including controller firmware and software. Stored database shall be automatically updated with each system configuration or controller firmware or software change.

2. Manual Controller Memory Download. Operators shall be able to download memory from the system database to each controller.

3. System Configuration. The workstation software shall provide a method of configuring the system. This shall allow for future system changes or additions by users under proper password protection. Operators shall be able to configure the system.

4. On-Line Help. Provide a context-sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operating and editing the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be available through the use of hypertext.

5. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data.

a. Operator Access. The user name and password combination shall define accessible viewing, editing, adding, and deleting privileges for that operator. Users with system administrator rights shall be able to create new users and edit the privileges of all existing users. System Administrators shall also be able to vary and deny each operator’s privileges based on the geographic location, such as the ability to edit



operating parameters in Building A, to view but not edit parameters in Building B, and to not even see equipment in Building C.

b. Automatic Log Out. Automatically log out each operator if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto logoff time shall be user adjustable.

c. Encrypted Security Data. Store system security data including operator passwords in an encrypted format. System shall not display operator passwords.

6. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all building management panels and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.

7. Alarm Processing. System input and status objects shall be configurable to alarm on departing from and on returning to normal state. Operator shall be able to enable or disable each alarm and to configure alarm limits, alarm limit differentials, alarm states, and alarm reactions for each system object. Configure and enable alarm points as specified in Section 15900 Appendix A (Sequences of Operation).

8. Alarm Messages. Alarm messages shall use the English language descriptor for the object in alarm in such a way that the operator will be able to recognize the source, location, and nature of the alarm without relying on acronyms.

9. Alarm Reactions. Operator shall be able to configure (by object) what, if any actions are to be taken during an alarm. As a minimum, the workstation or web server shall be able to log, print, start programs, display messages, send e-mail, send page, and audibly annunciate.

10. Alarm and Event log. Operators shall be able to view all system alarms and changes of state from any location in the system. Events shall be listed chronologically. An operator with the proper security level may acknowledge and delete alarms, and archive closed alarms to the workstation or web server hard disk.

11. Trend Logs. The operator shall be able to configure trend sample or change of value (COV) interval, start time, and stop time for each system data object and shall be able to retrieve data for use in spreadsheets and standard database programs. Controller shall sample and store trend data and shall be able to archive data to the hard disk. Configure trends as specified in Section 15900 Appendix A (Sequences of Operation).

12. Object and Property Status and Control. Provide a method for the operator to view, and edit if applicable, the status of any object or property in the system. The status shall be available by menu, on graphics, or through custom programs.

13. Reports and Logs. Operator shall be able to select, to modify, to create, and to print reports and logs. Operator shall be able to store report data in a format accessible by standard spreadsheet and word processing programs.

14. Standard Reports. Furnish the following standard system reports: a. Objects. System objects and current values filtered by object type, by status (in

alarm, locked, normal), by equipment, by geographic location, or by combination of filter criteria.

b. Alarm Summary. Current alarms and closed alarms. System shall retain closed alarms for an adjustable period.

c. Logs. System shall log the following to a database or text file and shall retain data for an adjustable period:

i. Alarm History. ii. Trend Data. Operator shall be able to select trends to be logged. iii. Operator Activity. At a minimum, system shall log operator log in and log

out, control parameter changes, schedule changes, and alarm acknowledgment and deletion. System shall date and time stamp logged activity.

D. Workstation Application Editors. Each PC or browser workstation shall support editing of all system applications. The applications shall be downloaded and executed at one or more of the controller panels.

1. Controller. Provide a full-screen editor for each type of application that shall allow the operator to view and change the configuration, name, control parameters, and set points for all controllers.



2. Scheduling. An editor for the scheduling application shall be provided at each workstation. Provide a method of selecting the desired schedule and schedule type. Exception schedules and holidays shall be shown clearly on the calendar. The start and stop times for each object shall be adjustable from this interface.

3. Custom Application Programming. Provide the tools to create, edit, debug, and download custom programs. System shall be fully operable while custom programs are edited, compiled, and downloaded. Programming language shall have the following features:

a. Language. Language shall be graphically based or English language oriented. If graphically based, language shall use function blocks arranged in a logic diagram that clearly shows control logic flow. Function blocks shall directly provide functions listed below, and operators shall be able to create custom or compound function blocks. If English language oriented, language shall be based on the syntax of BASIC, FORTRAN, C, or PASCAL, and shall allow for free-form programming that is not column-oriented or "fill-in-the-blanks."

b. A full-screen character editor programming environment shall be provided. The editor shall be cursor/mouse-driven and allow the user to insert, add, modify, and delete custom programming code. It also shall incorporate features such as cut/ paste and find.

c. The programming language shall allow independently executing program modules to be developed. Each module shall be able to independently enable and disable other modules.

d. The editor/programming environment shall have a debugging/simulation capability that allows the user to step through the program and observe any intermediate values and/or results.

e. The programming language shall support conditional statements (IF/THEN/ELSE/ ELSE-IF) using compound Boolean (AND, OR, and NOT) and/or relations (EQUAL, LESS THAN, GREATER THAN, NOT EQUAL) comparisons.

f. The programming language shall support floating-point arithmetic using the following operators: +, , ÷, ×, and square root. The following mathematical functions also shall be provided: absolute value and minimum/maximum value.

g. The programming language shall have predefined variables that represent time of day, day of the week, month of the year, and the date. Other predefined variables shall provide elapsed time in seconds, minutes, hours, and days. These elapsed time variables shall be able to be reset by the language so that interval-timing functions can be stopped and started within a program. Values from all of the above variables shall be readable by the language so that they can be used in a program for such purposes as IF/ THEN comparisons, calculations, etc.

h. The language shall be able to read the values of the variables and use them in programming statement logic, comparisons, and calculations.

i. The programming language shall have predefined variables representing the status and results of the system software and shall be able to enable, disable, and change the setpoints of the system software described below.

E. Portable Operator's Terminal. Provide all necessary software to configure an IBM-compatible laptop computer for use as a Portable Operator’s Terminal. Operator shall be able to connect configured Terminal to the system network or directly to each controller for programming, setting up, and troubleshooting.

2.4 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. Furnish the following applications for building and energy management. All software application shall reside and operate in the system controllers. Applications shall be editable through operator workstation, web browser interface, or engineering workstation.

B. System Security. See Paragraph 2.3.C.5 (Security) and Paragraph 2.3.C.14.c.iii (Operator Activity). C. Scheduling. Provide the capability to execute control functions according to a user created or edited

schedule. Each schedule shall provide the following schedule options as a minimum: 1. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Each schedule

shall be able to include up to 5 occupied periods (5 start-stop pairs or 10 events).



2. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule has executed, the system shall discard and replace the exception schedule with the standard schedule for that day of the week.

3. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 24 special or holiday schedules. These schedules will be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday period.

D. System Coordination. Operator shall be able to group related equipment based on function and location and to use these groups for scheduling and other applications.

E. Binary Alarms. Each binary object shall have the capability to be configured to alarm based on the operator-specified state. Provide the capability to automatically and manually disable alarming.

F. Analog Alarms. Each analog object shall have both high and low alarm limits. The operator shall be able to enable or disable these alarms.

G. Alarm Reporting. The operator shall be able to determine the action to be taken in the event of an alarm. An alarm shall be able to start programs, print, be logged in the event log, generate custom messages, and display on graphics.

H. Remote Communication. System shall automatically contact operator workstation or server on receipt of critical alarms. If no network connection is available, system shall use a modem connection.

I. Maintenance Management. The system shall be capable of generating maintenance alarms when equipment exceeds adjustable runtime, equipment starts, or performance limits. Configure and enable maintenance alarms as specified in Section 15900 Appendix A (Sequences of Operation).

J. Sequencing. Application software shall sequence chillers, boilers, and pumps as specified in Section 15900 Appendix A (Sequences of Operation).

K. PID Control. System shall provide direct- and reverse-acting PID (proportional-integral-derivative) algorithms. Each algorithm shall have anti-windup and selectable controlled variable, setpoint, and PID gains. Each algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value that can be used to position an output or to stage a series of outputs. The calculation interval, PID gains, and other tuning parameters shall be adjustable by a user with the correct security level.

L. Staggered Start. System shall stagger controlled equipment restart after power outage. Operator shall be able to adjust equipment restart order and time delay between equipment restarts.

M. Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output objects shall be protected from short cycling by means of adjustable minimum on-time and off-time settings.

N. On and Off Control with Differential. Provide an algorithm that allows a binary output to be cycled based on a controlled variable and a setpoint. The algorithm shall be direct-acting or reverse-acting.

O. Runtime Totalization. Provide software to totalize runtime for each binary input and output. Operator shall be able to enable runtime alarm based on exceeded adjustable runtime limit. Configure and enable runtime totalization and alarms as specified in Section 15900 Appendix A (Sequence of Operations).

2.5 CONTROLLERS

A. General. Provide an adequate number of Building Controllers (BC), Advanced Application Controllers (AAC), Application Specific Controllers (ASC), Smart Actuators (SA), and Smart Sensors (SS) as required to achieve performance specified in Section 15900 Article 1.9 (System Performance). Basis of design controller shall be Trane MP 580/581 and EX2 expansion module to match existing onsite equipment.

B. Communication 1. Service Port. Each controller shall provide a service communication port for connection to a

Portable Operator’s Terminal. Connection shall be extended to space temperature sensor ports where shown on drawings.

2. Signal Management. BC and ASC operating systems shall manage input and output communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and to allow for central monitoring and alarms.

3. Data Sharing. Each BC and AAC shall share data as required with each networked BC and AAC.



4. Stand-Alone Operation. Each piece of equipment specified in Section 15900 Appendix A shall be controlled by a single controller to provide stand-alone control in the event of communication failure. All I/O points specified for a piece of equipment shall be integral to its controller. Provide stable and reliable stand-alone control using default values or other method for values normally read over the network such as outdoor air conditions, supply air or water temperature coming from source equipment, etc.

C. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for anticipated ambient conditions. 1. Controllers used outdoors or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted in waterproof

enclosures and shall be rated for operation at -29°C to 60°C (-20°F to 140°F). 2. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-protective enclosures and

shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 120°F). D. Keypad. Provide a local keypad and display for each BC and AAC. Operator shall be able to use

keypad to view and edit data. Keypad and display shall require password to prevent unauthorized use. If the manufacturer does not normally provide a keypad and display for each BC and AAC, provide the software and any interface cabling needed to use a laptop computer as a Portable Operator’s Terminal for the system.

E. Real-Time Clock. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock. F. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring

connections shall be made to a field-removable modular terminal strip or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. Each BC and AAC shall continually check its processor and memory circuit status and shall generate an alarm on abnormal operation. System shall continuously check controller network and generate alarm for each controller that fails to respond.

G. Memory. 1. Controller memory shall support operating system, database, and programming

requirements. 2. Each BC and AAC shall retain BIOS and application programming for at least 72 hours in the

event of power loss. 3. Each ASC and SA shall use nonvolatile memory and shall retain BIOS and application

programming in the event of power loss. System shall automatically download dynamic control parameters following power loss.

H. Immunity to Power and Noise. Controllers shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).

I. Transformer. ASC power supply shall be fused or current limiting and shall be rated at a minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption.

INPUT AND OUTPUT INTERFACE

A. General. Hard-wire input and output points to BCs, AACs, ASCs, or SAs. B. Protection. All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to

itself, to another point, or to ground shall cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24 V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause no controller damage.

C. Binary Inputs. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of ON/OFF signals from remote devices. The binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available control devices and shall be protected against contact bounce and noise. Binary inputs shall sense dry contact closure without application of power external to the controller.

D. Pulse Accumulation Inputs. Pulse accumulation inputs shall conform to binary input requirements and shall also accumulate up to 10 pulses per second.

E. Analog Inputs. Analog inputs shall monitor low-voltage (0–10 Vdc), current (4–20 mA), or resistance (thermistor or RTD) signals. Analog inputs shall be compatible with and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices.

F. Binary Outputs. Binary outputs shall provide for ON/OFF operation or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse width modulation control. Binary outputs on Building Controllers shall have three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights. Outputs shall be selectable for normally open or normally closed operation.



G. Analog Outputs. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0–10 Vdc or a 4–20 mA signal as required to properly control output devices. Each Building Controller analog output shall have a two-position (auto-manual) switch, a manually adjustable potentiometer, and status lights. Analog outputs shall not drift more than 0.4% of range annually.

H. Tri-State Outputs. Control three-point floating electronic actuators without feedback with tri-state outputs (two coordinated binary outputs). Tri-State outputs may be used to provide analog output control in zone control and terminal unit control applications such as VAV terminal units, duct-mounted heating coils, and zone dampers.

I. System Object Capacity. The system size shall be expandable to at least twice the number of input/ output objects required for this project. Additional controllers (along with associated devices and wiring) shall be all that is necessary to achieve this capacity requirement. The operator interfaces installed for this project shall not require any hardware additions or software revisions in order to expand the system

POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING

A. Power Supplies. Control transformers shall be UL listed. Furnish Class 2 current-limiting type or furnish over-current protection in primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service in accordance with NEC requirements. Limit connected loads to 80% of rated capacity.

1. DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements. Unit shall be full-wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak-to-peak. Regulation shall be 1.0% line and load combined, with 100-microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage and over-current protection and shall be able to withstand 150% current overload for at least three seconds without trip-out or failure.

a. Unit shall operate between 0°C and 50°C (32°F and 120°F). EM/RF shall meet FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and MILSTD 810C for shock and vibration.

b. Line voltage units shall be UL recognized and CSA listed. B. Power Line Filtering.

1. Provide internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations and controllers. Surge protection shall have:

a. Dielectric strength of 1000 V minimum b. Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less c. Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater d. Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40–100 Hz

AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

A. Motorized Control Dampers are specified in section 15820 and provided by the mechanical contractor.

B. Electric Damper and Valve Actuators powered and controlled by the BMS are provided by the BMS vendor. Actuators controlled by hard wired controls are specified in section 15820 and provided by the mechanical contractor.

1. Stall Protection. Mechanical or electronic stall protection shall prevent actuator damage throughout the actuator’s rotation.

2. Spring-return Mechanism. Actuators used for power-failure and safety applications shall have an internal mechanical spring-return mechanism or an uninterruptible power supply (UPS).

3. Signal and Range. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0–10 Vdc or a 0–20 mA control signal and shall have a 2–10 Vdc or 4–20 mA operating range. (Floating motor actuators may be substituted for proportional actuators in terminal unit applications as described in paragraph 2.6H.)

4. Wiring. 24 Vac and 24 Vdc actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring. 5. Manual Positioning. Operators shall be able to manually position each actuator when the

actuator is not powered. Non-spring-return actuators shall have an external manual gear release. Spring-return actuators with more than 7 N·m (60 in.-lb) torque capacity shall have a manual crank.



C. Binary Temperature Devices. 1. Low-Voltage Space Thermostats. Low-voltage space thermostats shall be 24 V, bimetal-

operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C–30°C (55°F–85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.

2. Line-Voltage Space Thermostats. Line-voltage space thermostats shall be bimetal-actuated, open-contact type or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, UL listing for electrical rating, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C–30°C (55°F–85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.

3. Low-Limit Thermostats. Low-limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor pressure type. Element shall be at least 6 m (20 ft) long. Element shall sense temperature in each 30 cm (1 ft) section and shall respond to lowest sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.

D. Temperature Sensors. 1. Type. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or thermistor. 2. Duct Sensors. Duct sensors shall be single point or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors

shall be a minimum of 1.5 m (5 ft) in length per 1 m2(10 ft2) of duct cross-section. 3. Immersion Sensors. Provide immersion sensors with a separable stainless steel well. Well

pressure rating shall be consistent with system pressure it will be immersed in. Well shall withstand pipe design flow velocities.

4. Space Sensors. Space sensors shall have setpoint adjustment, override switch, display, and communication port as shown.

5. Differential Sensors. Provide matched sensors for differential temperature measurement. E. Humidity Sensors.

1. Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%–80%. 2. Duct sensors shall have a sampling chamber. 3. Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%–95% RH and shall be

suitable for ambient conditions of -40°C–75°C (-40°F–170°F). 4. Humidity sensors shall not drift more than 1% of full scale annually.

F. Relays. 1. Control Relays. Control relays shall be plug-in type, UL listed, and shall have dust cover and

LED “energized” indicator. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be suitable for application.

2. Time Delay Relays. Time delay relays shall be solid-state plug-in type, UL listed, and shall have adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable ±100% from setpoint shown. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for relays not installed in local control panel.

G. Override Timers. 1. Unless implemented in control software, override timers shall be spring-wound line voltage,

UL Listed, with contact rating and configuration required by application. Provide 0–6 hour calibrated dial unless otherwise specified. Flush mount timer on local control panel face or where shown.

H. Current Transmitters. 1. AC current transmitters shall be self-powered, combination split-core current transformer

type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4–20 mA two-wire output. Full-scale unit ranges shall be 10 A, 20 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A, and 200 A, with internal zero and span adjustment. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden.

2. Transmitter shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSA recognized.

3. Unit shall be split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring. I. Current Transformers.

1. AC current transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized and shall be completely encased (except for terminals) in approved plastic material.

2. Transformers shall be available in various current ratios and shall be selected for ±1% accuracy at 5 A full-scale output.



3. Use fixed-core transformers for new wiring installation and split-core transformers for existing wiring installation.

J. Voltage Transmitters. 1. AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single-loop (two-wire) type, 4–20 mA output

with zero and span adjustment. 2. Adjustable full-scale unit ranges shall be 100–130 Vac, 200–250 Vac, 250–330 Vac, and

400–600 Vac. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden. 3. Transmitters shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSA

recognized at 600 Vac rating. K. Voltage Transformers.

1. AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized, 600 Vac rated, and shall have built-in fuse protection.

2. Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of 4°C–55°C (40°F–130°F) and shall provide ±0.5% accuracy at 24 Vac and 5 VA load.

3. Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely enclosed with metal or plastic. L. Current Switches.

1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current. Select switches to match application current and DDC system output requirements.

M. Pressure Transducers. 1. Transducers shall have linear output signal and field-adjustable zero and span. 2. Transducer sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions of positive or

negative pressure 50% greater than calibrated span without damage. 3. Water pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum proof pressure

of 1000 kPa (150 psi). Transducer shall have 4–20 mA output, suitable mounting provisions, and block and bleed valves.

4. Water differential pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum proof pressure of 1000 kPa (150 psi). Over-range limit (differential pressure) and maximum static pressure shall be 2000 kPa (300 psi.)Transducer shall have 4–20 mA output, suitable mounting provisions, and 5-valve manifold.

N. Differential Pressure Switches. Differential pressure switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum) and shall have scale range and differential suitable for intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.

O. Pressure-Electric (PE) Switches. 1. Shall be metal or neoprene diaphragm actuated, operating pressure rated for 0–175 kPa (0–

25 psig), with calibrated scale minimum setpoint range of 14–125 kPa (2–18 psig) minimum, UL listed.

2. Provide one- or two-stage switch action (SPDT, DPST, or DPDT) as required by application Electrically rated for pilot duty service (125 VA minimum) and/or for motor control.

3. Switches shall be open type (panel-mounted) or enclosed type for remote installation. Enclosed type shall be NEMA 1 unless otherwise specified.

4. Each pneumatic signal line to PE switches shall have permanent indicating gauge. P. Occupancy Sensors. Occupancy sensors shall utilize Passive Infrared (PIR) and/or Microphonic

Passive technology to detect the presence of people within a room. Sensors shall be mounted as indicated on the approved drawings. The sensor output shall be accessible by any lighting and/or HVAC controller in the system. Occupancy sensors shall be capable of being powered from the lighting or HVAC control panel, as shown on the drawings. Occupancy sensor delay shall be software adjustable through the user interface and shall not require manual adjustment at the sensor.

Q. Local Control Panels. 1. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 construction with (hinged door)

key-lock latch and removable subpanels. A single key shall be common to all field panels and subpanels.

2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices shall be prewired with color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600 volt service, individually identified per control/



interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.

3. Provide ON/OFF power switch with overcurrent protection for control power sources to each local panel.

WIRING AND RACEWAYS

A. General. Provide copper wiring, plenum cable, and raceways as specified in applicable sections of Division 16.

B. Insulated wire shall use copper conductors and shall be UL listed for 90°C (200°F) minimum service. C. LonWorks Communication Cable shall be according to TP/TF-10 Free Topology Channel (FTT-10A

and LPT transceivers):

1. Recommended cables (shall be stranded & tinned copper): 2. Belden 8471 or equivalent. 3. Belden 85102 or equivalent. 4. Communication wire shall be the same manufacturer and model of existing wiring. 5. Communication cable must use ferrules at each wire end. If two wires are connected to the

same terminal block (daisy chain) then use a two wires ferrule. 6. End each cable with translucent shrinkable tubing to protect the shield. 7. Keep exposed wires (out of shield protection) no more than one inch long. 8. Tag cable on both ends. 9. Any non-used wire must be spliced to the drain wire at each cable end.

D. Control Cable: Use only stranded tinned wire to interconnect all control devices (between field devices and control panel), solid wire or stranded not tinned wire is not acceptable. Wiring shall be as follow:

1. All wires must end with ferrules. 2. Keep exposed wires (out of shield protection) no more than one inch long. 3. Tag cable on both ends. 4. Use only shielded stranded tinned cable for analog signal. 5. End each cable with translucent shrinkable tubing to protect the shield for analog signal. 6. Any non-used cable wire must be spliced to the drain wire at each cable end for analog sig-

nal. E. Wire Splicing: Control cable wire splicing using wire nuts is not acceptable. Wires shall be soldered

together and then insulated with shrinkable tubing. Keep exposed wires (out of shield protection) no more than one inch long. Communication wire splicing is not acceptable.

F. Power Cable: For control panel wiring use only stranded tinned wire to interconnect all control devices, solid wire or stranded not tinned wire is not acceptable. Wiring shall be as follows:

1. All wires must end with ferrules. 2. Tag cable on both ends. 3. Use only stranded tinned cable.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment may be installed as shown. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

B. The contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for other parts of the work. If head room or space conditions appear inadequate—or if any discrepancies occur between the plans and the contractor’s work and the plans and the work of others—the contractor shall report these discrepancies to the engineer and shall obtain written instructions for any changes necessary to



accommodate the contractor’s work with the work of others. Any changes in the work covered by this specification made necessary by the failure or neglect of the contractor to report such discrepancies shall be made by—and at the expense of—this contractor.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. The contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or employees and shall be liable for all damage thus caused.

B. The contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The contractor shall protect any material that is not immediately installed. The contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.

3.3 COORDINATION

A. Site 1. Where the mechanical work will be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with, work

of other trades, the contractor shall assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. If the contractor installs his/her work before coordinating with other trades, so as to cause any interference with work of other trades, the contractor shall make the necessary changes in his/her work to correct the condition without extra charge.

2. Coordinate and schedule work with other work in the same area and with work dependent upon other work to facilitate mutual progress.

B. Submittals. See Section 15900 Article 1.10 (Submittals). C. Test and Balance.

1. The contractor shall furnish a single set of all tools necessary to interface to the control system for test and balance purposes.

2. The contractor shall provide training in the use of these tools. This training will be planned for a minimum of 4 hours.

3. In addition, the contractor shall provide a qualified technician to assist in the test and balance process, until the first 20 terminal units are balanced.

4. The tools used during the test and balance process will be returned at the completion of the testing and balancing.

D. Life Safety. 1. Duct smoke detectors required for air handler shutdown are provided under Division 16.

Interlock smoke detectors to air handlers for shutdown as specified in Section 15900 Appendix A (Sequences of Operation).

2. Fire and smoke dampers and actuators required for fire-rated walls are provided under Division 15.

E. Coordination with controls specified in other sections or divisions. Other sections and/or divisions of this specification include controls and control devices that are to be part of or interfaced to the control system specified in this section. These controls shall be integrated into the system and coordinated by the contractor as follows:

1. All communication media and equipment shall be provided as specified in Section 15900 Article 2.2 (Communication).

2. Each supplier of a controls product is responsible for the configuration, programming, start up, and testing of that product to meet the sequences of operation described in Section 15900 Appendix A.

3. The contractor shall coordinate and resolve any incompatibility issues that arise between control products provided under this section and those provided under other sections or divisions of this specification.

4. The contractor is responsible for providing all controls described in the contract documents regardless of where within the contract documents these controls are described.

5. The contractor is responsible for the interface of control products provided by multiple suppliers regardless of where this interface is described within the contract documents.



3.4 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP

A. Install equipment, piping, and wiring/raceway parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible.

B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. C. Install equipment in readily accessible locations as defined by Chapter 1 Article 100 Part A of the

National Electrical Code (NEC). D. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds. E. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with industry specifications and standards for

performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.


A. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Section 15900 Article 1.8 (Codes and Standards).

B. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship.

C. Contractor shall have work inspection by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work.

3.6 EXISTING EQUIPMENT

A. Wiring. The contractor may reuse any abandoned wires. The integrity of the wire and its proper application to the installation are the responsibility of the contractor. The wire shall be properly identified and tested in accordance with this specification. Unused or redundant wiring must be properly identified as such.

B. Local Control Panels. The contractor may reuse any existing local control panel to locate new equipment. All redundant equipment within these panels must be removed. Panel face cover must be patched to fill all holes caused by removal of unused equipment or replaced with new.

C. Repair. Unless otherwise directed, the contractor is not responsible for repair or replacement of existing energy equipment and systems, valves, dampers, or actuators. Should the contractor find existing equipment that requires maintenance, the engineer is to be notified immediately.

D. Temperature Sensor Wells. The contractor may reuse any existing wells in piping for temperature sensors. These wells shall be modified as required for proper fit of new sensors.

E. Indicator Gauges. Where these devices remain and are not removed, they must be made operational and recalibrated to ensure reasonable accuracy.

F. Room Thermostats. Room thermostats may be reused. Remove and deliver unnecessary thermostats to Owner unless otherwise noted. Patch and finish holes and marks left by removal to match existing walls.

G. Electronic Sensors and Transmitters. Unless specifically noted otherwise, existing sensors and transmitters may be reused. Remove and deliver unnecessary sensors and transmitters to Owner.

H. Controllers and Auxiliary Electronic Devices. Existing controllers and auxiliary electronic devices may be reused unless specifically noted otherwise. Recondition as necessary. Remove unnecessary sensors and transmitters.

I. Damper Actuators, Linkages, and Appurtenances. Existing damper actuators, linkages, and appurtenances may be reused unless specifically noted otherwise. Recondition as necessary. Remove and deliver unnecessary equipment to Owner.

J. Existing System Operating Schedule. The mechanical system must remain in operation and shall maintain space comfort at all times between the hours of 6 a.m. and 9 p.m., Monday through Friday. No modifications to the system shall cause mechanical system to be shut down for more than 15 minutes or to fail to maintain space comfort conditions during any such period. Perform cut-over of controls that cannot meet these conditions outside of operational hours.

K. The scheduling of fans through existing or temporary time clocks or control system shall be maintained throughout the DDC system installation

L. Install control panels where shown.



M. Modify existing starter control circuits, if necessary, to provide hand-off-auto control of each controlled starter. If new starters or starter control packages are required, these shall be included as part of this contract.

N. Patch holes and finish to match existing walls.

3.7 WIRING

A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with national and local electrical codes, and Division 16 of this specification, Where the requirements of this section differ from Division 16, the requirements of this section shall take precedence.

B. All NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL listed in approved raceway according to NEC and Division 16 requirements.

C. All low-voltage wiring shall meet NEC Class 2 requirements. Low-voltage power circuits shall be subfused when required to meet Class 2 current limit.

D. Where NEC Class 2 (current-limited) wires are in concealed and accessible locations, including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that cables are UL listed for the intended application.

E. All wiring in mechanical, electrical, or service rooms – or where subject to mechanical damage – shall be installed in raceway at levels below 3 m (10ft).

F. Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceways containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high-voltage wiring and equipment may not be used for low-voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g. relays and transformers).

G. Do not install wiring in raceway containing tubing. H. Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring is to be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it

and neatly tied at 3 m (10 ft) intervals. I. Where plenum cables are used without raceway, they shall be supported from or anchored to

structural members. Cables shall not be supported by or anchored to ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems.

J. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal block or terminal strip. All wire-to-wire connections shall be at a terminal block.

K. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals.

L. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120 V. If only higher voltages are available, the contractor shall provide step-down transformers.

M. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, with no splices permitted between termination points.

N. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all penetrations.

O. Size of raceway and size and type of wire type shall be the responsibility of the contractor in keeping with the manufacturer’s recommendations and NEC requirements, except as noted elsewhere.

P. Include one pull string in each raceway 2.5 cm (1 in.) or larger. Q. Use color-coded conductors throughout with conductors of different colors. R. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These enclosures include

packaged equipment control panel enclosures unless they also contain Class 1 starters. S. Conceal all raceways except within mechanical, electrical, or service rooms. Install raceway to

maintain a minimum clearance of 15 cm (6 in.) from high-temperature equipment (e.g. steam pipes or flues).

T. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to the structure and spaced according to code requirements. Raceways and pull boxes may not be hung on flexible duct strap or tie rods. Raceways may not be run on or attached to ductwork.

U. Adhere to this specification's Division 16 requirements where raceway crosses building expansion joints.

V. Install insulated bushings on all raceway ends and openings to enclosures. Seal top end of vertical raceways.

W. The contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated (as-built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site.



X. Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight flexible metal raceways shall not exceed 1 m (3 ft) in length and shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal raceway less than ½ in. electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal raceways shall be used.

Y. Raceway must be rigidly installed, adequately supported, properly reamed at both ends, and left clean and free of obstructions. Raceway sections shall be joined with couplings (according to code). Terminations must be made with fittings at boxes, and ends not terminating in boxes shall have bushings installed.

3.8 COMMUNICATION WIRING

A. The contractor shall adhere to the items listed in the "Wiring" article in Part 3 of the specification. B. All cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Follow manufacturer's installation

recommendations for all communication cabling C. Do not install communication wiring in raceways and enclosures containing Class 1 or other Class 2

wiring. D. Maximum pulling, tension, and bend radius for the cable installation, as specified by the cable

manufacturer, shall not be exceeded during installation. E. Contractor shall verify the integrity of the entire network following cable installation. Use appropriate

test measures for each particular cable. F. When a cable enters or exits a building, a lightning arrestor must be installed between the lines and

ground. The lighting arrestor shall be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions. G. All runs of communication wiring shall be unspliced length when that length is commercially

available. H. All communication wiring shall be labeled to indicate origination and destination data. I. All communication wiring shall be labeled to indicate origination and destination data. J. Grounding of coaxial cable shall be in accordance with NEC regulations article on "Communications

Circuits, Cable, and Protector Grounding."

3.9 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS

A. Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for environment within which the sensor operates. C. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by wall

framing. D. All wires attached to sensors shall be sealed in their raceways or in the wall to stop air transmitted

from other areas from affecting sensor readings. E. Sensors used in mixing plenums and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type. Averaging

sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner vertically across the duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip.

F. Low-limit sensors used in mixing plenums shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip. Provide 3 m (1 ft) of sensing element for each 1 m2(1 ft2) of coil area.

G. All pipe-mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install liquid temperature sensors with heat-conducting fluid in thermal wells.

H. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall, complete with sun shield at designated location.

I. Differential Air Static Pressure. 1. Supply Duct Static Pressure. Pipe the high-pressure tap to the duct using a pitot tube. Pipe

the low-pressure port to a tee in the height-pressure tap tubing of the corresponding building static pressure sensor (if applicable) or to the location of the duct high-pressure tap and leave open to the plenum.

2. Return Duct Static Pressure. Pipe high-pressure tap to duct using a pitot tube. Pipe the low-pressure port to a tee in the low-pressure tap tubing of the corresponding building static pressure sensor.

3. Building Static Pressure. Pipe the low-pressure port of the pressure sensor to the static pressure port located on the outside of the building through a high-volume accumulator. Pipe the high-pressure port to a location behind a thermostat cover.



4. The piping to the pressure ports on all pressure transducers shall contain a capped test port located adjacent to the transducer.

5. All pressure transducers, other than those controlling VAV boxes, shall be located in field device panels, not on the equipment monitored or on ductwork. Mount transducers in a location accessible for service without use of ladders or special equipment.

6. All air and water differential pressure sensors shall have gauge tees mounted adjacent to the taps. Water gauges shall also have shut-off valves installed before the tee.

J. Smoke detectors, freezestats, high-pressure cut-offs, and other safety switches shall be hard-wired to de-energize equipment as described in the sequence of operation. Switches shall require manual reset. Provide contacts that allow DDC software to monitor safety switch status.

K. Install humidity sensors for duct mounted humidifiers at least 3 m (10 ft) downstream of the humidifier. Do not install filters between the humidifier and the sensor.

3.10 ACTUATORS

A. General. Mount and link control damper actuators according to manufacturer's instructions. 1. To compress seals when spring-return actuators are used on normally closed dampers,

power actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, and then tighten the linkage.

2. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.

3. Provide all mounting hardware and linkages for actuator installation. B. Electric/Electronic

1. Dampers: Actuators shall be direct mounted on damper shaft or jackshaft unless shown as a linkage installation. For low-leakage dampers with seals, the actuator shall be mounted with a minimum 5° travel available for tightening the damper seal. Actuators shall be mounted following manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Valves: Actuators shall be connected to valves with adapters approved by the actuator manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following the actuator manufacturer's recommendations.

3.11 WARNING LABELS

A. Permanent warning labels shall be affixed to all equipment that can be automatically started by the control system.

1. Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on a red background. 2. Warning labels shall read as follows.

C A U T I O N

This equipment is operating under automatic control and may start or stop at any time without warning. Switch disconnect to"Off"position before servicing.

B. Permanent warning labels shall be affixed to all motor starters and control panels that are connected

to multiple power sources utilizing separate disconnects. 1. Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on a red background. 2. Warning labels shall read as follows.

C A U T I O N

This equipment is fed from more than one power source with separate disconnects. Disconnect all power sources before servicing.

3.12 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING

A. All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels shall be labeled at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination with control system address or termination number.

B. All pneumatic tubing shall be labeled at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination with a descriptive identifier.

C. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served.



D. Identify control panels with minimum 1 cm (½ in.) letters on laminated plastic nameplates. E. Identify all other control components with permanent labels. All plug-in components shall be labeled

such that label removal of the component does not remove the label. F. Identify room sensors related to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates. G. Manufacturers' nameplates and UL or CSA labels shall be visible and legible after equipment is

installed. H. Identifiers shall match record documents.

3.13 CONTROLLERS

A. Provide a separate controller for each AHU or other HVAC system. A DDC controller may control more than one system provided that all points associated with the system are assigned to the same DDC controller. Points used for control loop reset, such as outside air or space temperature, are exempt from this requirement.

B. Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide the required I/O point capacity required to monitor all of the hardware points listed in 15900 Appendix A (Sequences of Operation).

3.14 PROGRAMMING

A. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified sequences of operation and trend logging. B. Point Naming. Name points as shown on the equipment points list provided with each sequence of

operation. See Section 15900 Appendix A (Sequences of Operation). If character limitations or space restrictions make it advisable to shorten the name, the abbreviations given in Appendix B to Section 15900 may be used.

C. Software Programming. 1. Provide programming for the system and adhere to the sequences of operation provided. All

other system programming necessary for the operation of the system, but not specified in this document, also shall be provided by the contractor. Embed into the control program sufficient comment statements to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequences of operation. Use the appropriate technique based on the following programming types:

a. Text-based: i. Must provide actions for all possible situations ii. Must be modular and structured iii. Must be commented

b. Graphic-based: i. Must provide actions for all possible situations ii. Must be documented

c. Parameter-based: i. Must provide actions for all possible situations ii. Must be documented.

D. Operator Interface. 1. Standard Graphics. Provide graphics for all mechanical systems and floor plans of the

building. This includes each chilled water system, hot water system, chiller, boiler, air handler, and all terminal equipment. Point information on the graphic displays shall dynamically update. Show on each graphic all input and output points for the system. Also show relevant calculated points such as setpoints. As a minimum, show on each equipment graphic the input and output points and relevant calculated points as indicated on the applicable Points List in Section 15900 Appendix A.

2. The contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start up, and troubleshoot all operator interface software and its functions as described in this section. This includes any operating system software, the operator interface database, and any third-party software installation and integration required for successful operation of the operator interface.



3.15 CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING

A. Startup Testing. All testing listed in this article shall be performed by the contractor and shall make up part of the necessary verification of an operating control system. This testing shall be completed before the owner’s representative is notified of the system demonstration.

1. The contractor shall furnish all labor and test apparatus required to calibrate and prepare for service of all instruments, controls, and accessory equipment furnished under this specification.

2. Verify that all control wiring is properly connected and free of all shorts and ground faults. Verify that terminations are tight.

3. Enable the control systems and verify calibration of all input devices individually. Perform calibration procedures according to manufacturers’ recommendations.

4. Verify that all binary output devices (relays, solenoid valves, two-position actuators and control valves, magnetic starters, etc.) operate properly and that the normal positions are correct.

5. Verify that all analog output devices (I/Ps, actuators, etc.) are functional, that start and span are correct, and that direction and normal positions are correct. The contractor shall check all control valves and automatic dampers to ensure proper action and closure. The contractor shall make any necessary adjustments to valve stem and damper blade travel.

6. Verify that the system operation adheres to the sequences of operation. Simulate and observe all modes of operation by overriding and varying inputs and schedules. Tune all DDC loops.

7. Alarms and Interlocks: a. Check each alarm separately by including an appropriate signal at a value that will

trip the alarm. b. Interlocks shall be tripped using field contacts to check the logic, as well as to

ensure that the fail-safe condition for all actuators is in the proper direction. c. Interlock actions shall be tested by simulating alarm conditions to check the initiating

value of the variable and interlock action

3.16 CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Demonstration. 1. Prior to acceptance, the control system shall undergo a series of performance tests to verify

operation and compliance with this specification. These tests shall occur after the Contractor has completed the installation, started up the system, and performed his/her own tests.

2. The tests described in this section are to be performed in addition to the tests that the contractor performs as a necessary part of the installation, start-up, and debugging process and as specified in the "Control System Checkout and Testing" article in Part 3 of this specification. The engineer will be present to observe and review these tests. The engineer shall be notified at least 10 days in advance of the start of the testing procedures.

3. The demonstration process shall follow that approved in Part 1, "Submittals." The approved checklists and forms shall be completed for all systems as part of the demonstration.

4. The contractor shall provide at least two persons equipped with two-way communication and shall demonstrate actual field operation of each control and sensing point for all modes of operation including day, night, occupied, unoccupied, fire/smoke alarm, seasonal changeover, and power failure modes. The purpose is to demonstrate the calibration, response, and action of every point and system. Any test equipment required to prove the proper operation shall be provided by and operated by the contractor.

5. As each control input and output is checked, a log shall be completed showing the date, technician’s initials, and any corrective action taken or needed.

6. Demonstrate compliance with Part 1, "System Performance." 7. Demonstrate compliance with sequences of operation through all modes of operation. 8. Demonstrate complete operation of operator interface. 9. Additionally, the following items shall be demonstrated:

a. DDC loop response. The contractor shall supply trend data output in a graphical form showing the step response of each DDC loop. The test shall show the loop’s response to a change in set point, which represents a change of actuator position of



at least 25% of its full range. The sampling rate of the trend shall be from 10 seconds to 3 minutes, depending on the speed of the loop. The trend data shall show for each sample the set point, actuator position, and controlled variable values. Any loop that yields unreasonably under-damped or over-damped control shall require further tuning by the Contractor.

b. Optimum start/stop. The contractor shall supply a trend data output showing the capability of the algorithm. The change-of-value or change-of-state trends shall include the output status of all optimally started and stopped equipment, as well as temperature sensor inputs of affected areas.

c. Interface to the building fire alarm system. d. Operational logs for each system that indicate all set points, operating points, valve

positions, mode, and equipment status shall be submitted to the architect/engineer. These logs shall cover three 48-hour periods and have a sample frequency of not more than 10 minutes. The logs shall be provided in both printed and disk formats.

10. Any tests that fail to demonstrate the operation of the system shall be repeated at a later date. The contractor shall be responsible for any necessary repairs or revisions to the hardware or software to successfully complete all tests.

B. Acceptance. 1. All tests described in this specification shall have been performed to the satisfaction of both

the engineer and owner prior to the acceptance of the control system as meeting the requirements of completion. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the contractor may be exempt from the completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the engineer. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty.

2. The system shall not be accepted until all forms and checklists completed as part of the demonstration are submitted and approved as required in Part 1, "Submittals."

3.17 CLEANING

A. The contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his/her activities daily. The contractor shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc., under his/her control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a designated location.

B. At the completion of work in any area, the contractor shall clean all work, equipment, etc., keeping it free from dust, dirt, and debris, etc.

C. At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this section shall be checked for paint damage, and any factory-finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.

3.18 TRAINING

A. Provide training for a designated staff of Owner’s representatives. Training shall be provided via self-paced training, web-based or computer-based training, classroom training, or a combination of training methods.

B. Training shall address all the changes and updates to the existing control system and sequence of operation. Provide minimum of 8 hours of training.

C. The instructor(s) shall be factory-trained and experienced in presenting this material.

3.19 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

See Section 15900, Appendix A (Sequences of Operation, With Points Lists).

3.20 CONTROL DAMPER INSTALLATION

A. Damper submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, and size to ensure compatibility with sheet metal design.

B. Duct openings shall be free of any obstruction or irregularities that might interfere with blade or linkage rotation or actuator mounting. Duct openings shall measure ¼ in. larger than damper dimensions and shall be square, straight, and level.



C. Individual damper sections, as well as entire multiple section assemblies, must be completely square and free from racking, twisting, or bending. Measure diagonally from upper corners to opposite lower corners of each damper section. Both dimensions must be within 0.3 cm (1/8 in.) of each other.

D. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for field installation of control dampers. Unless specifically designed for vertical blade application, dampers must be mounted with blade axis horizontal.

E. Install extended shaft or jackshaft according to manufacturer’s instructions. (Typically, a sticker on the damper face shows recommended extended shaft location. Attach shaft on labeled side of damper to that blade.)

F. Damper blades, axles, and linkage must operate without binding. Before system operation, cycle damper after installation to ensure proper operation. On multiple section assemblies, all sections must open and close simultaneously.

G. Provide a visible and accessible indication of damper position on the drive shaft end. H. Support ductwork in area of damper when required to prevent sagging due to damper weight. I. After installation of low-leakage dampers with seals, caulk between frame and duct or opening to

prevent leakage around perimeter of damper.

3.21 DUCT SMOKE DETECTION

A. Submit data for coordination of duct smoke detector interface to HVAC systems as required in Part 1, "Submittals."

B. This Contractor shall provide a dry-contact alarm output in the same room as the HVAC equipment to be controlled.

3.22 CONTROLS COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

A. General. The electronic controls packaged with this equipment shall communicate with the building direct digital control (DDC) system. The DDC system shall communicate with these controls to read the information and change the control setpoints as shown in the points list, sequences of operation, and control schematics.

B. Distributed Processing. The controller shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to provide control functions if the network connection is lost.

C. I/O Capacity. The controller shall contain sufficient I/ O capacity to control the target system. D. The Controller shall have a physical connection for a laptop computer or a portable operator’s tool. E. Environment. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 40°C to 60°C (40°F to 140°F).

2. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-proof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 120°F).

F. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

G. Memory. The Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 30 days.

H. Power. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating. I. Transformer. Power supply for the Controller must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC power

consumption and shall be fused or current limiting type.

3.23 START-UP AND CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Start up, check out, and test all hardware and software and verify communication between all components.

1. Verify that all control wiring is properly connected and free of all shorts and ground faults. Verify that terminations are tight.

2. Verify that all analog and binary input/output points read properly. 3. Verify alarms and interlocks. 4. Verify operation of the integrated system.



APPENDIX A: Sequences of Operation

1. Environmental Monitoring Operation: Temperature sensors shall report to the controller.

Alarms shall be provided as follows:

• High Zone Temp: If the zone temperature is greater than the setpoint by a user definable amount (adj.).

• Low Zone Temp: If the zone temperature is less than the setpoint by a user definable amount (adj.).

• Carbon Monoxide Detected: If the carbon monoxide level is greater than the setpoint by a user definable amount (adj.).

Hardware Points Software Points

Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Loop Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graph-

ic

Generator Room Temperature Sensor Room

x x x x

High Zone Temp x

Low Zone Temp x

2. Generator Room Exhaust Fan EF-51 and Motor Operated Dampers MOD-14 and 15 Run Conditions - Continuous: The unit shall be continuously enabled to maintain a zone temperature cooling setpoint of 78°F (adj.).


• High Zone Temp: If the zone temperature is greater than the cooling setpoint by a user definable amount (adj.).

Fan: The fan shall run anytime the zone temperature rises above cooling setpoint, unless shutdown on safeties.

Fan Status: The controller shall monitor the fan status.


• Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off.

• Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.



• Fan Runtime Exceeded: Fan status runtime exceeds a user definable limit (adj.).

Dampers: Dampers MOD-14 and 15 shall be interlocked to open when EF-51 is enabled and closed when EF-51 is disa-bled.



ic

Zone Temp x x X

Fan Status x x X

Fan Start/Stop x x X

Dampers MOD-14 and 15 x x X

Cooling Setpoint x x X

High Zone Temp x

Fan Failure x

Fan in Hand x

Fan Runtime Exceeded x

3. Generator 1 and 2 Generator Power Interface Monitor: Current electrical power status and operating conditions shall be monitored through the device's communications interface port. The interface shall monitor and trend the points as shown on the Points List. The following is a list of possible points available through the communications interface port. Additional points may be available through the communications interface port and shall be added to this Points List.

Generator: The Points List also includes hard-wired points for each generator.



ic

Current Phase A x x X

Current Phase B x x X

Current Phase C x x X

Current Neutral x x X

Voltage A-B x x X

Voltage B-C x x X

Voltage C-A x x X

Voltage A-N x x X

Voltage B-N x x X

Voltage C-N x x X





ic

Real Power – kW x x X

Apparent Power – kVA x x X

Power Factor x x X

Frequency x x X

Real Energy – kWh x x X

Battery Supply Voltage x x x X

Battery Charger Failure x x x X

Generator Not In Auto x x x X

Generator Trouble x x x X

Generator Failure x x x X

Generator Breaker Open x x x X

Generator Run Status x x x X

4. Fuel System - Day Tank 1, and Day Tank 2 Existing Fuel Pump Package: Existing fuel pump package shall continue to operate as currently programmed.

Day Tank 1 and 2:

The internal controls on the day tank shall control the inlet solenoid valve and communicate to the existing fuel pump package. Any time the day tank level controller calls for fuel, the inlet solenoid valve shall open and a pump start signal sent to the existing pump package. A secondary (lag) pump start signal shall be sent to the existing pump package if the fuel falls below the low low level. The pump run signals shall stop and the solenoid valve shall close when the fuel level is satisfied. If an overflow condition occurs, the overflow alarm shall be generated and fuel shall overflow back to the existing main fuel tank by gravity. All of the alarms listed in the points list will come from the day tank controller.



ic

Day Tank 1 High Level x x x X

Day Tank 1 Low Level x x x X

Day Tank 1 Leak x x x X

Day Tank 1 Overflow x x x X

Day Tank 1 Not In Auto x x x X

Day Tank 2 High Level x x x X

Day Tank 2 Low Level x x x X

Day Tank 2 Leak X x x X





ic

Day Tank 2 Overflow X x x X

Day Tank 2 Not In Auto X x x X

5. Generator Synchronizing Switchboard The switchboard controller and power meter shall provide information through integration via communication interface (BACnet, MODBUS, etc.). Include all data mapping for all points selected by the Fairfax County representative.



ic

Controller Integration X X X X

Power Meter Integration X X X X

ATS Command Position (each ATS)

X X

ATS Mode (each ATS) X X X X

Generators in Sync X X X X

Generator command status X X X X

TVSS X X X X

ATS, Generator Software Setpoints

X X X

6. Automatic Transfer Switch: ATS- 2, 3, 4, 13, EM2, EM3, EM4, Fire Pump and SBP1C The controller shall monitor the status of the automatic transfer switches.



ic

ATS Status X X X

Switch Not In Auto X X X X

Switch Bypassed to Normal X X X

Switch Bypassed to Emergency X X X

7. RTU-A Controls: The factory onboard controller and thermostat shall control all internal functions. The following sequence of



operation shall be incorporated by a combination of factory onboard controls and the control system specified in this section.

Run Conditions - Scheduled: The unit shall run according to a user definable time schedule in the following modes:

• Occupied Mode: The unit shall maintain

• A 74°F (adj.) cooling setpoint

• A 70°F (adj.) heating setpoint

• A 50% RH (adj.) humidity setpoint

• Unoccupied Mode (night setback): The unit shall maintain

• A 78°F (adj.) cooling setpoint.

• A 65°F (adj.) heating setpoint.

• A 65% RH (adj.) humidity setpoint


• High Zone Temp: If the zone temperature is greater than the cooling setpoint by a user definable amount (adj.).

• Low Zone Temp: If the zone temperature is less than the heating setpoint by a user definable amount (adj.).

Zone Setpoint Adjust: The occupant shall be able to adjust the zone temperature heating and cooling setpoints at the thermostat.

Zone Optimal Start: The thermostat shall use an optimal start algorithm for morning start-up. This algorithm shall minimize the unoccupied warm-up or cool-down period while still achieving comfort conditions by the start of scheduled occupied period.

Fan: The fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless shutdown on safeties. Heating and Cooling – Two Speed Compressor: The factory onboard controller/thermostat shall control the compressors, reversing valve, and isolation control valve. The controller shall measure the zone temperature and vary the compressor to maintain its setpoint. To prevent short cycling, the stage shall have a user definable (adj.) minimum runtime. The compressor shall run subject to its own internal safeties and controls.

Electric Heat – Two Stages: The factory onboard controller/thermostat shall control the backup electric heat.

Discharge Air Temperature: The controller shall monitor the discharge air temperature.




• High Discharge Air Temp: If the discharge air temperature is greater than 120°F (adj.).

• Low Discharge Air Temp: If the discharge air temperature is less than 40°F (adj.).

Fan Status: The controller shall monitor the fan status.


• Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off.

• Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.

• Fan Runtime Exceeded: Fan status runtime exceeds a user definable limit (adj.).



ic

Discharge Air Temp x x X

Fan Status X x X

Unit Enable x x X

Schedule x

High Zone Temp x

Low Zone Temp x

High Discharge Air Temp x

Low Discharge Air Temp x

8. Exhaust Fan EF-54 Controls: Modify existing control sequence for this fan to remove the generator operation programming from the sequence. 9. Fans EF-51-1 and 51-2 Controls: Remove programming for these two fans that are demolished. 10. Chiller 3, Cooling Tower 1 Cell 1 and 2, Chilled Water Pump CHWP 7, and Condenser Water Pump CWP-3 Controls: Modify existing control sequence for Chiller 3, Cooling Tower 3 Cell 1 and 2, Chilled Water Pump CHWP 7, and Condenser Water Pump CWP-3 to enable them whenever the building power is lost and running on standby gen-erator power after an adjustable time period. The chiller, tower, and pump sequence shall return to the previous configuration and control sequence upon return to utility power after an adjustable time period.



APPENDIX B: Glossary of Terms

Terms used within the Specification Text: • Advanced Application Controller (AAC): A fully programmable control module. This control module may be capable of some of the advanced features found in Building Controllers (storing trends, initiating read and write requests, etc.) but it does not serve as a master controller. Advanced Application Controllers may reside on either the Ethernet/IP backbone or on a sub-net. • Application Specific Controller (ASC): A pre-programmed control module which is intended for use in a specific application. ASCs may be configurable, in that the user can choose between various pre-programmed options, but it does not support full custom pro-gramming. ASCs are often used on terminal equipment such as VAV boxes or fan coil units. In many vendors' architectures ASCs do not store trends or schedules but instead rely upon a Building Controller to provide those functions. • Building Controller (BC): A fully programmable control module which is capable of storing trends and schedules, serving as a router to de-vices on a subnet, and initiating read and write requests to other controllers. Typically this controller is located on the Ethernet/IP backbone of the BAS. In many vendors' architectures a Building Controller will serve as a master controller, storing schedules and trends for controllers on a subnet underneath the Building Controller. • Direct Digital Control (DDC): A control system in which a digital computer or microprocessor is directly connected to the valves, dampers, and other actuators which control the system, as opposed to indirectly controlling a system by resetting setpoints on an analog pneumatic or electronic controller. • PICS - Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement: A written document, created by the manufacturer of a device, which identifies the particular options specified by Lonworks that are implemented in the device. • Smart Actuator (SA): An actuator which is controlled by a network connection rather than a binary or analog signal. (0-10v, 4-20mA, relay, etc.) • Smart Sensor (SS): A sensor which provides information to the BAS via network connection rather than a binary or analog signal. (0-10000 ohm, 4-20mA, dry contact, etc.) • Web services: Web services are a standard method of exchanging data between computer systems using the XML (extensible markup language) and SOAP (simple object access protocol) standards. Web services can be used at any level within a Building Automation System (BAS), but most commonly they are used to transfer data between BAS us-ing different protocols or between a BAS and a non-BAS system such as a tenant billing system or a utility man-



agement system. Terms used within the Sequences of Operation: • adj. Adjustable by the end user, through the supplied user interface. • AI, AO, etc. (Column Headings on Points List) AI = Analog Input. A physical input to the control module. AO = Analog Output. A physical output from the control module. AV = Analog Value. An intermediate (software) point that may be editable or read-only. Editable AVs are typically used to allow the user to set a fixed control parameter, such as a setpoint. Read Only AVs are typically used to display the status of a control operation. BI = Binary Input. A physical input to the control module. BO = Binary Output. A physical output from the control module. BV = Binary Value. An intermediate (software) point that may be editable or read-only. Editable BVs are typically used to allow the user to set a fixed control parameter, such as a setpoint. Read Only BVs are typically used to display the status of a control operation. Loop = A control loop. Most commonly a PID control loop. Typically a control loop will include a setpoint, an input which is compared to the setpoint, and an output which controls some action based upon the difference between the input and the setpoint. A PID control loop will also include gains for the proportional, integral, and derivative response as well as an interval which controls how frequently the control loop updates its output. These gains may be adjustable by the end user for control loop "tuning," but in self-tuning control loops or loops which have been optimized for a specific application the gains may not be adjustable. Sched = Schedule. The control algorithm for this equipment shall include a user editable schedule. Trend. The control system shall be configured to collect and display a trend log of this object. The trending inter-val shall be no less than one sample every 5 minutes. (Change of Value trending, where a sample is taken every time the value changes by more than a user-defined minimum, is an acceptable alternative.) Alarm. The control system shall be configured to generate an alarm when this object exceeds user definable lim-its, as described in the Sequence of Controls. • KW Demand Limiting: * An energy management strategy that reduces energy consumption when a system's electric power meter ex-ceeds an operator-defined threshold. When power consumption exceeds defined levels, the system automatically adjust setpoints, de-energizes low priority equipment, and takes other pre-programmed actions to avoid peak demand charges. As the demand drops, the system restores loads in a predetermined manner. • Occupant Override Switch, or Timed Local Override: A control option that allows building occupants to override the programmed HVAC schedule for a limited period of time. When the override time expires, the zone returns to its unoccupied state. • Occupant Setpoint Adjustment: A control option that allows building occupants to adjust - within limits set by the HVAC control system - the heat-ing and cooling setpoints of selected zones. Typically the user interface for this function is built into the zone sen-sor. • Optimal Start-Up: *



A control strategy that automatically starts an HVAC system at the latest possible time yet ensures comfort condi-tions by the time the building becomes occupied. In a typical implementation, a controller measures the temperature of the zone and the outside air. Then, using design heating or cooling capacity at the design outside air temperature, the system computes how long a unit must run at maximum capacity to bring the zone temperature to its occupied setpoint. The optimal start algorithm often includes a self-learning feature to adjust for variations from design capacity. A distributed system must use Run on Request with Optimal Start. (See below.) • Requested, or Run on Request: * A control strategy that optimizes the runtime of a source piece of equipment that supplies one or more receiving units - such as an air handler unit supplying zone terminal units with heating, cooling, ventilation, or similar ser-vice. Source equipment runs only when needed, not on a fixed schedule. The source equipment runs when one or more receiving units request its services. An operator determines how many requests are required to start the source equipment. For example, if all the zones in a building are unoccupied and the zone terminal units do not need heating or cool-ing, the AHU will shut down. However, if a zone becomes occupied or needs cooling, the terminal unit will send a run request to the AHU to initiate the start-up sequence. If this AHU depends on a central chiller, it can send a run request to the chiller. The run on request algorithm also allows an operator to schedule occupancy for individual zones based on the needs of the occupants without having to adjust the schedules of related AHUs and chillers. • Trim and Respond, or Setpoint Optimization: * A control strategy that optimizes the setpoint of a source piece of equipment that supplies one or more receiving units - such as an air handler unit supplying zone terminal units with heating, cooling, ventilation, or similar ser-vice. The source unit communicates with receiving units to determine heating, cooling, and other requirements, and then adjusts its setpoint. For example, if all zones are comfortable and do not request cooling, the AHU will gradually increase (trim) its supply air setpoint. When a zone requests cooling, the AHU responds by dropping its setpoint. The more zones that request cooling, the more it drops the setpoint. The AHU repeats this process throughout the day to keep zones cool, but with a supply air setpoint that is no cooler than necessary. Contracting Terms: • Furnished or Provided: The act of supplying a device or piece of equipment as required meeting the scope of work specified and making that device or equipment operational. All costs required to furnish the specified device or equipment and make it operational are borne by the division specified to be responsible for providing the device or equipment. • Install or Installed: The physical act of mounting, piping or wiring a device or piece of equipment in accordance with the manufactur-er's instructions and the scope of work as specified. All costs required to complete the installation are borne by the division specified to include labor and any ancillary materials.



• Interface: The physical device required to provide integration capabilities from an equipment vendor's product to the control system. The equipment vendor most normally furnishes the interface device. An example of an interface is the chilled water temperature reset interface card provided by the chiller manufacturer in order to allow the control system to integrate the chilled water temperature reset function into the control system. • Integrate: The physical connections from a control system to all specified equipment through an interface as required to al-low the specified control and monitoring functions of the equipment to be performed via the control system.



APPENDIX C: Abbreviations

The following abbreviations may be used in graphics, schematics, point names, and other UI applications where space is at a premium.

AC - Air Conditioning ACU - Air Conditioning Unit AHU - Air Handling Unit AI - Analog Input AO - Analog Output AUTO - Automatic AUX - Auxiliary BI -Binary Input BO -Binary Output C -Common CHW - Chilled Water CHWP - Chilled Water Pump CHWR - Chilled Water Return CHWS - Chilled Water Supply COND - Condenser CW - Condenser Water CWP - Condenser Water Pump CWR - Condenser Water Return CWS - Condenser Water Supply DA - Discharge Air EA - Exhaust Air EF - Exhaust Fan EVAP - Evaporators FCU - Fan Coil Unit HOA - Hand / Off / Auto HP - Heat Pump HTEX - Heat Exchanger HW - Hot Water HWP - Hot Water Pump HWR - Hot Water Return HWS - Hot Water Supply MAX - Maximum MIN - Minimum MISC - Miscellaneous NC - Normally Closed NO - Normally Open OA - Outdoor Air RA - Return Air RF - Return Fan RH - Relative Humidity RTU - Roof-top Unit SA - Supply Air SF - Supply Fan SP - Static Pressure TEMP - Temperature UH - Unit Heater UV - Unit Ventilator VAV - Variable Air Volume VVTU - Variable Volume Terminal Unit W/ - with



W/O - without WSHP - Water Source Heat Pump END OF SECTION 15900


SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 15940 - 1

SECTION 15940 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each system automatically controlled, containing the following information:

1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices.

2. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control. 3. Indicate each control panel required, with internal and external piping and wiring clearly

indicated. Provide detail of panel face, including controls, instruments, and labeling. Include verbal description of sequence of operation.

B. Maintenance Data: Include copy of shop drawings in each maintenance manual.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.

1.5 MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

A. Refer to section 15900 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls for the sequence of operations for equipment controlled by the BMS.

B. Motor operated dampers MOD-1 through 6 shall be normally powered closed and spring open upon generator start signal for generator #1.

C. Motor operated dampers MOD-7 through 12 shall be normally powered closed and spring open upon generator start signal for generator #2.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 15940 - 2



TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 1

SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:

1. Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

2. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings. 3. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 4. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section. 5. Provide equipment and system tests and adjustments as required by the commissioning

plan.

B. Attend Commissioning meetings on site. Verify all settings and requirements with the Cx Authority and the AE before starting the TAB process.

C. Customize TAB procedures as required by the Commissioning Plan.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities.

C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants.

D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

E. NC: Noise criteria.

F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.

G. RC: Room criteria.



H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

I. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

J. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

K. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

L. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system.

M. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.

N. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reporting TAB procedures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 15 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.

C. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.

D. Warranties specified in this Section.


A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC, NEBB, or TABB.

B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor’s forms approved by the Engineer.

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."

E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer.



1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration.


A. Owner Occupancy: Owner may or may not occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities.

B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

D. Conduct and coordinate all TAB work in accordance with the commissioning plan.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on TAB contractor’s forms stating that TAB contractor will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents.

2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.



C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."

D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

K. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

L. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

M. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed

and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.

4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.

5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.

6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.



N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.



E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum

that houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters.

3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.

5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.

6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.



B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS

A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.

B. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.

3.8 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION



A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.

G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.

J. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.9 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: 0 to plus 3 percent. 2. Air Inlets: 0 to plus 3 percent. 3. Air Outlets: Minus 3 percent to plus 3 percent.

3.10 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.11 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.



B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:

1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings

and Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 3. Balancing stations. 4. Position of balancing devices.



F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number of belts, make, and size. k. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outside airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outside-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position.

G. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil identification. d. Capacity in Btuh. e. Number of stages. f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz. g. Rated amperage. h. Airflow rate in cfm. i. Face area in sq. ft..



j. Minimum face velocity in fpm.


a. Heat output in Btuh. b. Airflow rate in cfm. c. Air velocity in fpm. d. Entering-air temperature in deg F. e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. f. Voltage at each connection. g. Amperage for each phase.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number of belts, make, and size.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft.. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.



h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig.

J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Test apparatus used. d. Area served. e. Air-terminal-device make. f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram. g. Air-terminal-device type and model number. h. Air-terminal-device size. i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft..


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F.

K. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Unit make and model number. d. Compressor make. e. Compressor model and serial numbers. f. Refrigerant weight in lb. g. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F.


a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg. b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg. c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F. d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F. e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg F. f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg F. g. Condenser-water temperature differential in deg F. h. Condenser entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig. j. Condenser-water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.



k. Control settings. l. Unloader set points. m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig. n. High-pressure-cutout set point in psig. o. Suction pressure in psig. p. Suction temperature in deg F. q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig. r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F. s. Oil pressure in psig. t. Oil temperature in deg F. u. Voltage at each connection. v. Amperage for each phase. w. Kilowatt input. x. Crankcase heater kilowatt. y. Number of fans. z. Condenser fan rpm. aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm. bb. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower. cc. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection. dd. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.

L. Indoor-Air Quality Measurement Reports for Each HVAC System:

1. HVAC system designation. 2. Date and time of test. 3. Outdoor temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, and wind direction at start of test. 4. Room number or similar description for each location. 5. Measurements at each location. 6. Observed deficiencies.

M. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.

3.12 INSPECTIONS AND APPROVAL

A. Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the Final Report.

2. Randomly check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point. d. Measure sound levels at two locations.



e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations. f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.

B. Approval of TAB Report:

1. After inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, submit the report for approval by the Engineer.

2. The Engineer shall review the report as a shop drawing. 3. If the measurements exceed the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as

"FAILED." 4. TAB firm shall recheck the “FAILED” measurements and make adjustments. Revise the

final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.



MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING 15995 - 1

SECTION 15995 - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 INTENT: The intended result of the Mechanical Commissioning process is to assure the

Owner that the mechanical systems are installed, operate, and perform in accordance with Contract documents and that Owner’s personnel are properly trained to operate and maintain the systems – all prior to the Owner's acceptance of the building.

1.2 SCOPE:

A. Work Included: This project will have selected building systems commissioned in phases.

The equipment and systems to be commissioned are specified in Part 3 of this section. That portion of the commissioning effort that the Contractor is responsible to execute is defined herein. The commissioning process will be directed by a Commissioning Authority. The mechanical commissioning shall provide substantial verification that systems and equipment are installed and performing in accordance with the Contract Documents and design intent. This independent commissioning shall be complementary to the construction administration services performed by the Architect and/or Mechanical Consulting Engineer. The Contractor shall provide all manpower required to start/stop, run, operate and test all mechanical equipment and systems throughout the entire commissioning process as required by the commissioning plan and directed by the commissioning authority.

B. Work Not Included: It shall not be incumbent upon the Commissioning Authority to verify

adequacy of mechanical systems to accommodate the heating, cooling, ventilating, or domestic hot water loads imposed upon them, i.e. to evaluate design. Systems installed and performing in accordance with Contract Documents that do not achieve and/or maintain conditions in accordance with design intent will be so noted when observed. Commissioning of fire protection sprinkler and electrical systems are excluded from the mechanical commissioning process except as may be incidental to the operations of the mechanical system; i.e. note would be made if sprinkler piping blocked access to mechanical equipment, if a fan turned backwards due to improper power connections, etc.

1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental

Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.

B. This section complements and forms an integral part of Division 15 and all other sections of Division 15 shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

C. The specification Section 01800 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS forms a

part of this section and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.4 RELATED WORK:

A. Contractor: The contractor responsible for the installation of the equipment and/or systems to be commissioned shall be responsible for all pre-commissioning work as defined within this specification section, in addition to all associated work in the individual commissioned equipment and/or systems related Division 15 specification sections.

B. Mechanical: All Division 15 Mechanical specification sections form a part of this section and



shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

C. Electrical: All Division 16 Electrical specification sections form a part of this section and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.5 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS:

A. All work of Division 15 and related Division 16 work must be complete prior to functional performance verification, unless approved in writing by the Owner’s Project Manager.

An exception to this is any required seasonal or approved deferred performance verification. Required work includes completion and acceptance of the following tasks for all systems, including but not limited to: 1. Submission of all data requested by the Commissioning Authority

2. Correction of all identified issues or written approval by the Owner for exception from this milestone

3. Completed and signed start-up and pre-functional checklist documentation

4. Required training of Owner personnel completed and approved

5. Submission of acceptable and complete O&M manuals approved by the A/E.

B. Remedial Work: Completion of remedial work required as a result of failed functional

performance verification shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The time period for completion of remedial work required as a result of failed functional performance verification shall be a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days prior to the date of Owner’s acceptance of Substantial Completion; the time period shall be greater as required to meet the contractual Substantial Completion date.

C. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for liquidated damages for costs incurred due

to delays in Substantial Completion of the project. These damages shall include costs for Owner’s commissioning team members.

1.6 AUTHORITY OF THE COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY: Throughout the commissioning

process, the Commissioning Authority's role is primarily one of an observer/witness; monitoring the installation, start-up, operation, and performance of the mechanical heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) systems. The commissioning Authority shall have no authority to alter design or installation procedures. If acceptable performance cannot be achieved, it will be the commissioning Authority's responsibility to apprise the Owner, design engineer, and/or contractor of the deficiency. Corrective actions shall be the responsibility of the Owner, design engineer, and/or contractor; and not that of the commissioning Authority. The commissioning Authority shall have the authority to require and review tests and demonstrations to verify proper performance.

1.7 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER RESPONSIBILITY:

A. In addition to their normal performance of Construction Period Services, the Architect/

Engineer will furnish to the Commissioning Authority one copy of all approved mechanical systems Shop Drawings and Submittals and place the Commissioning Authority on the mailing list for all communications (including progress meeting minutes) regarding the commissioned mechanical systems.

B. The Architect/Engineer shall respond in writing to issues cited in correspondence provided

by the Commissioning Authority.



1.8 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY:

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the Commissioning Authority is provided with all relevant correspondence, submittals, notifications, and assistance as may be required to satisfactorily complete the commissioning process using whatever personnel, time and resources that are required. This Section provides minimum commissioning requirements; however, the Contractor shall exceed those requirements whenever necessary to achieve the intent of Mechanical Commissioning.

B. The Contractor shall include in his Bid the cost of furnishing the material requested and

manpower necessary for the verification of proper mechanical system installation and operation as specified in this Section.

C. The Contractor shall respond in writing to issues cited in correspondence provided by the

Commissioning Authority. D. The Contractor shall provide and conduct all functional performance testing for equipment

and systems and commissioning as required by this specification

1.9 CONTRACTORS’ SUBMITTALS AND DOCUMENTATION:

A. Contractor’s Commissioning Team: The Contractor shall provide the Commissioning Authority with a list of team members (including: member’s name, contract affiliation, title, responsibility, phone, fax, email, and mailing address) who will represent the Installing Contractors in pre-functional checks and functional performance verification. Submit no later than at the Pre-Commissioning Meeting.

B. Schedule and Notification:

1. The Contractor’s Construction Schedule shall adequately incorporate and provide for

commissioning milestones and activities. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Mechanical Subcontractor to provide adequate time to accommodate all commissioning activities including the witnessing of milestone events, equipment start-ups, Owner training, Operating and Maintenance Manuals review and all other activities requiring scheduled participation of the Commissioning Authority as defined in the pre-functional checks and functional performance verification forms.

2. Notification of an impending event shall be provided to the Commissioning Authority at

least 48 hours in advance, notification may be via fax or email. The 48 hour notice is acceptable if the event is accurately scheduled on the most current Construction Schedule. Events not accurately identified in the Construction Schedule shall require one week notice.

C. Submittals:

1. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer for

review at least eight (8) weeks before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Operating and Maintenance Manuals must be approved by A/E prior to Contractor’s Request for Substantial Completion. A/E shall provide the approved Operating and Maintenance Manuals to the Commissioning Authority after the A/E’s review. The Manuals with A/E and Commissioning Authority’s review comments will be returned to the Contractor for preparation for use in training of Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel. Training of Owner’s personnel must occur before Contractor’s Request for Substantial Completion.

2. Demonstration and Training schedule shall be submitted to the Commissioning

Authority at the time of submission of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals; time



for Demonstration and Training shall be included in the contractor’s project schedule throughout the project. Schedule shall fully detail all demonstrations and training that shall be provided by the Contractor to the Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel. Actual dates and times, if used, shall be understood as tentative and subject to change based upon actual construction progress. However, at a minimum, the Demonstration and Training schedule shall include time allocations (i.e. hours) for each piece of equipment or system for which demonstration and training are specified.

D. Documentation:

1. The Contractor shall maintain on site the pre-functional checklists, organized by

system and by subsystem. Entries shall be made on the checklists as items are completed.

2. Two weeks prior to scheduled start of functional performance verification, the Contractor

shall provide the Commissioning Authority with a comprehensive report asserting that systems are ready for functional performance verification. The report shall include the following materials:

a. Detailed descriptions of any deviations from the Contract Documents (including but

not limited to: change orders, addenda, and field changes) organized by system and by subsystem.

b. Complete set of as-built drawings and documents, clearly identifying all deviations

from the Contract Documents and organized by system and by subsystem.

c. Complete set of all required manufacturer’s equipment tests, organized by system and by subsystem.

d. Completed pre-functional checklists, organized by system and by subsystem.

e. Results of any failed tests and detailed description of corrective actions taken,

organized by system and by subsystem.

E. Additional Information

1. The Contractor may receive a written request from the Commissioning Authority requesting specific information needed about each piece of commissioned equipment or system.

2. Typically this request for specific information will include: detailed manufacturer

installation and start-up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures; full details of any Owner-contracted tests; fan and pump curves; full factory testing reports, if any; and full warranty information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. In addition, copies of the installation and checkout materials shipped with the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Commissioning Authority.

3. The Commissioning Authority may request further documentation deemed necessary for

the commissioning process. These data requests may be made prior to the normal submittal process.

F. Contractor’s responsibility to have no deviations in submittals from requirements of the

Contract Documents is not relieved by the Commissioning Authority’s review.

1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: The mechanical systems commissioning may be construed



to be in three parts: Installation verification, training and demonstrations, and performance verification.

A. Installation verification utilizes Pre-Functional Check Lists, documenting that equipment/

systems is/are installed and started in accordance with Contract Documents and is/are serviceable.

B. Contractor’s training of and demonstrations for Owner’s operating and maintenance

personnel occurs after Pre-Functional Checks are complete and all test and inspection reports and operation and maintenance manuals have been submitted and approved by the Architect/Engineer. Training and demonstrations usually precede Performance Verification; some training, such as use and operations of the automation system, occurs during and after performance verifications.

C. Performance verification employs Functional Performance Verification forms and occurs only

after all work required in related Sections, including TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING and submission of automation system trends, has been successfully completed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM AND CHECKLISTS

A. The Contractor shall designate team members to participate in the pre- functional

checks and functional performance verification specified herein. In addition, the project manager, the architect/engineer and the manufacturer will represent the Owner. The team members shall be designated as follows: Designation Function

CA Commissioning Authority

GC General Contractor

MC Mechanical Contractor

TC Temperature Control Contractor

TAB Testing and Balancing Contractor

O Owner

A/E Architect/Engineer EC Electrical Contractor MFR Manufacturer

B. The Pre-Functional Checklists attached in Appendix A and Functional Performance

Verifications attached in Appendix B assign responsibility for specific commissioning activity tasks. An unshaded box indicates where participation by a specific commissioning team member is required. The Contractor and responsible Installing subcontractor(s) and any additional commissioning team members identified on the checklist shall initial and date the appropriate forms for each task indicated in these Checklists. One form shall be completed for each piece of commissioned equipment or system. By initialing and dating



the entry, the responsible Installing Contractor(s) and identified additional commissioning team members shall indicate completion and verification of proper installation in accordance with Contract requirements and acceptance of responsibility for the installation of the equipment and/or systems.

1. Forms are to be initialed and dated at the time of completion of the specific

checklist task item.

2. Where additional forms are required, the Contractor shall be responsible for photocopying or replicating the appropriate form(s).

3.2 RESPONSIBILITIES: Each member of the commissioning team has responsibilities to the

successful completion of the commissioning process as follows:

A. The Owner's Representatives shall perform their normal construction contract administration functions.

B. The Architect shall provide adequate support to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer as

related to his duties in the commissioning process. It shall also be the Architect's responsibility, either directly or through his assignee, to assure that the commissioning Authority is:

1. Provided copies of approved shop drawings as they are returned to the Contractor

2. Notified of time, date, and place of all regularly scheduled progress meetings, and of

any special meetings that may be called regarding mechanical systems.

3. Copied on all correspondence pertinent to the mechanical systems including but not limited to minutes of progress meetings, responses to contractor requests for information, change order documentation.

C. The Consulting Mechanical Engineer shall perform his normal construction contract

administration functions including resolution of Contractor Requests for Information on mechanical documents and installation.

D. The Contractor shall, in addition to his normal responsibilities for construction of the

project, assure that his subcontractors, suppliers and vendors recognize the authority of the commissioning Authority and perform in accordance with the requirements of the commissioning process. The Contractor shall assure that proper notification, at least 48 hours in advance, is provided to the Commissioning Authority of the milestones of the mechanical systems installation, at a minimum as follows:

1. Start-up of equipment specified to be performed by factory authorized personnel.

2. Duct leakage testing

3. Piping cleaning, flushing, and pressure testing

4. Start date of Air/Water Balancing

5. Date of punch-out inspections

6. Date of training and instructions to Owner's operating personnel regarding operations of the mechanical system.

. E. The Electrical Subcontractor shall perform his normal contract obligations and be responsive

to the authority of the Commissioning Authority.

F. The Commissioning Authority will follow the procedures as set forth in the paragraph titled



Commissioning Authority Procedures to execute his responsibility for:

1. Verifying that the required mechanical systems are installed and operating in accordance with Contract Documents.

2. Assuring that Owner's Operating and Maintenance personnel are fully trained on

systems operation and maintenance.

3. Assuring that Close Out documentation is properly provided to the Owner.

3.3 TESTS

A. The pre-functional checks and functional performance verification shall be performed in a manner that essentially duplicates the checking, testing, and inspection methods established in the related Sections. Where checking, testing and inspection methods are not specified in other Sections, methods shall be established that will provide the information required. Testing and verification required by this Section shall be performed throughout the commissioning process. Requirements of this Section do not supplant those in related Sections but may expand upon them. The Contractor shall provide all materials, services, and labor required performing the pre-functional checks and functional performance verification. A pre-functional check or functional performance verification shall be aborted if any system deficiency prevents the successful completion of the test or if any non-Owner commissioning team member is not present for the test. After two failed tests, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all Owner costs associated with additional testing. These costs shall include costs for Owner commissioning team members.

1. Pre-Functional Checks: Pre-functional checks shall be performed for the items listed

on the checklists in Appendix A. Deficiencies discovered during these checks shall be corrected and re-tested in accordance with the applicable Contract requirements.

2. Functional Performance Verification: The Contractor shall provide Functional performance

verification for the items listed on the checklists in Appendix B. The Contractor shall provide equipment and system operational tests, failure mode tests, load tests, alarm tests, and control system testing as required by the CA. Functional performance verification shall begin only after all pre-functional checks have been successfully completed. Verifications shall prove all modes of the sequences of operation, and shall verify all other relevant Contract requirements. Verifications shall begin with equipment or components and shall progress through subsystems to complete systems. Upon failure of any functional performance verification checklist item, the Contractor shall correct all deficiencies in accordance with the applicable contract requirements. The checklist shall then be repeated until it has been completed with no errors.

3. Temperature Controls and Automation System: Per Spec 15995 Appendix C.

3.4 COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY PROCEDURES: The Commissioning Authority will perform

systems commissioning following the procedures listed herein, and all members of the Commissioning Team shall cooperate fully with the execution of these procedures. Initial mechanical systems performance verification shall be performed when outdoor air temperatures, for any portion of the day of testing, are either above 80ºF (cooling mode) or below 40ºF (heating mode). If initial performance verification occurs during the cooling mode, subsequent performance verification shall occur during the next heating season; and similarly, if performance verification occurs in the heating season, subsequent performance verification shall be performed during the next cooling season. The subsequent seasonal systems commissioning shall consist of reviewing complete sets of automation system operational histories and follow-up site visits to verify opposite season HVAC systems performance. To achieve mechanical systems commissioning, the Commissioning Authority shall:



A. Attend periodic construction progress meetings and perform unscheduled walks through the building to observe and keep abreast of mechanical systems installation progress, means, and methods. Commissioning Authority's presence at meetings and in the building will be for his benefit in preparing to commission the building and shall in no way be construed as superseding the authority of the project architect/engineers.

B. Review mechanical shop drawings and submittals after approval of the Project

Consulting Mechanical Engineer. The purpose of this review is primarily one of familiarization with equipment to be furnished on the project for on site verification by the Commissioning Authority and in no way relieves the Consulting Mechanical Engineer of his duties or supersedes his authority for shop drawing review. Note: The Contractor may proceed with equipment procurement after receipt of Architect/Engineer approval of mechanical shop drawings and/or submittals.

C. Issue Pre-Functional Check Lists relevant to the project for Contractor monitoring and

verification of installation progress (See Appendix A). Establish milestones in the mechanical system installation at which time interim commissioning status reports will be prepared and issued by the Commissioning Authority.

D. Observe piping system pressure tests, flushing, and cleaning.

E. Observe representative sampling of duct systems, plenums, coils, and filters for cleanliness,

damage, or leakage.

F. Be present to observe the start-up of equipment that is supervised and certified by the equipment manufacturer's authorized representative.

G. Visit the project periodically during testing, adjusting, and balancing of the air and water

systems to observe the actual work being performed, and review the certified reports submitted by the TAB agency.

H. Periodically observe the installation of the automatic temperature controls system: verify

calibration of a representative sampling of sensing devices.

I. Observe the operation of all mechanical equipment listed. Observations shall include exercising equipment/systems their respective control sequences including safeties.

J. Verify the commissioning of the Automatic Temperature and Direct Digital Controls System

by reviewing point histories and by being present during hardware and software punch outs at the facility. The operational and monitoring capabilities of the DDC system will be employed in the commissioning of the mechanical systems. See Appendix C for additional controls system requirements.

K. Review Contractor prepared Operating and Maintenance Manuals and be present during

Mechanical Contractor instructions to the Owner's operating personnel regarding operations and maintenance of the mechanical system.

L. Review Contractor prepared As-Built drawings and all certifications and warranties required

for submission by project specifications.

M. Furnish a written report and recommend acceptance of the mechanical system upon satisfactorily completing the commissioning process. Commissioning Authority’s recommendation to accept mechanical systems shall occur prior to Substantial Completion (i.e. Owner acceptance).

N. Recommendations for approval, when appropriate, will be forwarded to the project

Architect/Engineer for inclusion in their final submission of project close out documentation



to the Owner.

3.5 CONTRACTOR COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES: The Contractor and all relevant Sub- Contractors and vendor technicians shall, in addition to being responsive to the procedures cited for execution by the Commissioning Authority in paragraph titled Commissioning Authority Procedures, perform as follows to achieve satisfactory mechanical systems commissioning. The Contractor shall:

A. Demonstrate the performance and provide full range of operation for each piece of

equipment, and system as listed in the Cx plan and mechanical drawings, to the Commissioning Authority and Owner's Representative when ready. Schedule and coordinate the TAB, Building Management System, Mechanical and other sub-Trade Representatives as may apply to assist with demonstrating performance of all equipment and systems.

B. Evaluations

1. The Owner’s Commissioning Authority shall observe the calibrations and measurements

associated with the functional performance verification of the equipment, systems and control systems identified herein; set the time schedule of functional performance verification; and make any necessary corrective or remedial work recommendations to ensure that the commissioned equipment and systems function as described in the control sequence of operation and perform in accordance with design intent.

2. The relevant subcontractor shall operate all equipment and systems in support of the

commissioning work effort and shall provide all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to allow operational and performance verification of all commissioned equipment and systems.

C. Weather-Dependent Verification Procedures: Weather-dependent performance verification

that cannot be adequately achieved by simulation shall be performed in the appropriate climatic season. When simulation is used, the actual results may also require re-verification in the appropriate season.

D. At a minimum, the performance and operation demonstrations of the following equipment

and/or systems will be required:

1. Generators

2. Synchronizing Switchgear

3. RTU-1

4. Fans

5. Dampers

6. Fueling System including day tanks, transfer pumps, and controls

7. Automatic Temperature Controls

8. Direct Digital Control System

E. Sampling techniques shall be employed for performance verification of multiple identical

pieces of equipment/systems. On this project, identical equipment includes: NONE. Performances of all such equipment/systems shall be verified via review of TAB report and automation systems trends, field verification shall be performed for 10-20% of each type of identical pieces of equipment/systems. Commissioning Authority’s selection of sample equipment/systems to be field verified shall be guided by performances demonstrated in TAB report and trends. Note that sampling technique does not apply to pre-functional



verification.

F. The Contractor shall repeat any measurement contained in the TAB report where required by the Commissioning Authority for verification or diagnostic purposes.

G. Should any performance verification reveal operation or performance not in accordance

Contract Documents, the Contractor shall rectify the deficiency, and re-testing shall be performed. Should operation or performance still not be as specified on the retest due to Contractor’s work, the time and expenses of the Commissioning Authority to make further re-inspections shall be considered as additional cost to the Owner. The total sum of such costs shall be deducted from the final payment to the Contractor.

3.6 ISSUES RESOLUTION:

A. During the commissioning process, the Commissioning Authority may identify issues that

require corrective action. The Commissioning Authority has no authority to dictate ways and means of issues resolution other than enforcing the dictates of Contract Documents. Resolution of issues to be compliant with Contract Documents resides with the Contractor. Resolution of issues that require interpretations or modifications to the Contract Documents shall be the responsibility of the Architect/Engineers. Project completion date shall not be delayed due to lack of timely issues resolution unless authorized contract extensions have been executed.

B. Written responses shall be made to issues reported by the Commissioning Authority. The

Commissioning Authority shall provide status reports and issues logs as deemed appropriate during the commissioning process with original provided to Owner and copies to the Contractor, and Architect/Engineer. The Contractor and/or Architect/Engineer shall provide the Owner with a written response to each issue cited by the Commissioning Authority as to corrective actions implemented. The written response shall be provided to the Owner within a maximum of two (2) weeks of the issue date of the Commissioning Authority's issues; faster resolution of issues shall be performed as required to maintain project schedule and to avoid project delay. Copies of all responses shall be provided to the Commissioning Authority, Contractor, and Architect/Engineer. Issues that have not been fully resolved within the two week period shall be noted as such with explanation of intended resolution; and subsequent status reports of the continued issue resolution shall be made in writing at two week intervals until such time as the issue has been fully rectified. The Owner reserves the right to withhold partial payment for construction contract or professional services until satisfactory resolution of mechanical issues have been documented and verified.

3.7 SATISFACTORY COMPLETION: The Contractor's personnel shall be made available to

execute all aspects of the commissioning process until the Owner accepts final results. Commissioning tasks and meetings may be repeated until the Owner is satisfied and will not be fixed as one-time, one-chance events for the Contractor.

3.8 PHASING OF CONSTRUCTION AND COMMISSIONING: Where project completion is

performed in stages, the commissioning plan will take into account the staged start-up of each phase as shown on the Contract Documents.

3.9 CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS:

A. Close out documents, consisting of but not limited to As-Built Drawings, Certificates of

Inspections, and transmittals documenting delivery of spare parts, submitted to the Architect/Engineer shall be copied to the Commissioning Authority for concurrent review.

B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted for Architect/Engineer review and

approval well before any equipment/systems demonstrations or training occur; a minimum



of eight (8) weeks before Substantial Completion. The approved O&M Manuals shall be employed during demonstrations and training.


A. Demonstrations and training shall be responsive to the requirements of Division 15

specification sections. Contractor shall provide schedule for demonstration and training of Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Preliminary schedule shall be prepared and submitted along with O&M Manuals review submittal and shall be honed after O&M Manuals have been approved. Final demonstration and training schedule shall provide specific dates, times, and subject matter and shall be re-submitted at least four (4) weeks prior to any demonstrations/training occurring to allow for review, approval, notification, and coordination. Demonstrations and training shall be completed before Substantial Completion.

B. The commissioning Authority shall be present at all sessions to observe the demonstrations/training and to contribute as the Authority may deem appropriate.

3.11 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION AND REPORTS

A. The Contractor shall document all commissioning tests and submit copies of all test results and reports to the CA and OR. The documents shall confirm operational readiness or separately list issues observed or discovered requiring correction. The documents shall be distributed to Commissioning Team members.

B. The Commissioning Authority shall prepare a final formal report to the Owner that will

include a narrative in the form of an Executive Summary of the results of commissioning process, impressions of the demonstration and training sessions, and a certification that the verification of each item is complete and all systems are operating as intended.



COMMISSIONING APPENDICIES

Appendix A: Pre-Functional Checklists

System / Equipment

1. Generators 2. Synchronizing Switchgear 3. RTU-1 4. Fans 5. Dampers 6. Fueling System including day tanks, transfer pumps, and controls 7. Automatic Temperature Controls 8. Direct Digital Control System

NOTE: Checklists for the complete project will be provided during Construction Period after all the submittals have been approved. Pre-functional checklists will be provided by the CA. Items on the checklists will include, but not be limited to:

1. Manufacturer’s start-up complete 2. All mechanical and electrical connections complete and verified 3. All TAB procedures complete 4. Automatic controls (BMS) work complete 5. Alarms functioning and verified 6. Supporting sub-systems and equipment ready and operational



Appendix B: Functional Performance Verification

System / Equipment

1. Generators 2. Synchronizing Switchgear 3. RTU-1 4. Fans 5. Dampers 6. Fueling System including day tanks, transfer pumps, and controls 7. Automatic Temperature Controls 8. Direct Digital Control System

NOTE: Checklists and commissioning scr ipts for the complete project Func t iona l Per fo rmance Ver i f i ca t ion will be provided by the CA during Construction Period after all the submittals have been approved. Items on the checklists (scripts) will include, but not be limited to:

1. Pre-Functional checklist complete and verified 2. Occupied (normal) operation 3. Unoccupied (standby) operation 4. Emergency operation 5. Failure mode testing 6. Alarms and safeties functioning and verified 7. Automatic temperature controls and BMS interface 8. Fire alarm interface



BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16010 - 1

SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work under this Division shall consist of all labor, materials, equipment, services and related accessories, etc., necessary and required to complete all work as shown or inferred on the Drawings and in the Specifications (Contract Documents).

B. Provide fixed electrical equipment, except where specifically noted otherwise.

C. Provide portable electrical equipment for the complete system(s).

D. Provide equipment and/or wiring normally furnished or required for complete electrical systems but not specifically specified on the drawings and/or in specifications, as though specified by both.

E. All equipment and wiring shall be new, except where specifically shown or specified otherwise.

F. This Section includes the following:

1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Electrical demolition. 3. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 4. Touchup painting.

1.2 Work Included In This Division

A. Electrical work includes, but is not limited to:

1. Alterations and additions to existing electrical systems. 2. Connection of all appliances and equipment.

1.3 Work Not Included In This Division (Refer to other divisions of these specifications)

A. Installation of motors except where specifically noted. See Division 15.

B. Control wiring for mechanical systems, except where specifically indicated to be provided by Electrical Contractor. See Division 15 drawings and specifications.

1.4 REFERENCES

NEC: National Electrical Code (latest edition adopted by local authorities unless otherwise noted).

NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.

OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration.



UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association.

IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.

ACI: American Concrete Institute.

ADA: American Disabilities Act.

ANSI: American National Standards Institutes.

ASTM: American Society for Testing Materials.

AWS: American Welding Society.

FM: Factory Mutual Insurance Association.

IES: Illumination Engineering Society.

ISA: Instrument Society of America.

NACE: National Association of Corrosion Engineers.

NETA: International Electrical Testing Association.

UL: Underwriters Laboratories.

NECA: National Electrical Contractors Association

NETA: National Electrical Testing Association.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Provide: Furnish, install connect, and test until complete.

B. Wire: Furnish all necessary wiring, connect, and test until complete.

C. Install: Furnish, set in place, wire, connect, and test until complete

D. Work: Materials completely installed, connected, and tested until complete

E. AWG: American Wire Gauge

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to specific sections for submittal requirements.




A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled for the intended use as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7 and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 and the Local Electrical Code.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.

B. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces.

C. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. All equipment, materials and workmanship shall be guaranteed against defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance.

B. During the warranty period, Contractor shall repair or replace defective materials and/or equipment or corrective defective workmanship at no cost to the owner.

1.10 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Obtain and pay for all permits and inspections required for the work. Comply with all ordinances pertaining to work described herein. Pay all expenses arising from the procurement of these certificates and included in the base Contract Price.

B. Install work under this Division per drawings, specifications, latest adopted edition of the National Electrical Code, (NFPA-70) including local amendments and interpretations, Local adopted Building Codes, and any special codes having jurisdiction over specific portions of work within complete installation. In event of conflict, install work per most stringent code requirements determined by Consultant.

C. Arrange, pay fees for and complete work to pass required tests by agencies having authority over work. Deliver to Consultant copies of the Certificates of Inspection and approval issued by authorities and provide original copy of each certificate to County project manager.

D. The Contractor shall not allow or cause any of the work to be covered up or enclosed until the Consultant or the County Project manager has been notified and given reasonable opportunity to review the work. When required by law or regulations, the governmental agency having jurisdiction for inspections shall be given reasonable notice and opportunity to inspect the work. Any work that is enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test shall be uncovered at the Contractor’s expense; after it has been inspected, the Contractor shall restore the work to its original condition at his own expense.



E. Qualifications Of Contractor

1. These qualifications apply to Sub-Contractors. 2. Contractor to use workmen experienced in their respective trade. 3. Superintendent for work under this division shall have minimum ten (10) years

experience and shall have worked on substantial projects in Telecommunication Buildings. Submit qualifications of Superintendent for review.

4. Fairfax county reserves the right to reject bid of any Contractor failing to meet these qualifications.

F. Drawings And Specifications

1. Electrical work is shown on drawings, indicated and listed "Electrical" inclusive. Follow any supplementary drawings as though listed above.

2. Drawings and specifications are complementary. Work called for by one is binding as if called for by both. Any discrepancies between drawings and specifications shall be brought to the attention of the Consultant for clarification during the bidding period. No allowance shall subsequently be made to the Contractor by reason of his failure to have brought said discrepancies to the attention of the Consultant during the bidding period or by reason of any error on the Contractor’s part.

3. Drawings show general run of circuits and approximate location of equipment. The contractor shall review drawings of all trades to assure coordination prior to placement of work. Right is reserved to change location of equipment and devices, and routing of conduits within 10 feet, without extra cost to the county.

4. Use dimensions in figures, shop drawings, etc. and actual site measurements in preference to scaled dimensions. Do not scale drawings for exact sizes or locations.

5. Layout equipment as shown on drawings as close as possible. Verify access requirements for equipment actually furnished, and adjust layout to comply with NEC 110. Right is reserved to change layout within 10 feet without additional cost.

6. Execution of Contract is evidence that Contractor has examined all existing conditions, drawings and specifications related to work, and is informed to extent and character of work. Later claims for labor and materials required due to difficulties encountered, which could have been foreseen had examination been made, will not be recognized.

7. No attempt has been made to establish the required sections or splits of equipment relative to the size of access into the space, building, etc. Contractor shall establish all said splits, sections, etc. necessary to install equipment complete without undue disassembly of equipment or demolition of building parts at site of work.

8. Charges for extra work are not allowed unless work is authorized by written order from the County project manager approving charges for work.

9. Check all door swings so light switches are not located behind doors. Relocate switches as required with the Consultant’s review.

1.11 MATERIALS

A. All material shall be new, and have a UL label where available. If UL label is not available, material shall be manufactured in accordance with applicable NEMA, IEEE and Federal Standards. Use UL labeled components in assemblies that do not have overall UL label. All equipment shall comply with the terms “listed and labeled” as defined in the NEC 70, Article 100. Submit letter stating compliance with these requirements.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel, UON.

C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch-diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs.

1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.

D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers.

E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.

H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

I. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.

2.2 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Concrete: 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

2.3 TOUCHUP PAINT

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.

B. For Nonequipment Surfaces: Matching type and color of undamaged, existing adjacent finish.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VISIT TO SITE

A. Visit site, and survey existing conditions affecting work prior to bid. Include necessary materials and labor to accomplish the electrical work, including relocation of existing services and utilities



on building site in bid. No consideration shall be given to future claims due to existing conditions. Any discrepancies or interference’s shall be reported immediately to the County project manager.

3.2 WORKMANSHIP

A. All work performed shall be first class work in every aspect. The work shall be performed by mechanics skilled in their respective trades, who shall at all times be under the supervision of competent persons. All work shall be installed to comply with NECA’s “Standard of Installation.”

B. Work under this Division shall be first class with emphasis on neatness and workmanship. All work shall be installed square and plumb and concealed where possible. Work that is deficient, defective, poorly laid out, not perfectly aligned, or that is not consistent with the requirements generally accepted in the trade for “first class work” will not be acceptable.

C. In addition to the materials specified elsewhere, furnish and install all other miscellaneous items necessary for the completion of the work to the extent that all systems are complete and operative.

D. All work under this Section shall be performed in cooperation with the work performed under all other Sections of the Specifications for the Project in order to avoid interference with other work and to secure the proper installation of all work. Refer the Drawings and Specifications covering the work to be performed under all Sections, so that the relation and extent of the work of this Section with respect to the work of all other Sections is understood. Give right of way to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

E. Install work using competent mechanics, under supervision of foreman, all duly certified by local authorities. The installation shall be subject to Fairfax County and the Consultant’s constant observation, and final acceptance. The Fairfax County Project Manager and the Consultant may reject unsuitable work.

F. Conduit systems must be complete prior to installation of wiring.

3.3 GUARANTEE

A. Furnish a written guarantee, stating that if workmanship and/or material executed under this Division are proven defective within one (1) year after final acceptance by Fairfax County, such defects and other work damaged will be repaired and/or replaced. Submit with Operations and Maintenance Manuals.

B. Obtain from the various manufacturer’s or vendor's guarantees or warranties for their particular equipment or components, and deliver them to Fairfax County. All guarantees and warranties provided shall be referenced to this project.

C. In event that systems are placed in operation in several phases at Fairfax County’s Project Manager's request, guarantee will begin on date each system or item of equipment is accepted for service by Fairfax County. Provide O&M manuals for all equipment when equipment is accepted for service by Fairfax County.

D. All guarantees and warranties shall include labor and material at the site of installation for the duration of the guarantee period.



3.4 OBSERVATIONS OF WORK AND DEMONSTRATION OF OPERATION (acceptance)

A. At all observations of work, open panel covers, junction box covers, pull box covers, device covers, and other equipment with removable plates for observation. Provide sufficient personnel to expedite cover removal and replacement.

B. Contractor to demonstrate operation of new equipment and/or systems to satisfaction of the Fairfax County project manager. Contractor to have manufacturer available for demonstration of equipment and/or systems where requested by Fairfax County’s Project Manager.

3.5 TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Test Completed work as follows:

1. Perform tests required as defined in the document to indicate compliance with specifications, drawings, standards and applicable codes. Provide sufficient instruments, labor, technical support and materials for performing these tests. Tests shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Consultant and FAIRFAX COUNTY’S PROJECT MANAGER.. One-week prior notice of testing required.

2. Insulation - use 1000 VDC insulation tester (0-2000 megohm full-scale), equivalent to "Megger" as manufactured by Biddle Company. Test conductors and busses of all systems, including feeders, main service busway, branches, motors, devices, equipment, etc. Test branches for one (1) minute; test feeders, bus ducts, busses, etc., for one (1) minute with readings at one minute intervals.

3. Receptacles: Use Woodhead Ground Loop Impedance Tester. Test each receptacle. Record readings.

B. Record all test results in loose-leaf three ring notebooks for Fairfax County. Test information required: Date of test; name of circuit or equipment; ambient temperature; weather conditions; final instrument readings; graph of readings for 15 minutes tests. Provide three copies of log. At completion of all tests, original test data shall be given to the Fairfax County Project manager at the conclusion of each test.

3.6 COOPERATION

A. Provide necessary information to other trades including Shop Drawings, Product Data and all other required data.

B. Whenever such information is not provided in a timely manner or whenever such information is incorrect, this contractor shall bear all costs for providing or correcting affected work of related trades with no change to the Contract Price or Construction Schedule.

C. Fairfax County has the right to perform work in building concurrently with other contractors. Cooperation with the County is required to complete work of all contractors.

D. Work to be installed as progress of project will allow. Schedule of work determined by General Contractor, Fairfax County project manager and/or Consultant.

3.7 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.



B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.

D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

E. Comply with National Electrical Code requirements in general, 6'6" headroom, 36" in front of 120 Vac equipment, and 42" in front of 480 Vac (to ground) equipment..

3.8 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components.

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.

C. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200-lb design load.

3.9 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selecting and installing supports.

B. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.

C. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

D. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.

E. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future.

F. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.

G. Install 1/4-inch- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.

I. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.

J. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.



K. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.

L. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.

M. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.

N. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated:

1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails. 2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry

units. 3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts. 4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts. 5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with

lock washers may be used in existing concrete. 6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.

a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or other items.

8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws. 9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its

proof-test load.

3.10 Conduit Bends

A. Field bends or offsets are permitted in 1" and smaller conduit only.

B. Elbows in 1 1/4" conduit and larger sizes shall be factory made, or use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender.

3.11 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section "Firestopping."

3.12 DEMOLITION

A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality.



B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in their entirety.

C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish.

D. Remove demolished material from Project site.

E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relocation.

3.13 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger, in both directions, than supported unit.

1. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Pads shall have 1" x 45 chamfered edges, and shall extend 4" beyond equipment mountings.

3. Equipment pads that attach to existing equipment for a continuous line-up shall match existing pad elevations.

4. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING FOR ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

3.15 PROTECTING

A. Provide warning lights, bracing, shoring, rails, guards and covers necessary to prevent damage or injury. All persons working around electrical equipment shall have electrical shock and flash protection per OSHA 1910.301-309 & 331-335.

B. Do not leave exposed or unprotected, electrical items carrying current. Protect visitors and workers from exposure to contact with electrically energized surfaces, parts, etc. in accordance with OSHA standards.

C. Exercise particular care when working around telephone equipment to prevent entrance of dust, moisture and debris into the equipment. Provide dust barriers and partitions as required.

D. Protect all telephone equipment at all times.

E. No smoking is allowed in the Buildings.



F. Avoid walking between aisles of equipment. When available, walk on the aisle with the front side of the equipment, and avoid contact with any components.

G. When working above active equipment, no cutting, drilling, trimming, or filing is permitted without dust protection against particles falling into equipment and physical protection against debris, material and tools dropping on the equipment.

H. Do not walk on equipment cables. When it is unavoidable to step or stand on the cables, provide plywood or other acceptable physical protection over the cables as approved by the local operations manager.

I. Do all unpacking, cutting, drilling and other preparatory work in areas outside the room or within dust barriers. Sweep, mop or vacuum clean work area when required but at least daily and more often when creating significant amounts of dust as determined by local operations manager.


A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:

1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Electrical identification. 3. Concrete bases. 4. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 5. Touchup painting.

3.17 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.

B. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats.

C. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

D. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

3.18 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver equipment and materials to job site in original, unopened, labeled container. Products shall be properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels and other information needed for identification. Store to prevent damage and injury. Store materials to prevent corroding. Store finished materials and equipment to prevent staining and discoloring. Store materials affected by condensation in warm dry areas. Provide heaters. Contractor shall verify the availability of on site storage space in building with FAIRFAX COUNTY’S PROJECT MANAGER., if no on site storage space is available then the contractor shall cover the cost for off site storage. Materials stored at the project site that becomes soiled with construction dirt, concrete, or moisture shall be removed from the site and replaced with new. Do not install soiled material.



B. Protect work and materials from damage by weather, entrance of water or dirt. Cap and mark conduit during installation.

C. Avoid damage to materials and equipment in place. Repair, or remove and replace damaged work and materials.

D. Protection and safekeeping of products stored on premises is responsibility of Contractor supplying products.

E. Schedule of deliveries and unloading to prevent traffic congestion blocking of access or interference with work. Arrange deliveries to avoid larger accumulations of materials than can be suitably stored at site.

F. Install equipment per manufacturer's recommendations. Conflicts between contract documents and these recommendations shall be referred to Consultant for remedy.

3.19 ANCHORS

A. Provide anchors for all equipment, raceways, hangers, etc. to safely support weight of item involved plus 100% for dead loads. Live loads shall be considered in addition to dead loads.

B. Anchors to consist of expansion type devices similar to "Redhead" or lead expansion anchors. Plastic anchors are not acceptable. Protect telephone equipment from drilling residue. Powder actuated "shot" type anchors are not allowed.

C. Use preset anchor steel inserts in concrete slabs. Provide preset anchor size and type for anticipated or specified rod/bolt size and live/dead load.


A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris from site daily.

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Touch-up or re-paint damaged painted finishes as determined by Fairfax County’s Project Manager./Consultant.

3.21 CONTROL WIRING

A. A. Control Wiring including low voltage and line voltage interlock wiring will be furnished and installed under Division 15, except where specifically shown otherwise. Carefully coordinate power and control wiring interface.

3.22 SPARE PARTS

A. Where spare parts are specified in the Technical Sections, furnish spare parts to Fairfax County Project Manager with itemized receipt. Contractor is responsible to deliver parts and have receipt signed by Fairfax County’s representative. Turn over receipt with as-built documents..



3.23 TRAINING:

A. Training for operation and maintenance of new systems or modifications to existing systems is specified in Technical sections. Contractor shall submit with as-built documents an itemized receipt signed by a Fairfax County Project Manager Representative that all specified training has been received.

3.24 SAFETY AND LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURES:

A. Safety of all personnel during work performed is the responsibility of the Contractor. Working on and around electrical equipment and circuits requires more than normal precautions. Obtain checklist for lockout and tagout of all energy driven equipment from Architect/Engineer prior to construction. This and all Contractors shall follow these procedures.

3.25 RESTRICTIONS: NEW AND EXISTING FACILITIES

A. No two way radios, cellular phones, or similar communications transmission devices shall be used and/or keyed within a working equipment room.

3.26 ACCESS PANELS:

A. The contractor shall furnish all access panels for walls, partitions, etc., and shall give access panel to the General Contractor for installation at locations as directed by the Electrical Contractor. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor that access panels are provided for access to all boxes, bus joints, equipment, etc., which may be concealed by building construction to comply with the NEC and NFPA. Access panels shall be installed so as not to interfere with lighting arrangements. All access panels shall be Milcor having factory prime coat finish. Use style "B" for lath and plaster surfaces, style "M" for brick surfaces, style "A" for acoustic ceilings. Use fire rated access door where required in fire rated walls. Access panels shall be 12 inches by 16 inches, except where used in acoustic ceilings which size shall be either 12" x 12" or 12" x 24", as directed by the Consultant.



OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 16055 - 1

SECTION 16055 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes computer-based, overcurrent protective device coordination studies to determine overcurrent protective devices and to determine overcurrent protective device settings for selective tripping.

1. Study results shall be used to determine coordination of series-rated devices. 2. Study will be performed immediately on contract award for submission to Fairfax County

(FMD) with switchgear submittal for approval. Report will be in a format acceptable to FMD.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein.

C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion from the system.

D. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served.


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Study and equipment evaluation reports.



3. Overcurrent protective device coordination study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.


A. Product Certificates: For overcurrent protective device coordination study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the overcurrent protective devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. The following parts from the Protective Device Coordination Study Report:

1) One-line diagram. 2) Protective device coordination study. 3) Time-current coordination curves.

b. Power system data.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

B. Coordination Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development Professional certification.

C. Coordination Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide software by the following:

1. ESA Inc. 2. Power Analytics, Corporation. 3. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

B. Comply with IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.

C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

D. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

1. Optional Features:

a. Arcing faults. b. Simultaneous faults. c. Explicit negative sequence. d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.

2.2 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY REPORT CONTENTS

A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

C. One-line diagram, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.

D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.

E. Short-Circuit Study:

1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Equivalent impedance.



2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:

1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio. 2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6. 3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.

3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance.

F. Protective Device Coordination Study:

1. Report recommended settings of protective devices, ready to be applied in the field. Use manufacturer's data sheets for recording the recommended setting of overcurrent protective devices when available.

a. Phase and Ground Relays:

1) Device tag. 2) Relay current transformer ratio and tap, time dial, and instantaneous pickup

value. 3) Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable.

b. Circuit Breakers:

1) Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground). 2) Adjustable time-current characteristic. 3) Adjustable instantaneous pickup. 4) Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.

c. Fuses: Show current rating, voltage, and class.

G. Time-Current Coordination Curves: Determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:

1. Device tag and title, one-line diagram with legend identifying the portion of the system covered.

2. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed.

3. Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.

4. Plot the following listed characteristic curves, as applicable:

a. Low-voltage equipment circuit-breaker trip devices, including manufacturer's tolerance bands.

b. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI through-fault protection curves.

c. Cables and conductors damage curves.



d. Ground-fault protective devices. e. Motor-starting characteristics and motor damage points. f. Generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point. g. The largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor-control center and panelboard.

5. Series rating on equipment allows the application of two series interrupting devices for a condition where the available fault current is greater than the interrupting rating of the downstream equipment. Both devices share in the interruption of the fault and selectivity is sacrificed at high fault levels. Maintain selectivity for tripping currents caused by overloads.

6. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is achieved.

7. Comments and recommendations for system improvements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. Comply with IEEE 242 for calculating short-circuit currents and determining coordination time intervals.

B. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

C. The study shall be based on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.

D. The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is limited to the Data Center power distribution system as indicated on Drawing E2.

E. Begin analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as follows:

1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less. 2. Exclude equipment rated 240-V ac or less when supplied by a single transformer rated

less than 125 kVA.

F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

G. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Inrush current when first energized.



b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is specified for that transformer.

c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by unusual loading or emergency conditions.

2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.

H. Motor Protection:

1. Select protection for low-voltage motors according to IEEE 242 and NFPA 70. 2. Select protection for motors served at voltages more than 600 V according to IEEE 620.

I. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and protection recommendations in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

J. Generator Protection: Select protection according to manufacturer's written recommendations and to IEEE 242.

K. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.

1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

L. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and single line-to-ground fault at each of the following:

1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 2. Low-voltage switchgear. 3. Motor-control centers. 4. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches. 5. Branch circuit panelboards. 6. 480V and above enclosed circuit breakers and disconnect switches.

M. Protective Device Evaluation:

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings. 2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor-control centers, and panelboard bus bars to withstand

short-circuit stresses. 3. Any application of series-rated devices shall be recertified, complying with requirements

in NFPA 70.

3.3 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the overcurrent protective device study.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied in the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call discrepancies to the attention of Architect.

2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.



3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and engineers. The qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be qualified as defined by NFPA 70E.

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. The list below is a guide. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 241 and IEEE 551 for the amount of detail required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. Short-circuit current at each system bus, three phase and line-to-ground. 5. Full-load current of all loads. 6. Voltage level at each bus. 7. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift. 8. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and

impedance. 9. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.

10. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

11. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.

12. Maximum demands from service meters. 13. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 14. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, and conduit material

(magnetic or nonmagnetic). 15. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with

tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability.

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve.

d. Generator thermal-damage curve. e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company. g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere

or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.



j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and SCCR in amperes rms symmetrical.

k. Identify series-rated interrupting devices for a condition where the available fault current is greater than the interrupting rating of the downstream equipment. Obtain device data details to allow verification that series application of these devices complies with NFPA 70 and UL 489 requirements.

l. Arc Flash protection requirements using data collected in 3.3.B tabular results.

C. Coordinate the data collection and computed settings listed in paragraph 3.3.B with Section 16056, “Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study.”

3.4 FIELD ADJUSTING

A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings provided by the coordination study. Field adjustments shall be completed by the engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.

B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-circuit and protective device coordination studies.

C. Testing and adjusting shall be by a full-time employee of the Field Adjusting Agency, who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for all adjustable overcurrent protective devices.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage the Coordination Study Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the following:

1. Acquaint personnel in the fundamentals of operating the power system in normal and emergency modes.

2. Hand-out and explain the objectives of the coordination study, study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpreting the time-current coordination curves.

3. Adjust, operate, and maintain overcurrent protective device settings.



OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY 16056 - 1

SECTION 16056 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical equipment for all existing and proposed electrical equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein.

C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion from the system.

D. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served.


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: Provide the following submittals after the approval of system protective devices submittals.

1. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.




A. Qualification Data: For Arc-Flash Study Specialist.

B. Product Certificates: For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.


A. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," provide maintenance procedures for use by Owner's personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

B. Arc-Flash Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development Professional certification.

C. Arc-Flash Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study, analyzing the arc flash, and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.

D. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide software by one of the following software developers offering software that may be used for the Work:

1. ESA Inc. 2. Power Analytics, Corporation. 3. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

B. Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.



C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

2.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENT

A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope.

C. One-line diagram, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center and panelboard designations.

D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.

E. Short-Circuit Study Output:

1. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical

basis.

F. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations:

1. Arcing fault magnitude. 2. Protective device clearing time. 3. Duration of arc. 4. Arc-flash boundary. 5. Working distance. 6. Incident energy. 7. Hazard risk category. 8. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction.

G. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

2.3 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification." Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch (76-by-127-mm) thermal transfer label of high-adhesion polyester for each work location included in the analysis. Provide labels for new and existing switchboards, panelboards and distribution systems.



B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard analysis:

1. Location designation. 2. Nominal voltage. 3. Flash protection boundary. 4. Hazard risk category. 5. Incident energy. 6. Working distance. 7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study.

3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.

B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.

C. Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer and obtained from nameplates of existing devices in the field.

D. The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is limited to the Data Center power distribution system as indicated on Drawing E2.

E. Begin analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as follows:

1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less. 2. Equipment rated 240-V ac or less may be excluded when supplied by a single

transformer rated less than 125 kVA.

F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

G. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems.

H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and single line-to-ground fault at each of the following:

1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 2. Low-voltage switchboard. 3. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.



4. Branch circuit panelboards.

3.3 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study.

B. Use the short-circuit study output and the field-verified settings of the overcurrent devices.

C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size.

1. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume no motor load.

2. The maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.

D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in the electrical distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.

E. Include medium- and low-voltage equipment locations, except 240-V ac and 208-V ac systems fed from transformers less than 125 kVA.

F. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based on the calculated arc-flash boundary, considering incident energy of 1.2 cal/sq.cm.

G. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as follows:

1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond three to five cycles.

2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles).

H. Arc-flash computation shall include both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows:

1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure. 2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location.

I. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.

3.4 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call discrepancies to the attention of Architect.

2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.

3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and engineers.



B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study.

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in per cent, and phase shift. 5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and

impedance. 6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.

7. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

8. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.

9. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and conductor material.

10. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 11. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material

(magnetic or nonmagnetic). 12. Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, and cable construction and

metallic shield performance parameters.

3.5 LABELING

A. Apply a nominal 4” by 6” arc-flash label for each existing and proposed 480-V ac, and applicable 208-V ac switchboard, panelboard, transfer switch and disconnect switch. Labels will include:

1. Hazard Risk Category 2. Incident energy (cal/cm2) with distance 3. Arc Flash Boundary 4. PPE requirement with description.



GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16060 - 1

SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.

B. Grounding and bonding is substantially existing in the work. Maintain existing and as indicated herein.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in

diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-

5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16060 - 2

C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar in main electric room.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Receptacle circuits. 3. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 4. Flexible raceway runs. 5. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Ground to Structural Steel: Remove insulation and clean bare metal directly beaneatht eh grounding clamp. Repair insulation to original condition.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

16073 - 1

SECTION 16073 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to

MFMA-4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.



16073 - 2

D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 6) <Insert manufacturer's name>.

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT and IMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.



16073 - 3

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts.

6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




16073 - 4



ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 1

SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Equipment identification labels.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2.4 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7

MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways for Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in pull and junction boxes use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.



D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

E. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Switchboards. b. Panelboards. c. Panelboard Directory: Typewritten directory of circuits in a metal holder with clear

plastic coverer. Provide typewritten revised schedule for all existing panelboards modified during construction.

d. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. e. Transformers f. Enclosed switches. g. Enclosed circuit breakers. h. Enclosed controllers. i. Contactors.

F. Arc-Flash Warning Labels: Provide arc flash warning labels as detailed in Section 16056, “Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study” paragraphs 2.3 and 3.5.



CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 1

SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. General Conditions of the Contract, including Special Provisions shall apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 4. Southwire Company.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for armored cable, Type AC and metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire.



2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed and Concealed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Class 1 and 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Accessible Ceiling or in existing Walls and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC, or Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

B. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

C. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

D. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

E. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."



3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.



RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 1

SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

C. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 4. Maverick Tube Corporation. 5. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 6. PDU Cables, a division of Engineered Products, Inc.; 7. Wheatland Tube Company.



B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Fittings for EMT: Set screw or compression type as indicated.

G. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 METAL WIREWAYS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1 or 3R, as indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type or as indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Hoffman. 4. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 6. PDU Cables, a division of Engineered Products, Inc. 7. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 8. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 9. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 10. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.



C. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

D. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

E. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

F. Under Raised Floor, Technology Equipment: LFMC, junction box and receptacle listed as UL478 assembly. Provide with factory applied colored to cable, box and receptacle as indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT with compression fittings. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes raceways in

equipment rooms less than 6’ above finished floor. 3. Branch Circuits Concealed in Accessible Ceilings or Existing Walls and Partitions: EMT,

AC cable, or MC.cable. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Exposed Connections to Existing Equipment, 60” Above Finished Floor: FMC, in lengths not to exceed 48 inches..

6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit or LFMC for lengths less than 10 feet. 7. Boxes and Enclosures not below raised floor: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250,

Type 4, stainless steel in wet locations. 8. Generator Critical Operations Feeders over 50 amps: Rigid steel conduit.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.



2. EMT: Use compression for sizes 2” and above. Use either compression or set screw type fittings for sizes 1-1/2” and and below

3. Cast fittings are not permitted.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

C. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

D. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run.

E. Conceal conduit, EMT, and cable within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

G. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire.

H. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where conduits pass from the exterior of the building to the interior. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

I. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 60 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. Use a maximum of 60 inches of flexible conduit for connection to existing equipment greater than 60” AFF.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

3.3 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install pipe sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.



D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

E. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

F. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

G. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

H. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

I. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

J. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

K. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.



PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - 1

SECTION 16231 - PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged diesel-engine generator sets with the following features and accessories:

1. Diesel engine. 2. Belly day Tank 3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring. 4. Battery charger. 5. Engine-generator set. 6. Muffler. 7. Exhaust piping external to set. 8. Remote annunciator. 9. Starting battery.


1. Division 15 Section "Fuel Oil Piping" for fuel supply connection requirements. 2. Division 16 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and

relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.

B. Steady-State Voltage Modulation: The uniform cyclical variation of voltage within the operational bandwidth, expressed in Hertz or cycles per second.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include the following:

1. Data on features, components, accessories ratings, and performance. 2. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine generator set, enclosure and

other components specified. 3. Thermal damage curve for generator. 4. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.




1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other components specified.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights.


C. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer.

D. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report.

E. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not identical, to those tested on prototype unit.

F. Test Reports:

1. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements.

2. Report of sound generation. 3. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Certification of Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedure," include the following:

1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at the Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.

I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer who has regularly engaged in the manufacture systems of similar size and complexity for the past ten (10) years and who has maintained, within 50 miles (40 km) of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs for the past 25 years. The supplier shall have on staff in the local office, technicians trained in the generator set and the paralleling switchgear.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets, paralleling switchgear (Section 16435), and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer will assume single source responsibility for the manufacture of the engine, alternator, controls and the paralleling switchgear.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of packaged generator sets and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."



D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX for welding exhaust-system piping.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

F. Comply with NFPA 30, "Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code," NFPA 31, "Installation of Oil Burning Equipment," and NFPA 37, “Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines” for fuel oil piping materials, components, installations, inspection, and testing.

G. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 2 emergency power supply system.

H. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Maintenance agreements shall include parts and supplies as used in manufacture and installation of original equipment.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify County Project Manager no fewer than ten days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. Do not proceed without written approval.

2. All interruptions of electrical service will occur over night or on Sunday.

B. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C. 2. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet (300 m).

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of generator, day tank, piping, valves, and accessories.



1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel oil day tanks that fail in materials or workmanship for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements and the space limitations , provide a generator manufactured by Cummins Power Generation or a comparable product by Caterpillar; Engine Div.

2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A. Packaged engine-generator set shall be a coordinated assembly of compatible components.

B. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.

C. Output Connections: 480/277Y, three-phase, four-wire.

D. Safety Standard: Comply with ASME B15.1.

E. Limiting dimensions indicated on drawings for system components may not be exceeded. Coordination of floor access with structural framing of enclosure and roof is critical.

F. Nameplates: Each major system component shall be equipped with a nameplate to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial number of component.

G. Mounting Frame: Adequate strength and rigidity to maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation. Mounting frame shall be free from sharp edges and corners and shall have lifting attachments arranged for lifting with slings without damaging components.

1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of gravity.

2.3 GENERATOR-SET PERFORMANCE

A. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: +/-2 percent of rated output voltage for any constant load from no load to full load.

B. Steady-State Voltage Modulation Frequency: Frequency modulation shall be (Electronic Govenor Standard) from steady state no load to steady state full load. Random frequency variation with any steady state load shall not exceed +/-0.25%.

C. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within two seconds.



D. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.25 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.

E. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

F. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for a 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds.

G. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. The telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

H. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, the system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components.

I. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.

J. Excitation system performance shall be unaffected by voltage distortion caused linear load.

2.4 ENGINE


B. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2, low sulfur.

C. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

D. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm (11.4 m/s).

E. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. A positive displacement, geared type, full pressure, lube oil pump driven from the engine crankshaft shall be provide to provide a\oil to all moving parts under pressure.

2. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow.

3. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

4. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

F. Engine Fuel System:

1. Main Fuel Pump: Engine driven, mechanical, positive displacement pump to ensure adequate primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions.

2. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source.

G. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.



H. Governor: Adjustable electronic isochronous, with speed sensing to maintain constant speed +/- ¼%.

I. Air Intake Filter: A replaceable dry element air filter cleaner with restriction indicator shall be provided

2.5 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

A. Description: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine generator-set skid and integral engine-driven coolant pump.

B. Radiator: Rated for specified coolant.

C. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

D. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and equipped with gage glass and petcock.

E. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

F. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.

1. Rating: 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum working pressure with 180 deg F (82 deg C) coolant, and noncollapsible under vacuum.

2. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections.

2.6 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM


2.7 FUEL OIL DAY TANKS


1. Fuel Oil Day Tanks:

a. Simplx b. Phoenix Products c. Pryco d. Tramont e. Earthsafe

B. UL 142 labeled, freestanding, factory-fabricated, skid-mounted fuel tank assembly with the following features:

1. Interior corrosion inhibiting epoxy coatings and exterior industrial enamel coating. 2. Vents per UL142 and NFPA 30. 3. Containment: Integral rupture basin with a capacity of 150 percent of nominal capacity of

day tank.



4. Skid-mounted construction to support the entire generator. 5. Height: Minimum 12” tank height and maximum height including structural supports of

18”. 6. Solenoid valve: Fuel inlet solenoid valve interlocked with pump start/stop. Ship loose 7. UL 508 listed Level Controller compatible with existing duplex pump system controls:

a. Control functions:

1) “Auto-off-manual” pump control mode switch. 2) “Press to test” pump push-button. 3) Duplex pump control with automatic lead pump alternating with automatic

lag pump backup. 4) Inlet solenoid valve control interlocked with pump start/stop. 5) Pump start-stop automatic level differential control.

6) Leak Detector: Locate in rupture basin with inlet solenoid valve lockout in the event of day-tank leak.

b. Indication Functions:

1) Fuel level. 2) Power available. 3) Switch not in auto. 4) Pump running indicators for each pump. 5) Low level alarm. 6) High level alarm. 7) Tank leak alarm. 8) Overflow alarm. 9) Alarm outputs: Dry signal contacts for high level, low level, tank leak, and

overflow.

8. Tank Capacity: 250 gallons. 9. Pumps: None.

10. Overflow to main fuel tank: Gravity. 11. Fuel oil cooler shall be included for fuel return to the day tank. It shall be capable of heat

rejection of 400,000 BTU/Hr with a 120vac, single phase motor cooling fan. 12. Piping Connections: Fuel inlet, fuel supply and return to engine; local fuel fill, vent line,

overflow line; and tank drain line with shutoff valve. 13. Refer to mechanical drawings for additional information, requirements, and accessories.

C. Alarms: Provide the following alarms in the generator alarm system.

1. Leak Detector: Locate in rupture basin and connect to provide audible and visual alarm in the event of day-tank leak.

2. Low-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm contacts at 25 percent of normal fuel level.

3. High-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm and redundant fuel shutoff contacts at midpoint between overflow level and 100 percent of normal fuel level.

2.8 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM

A. Muffler: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer; sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet (3 m) from exhaust discharge shall be 85 dBA or less. Silencer shall be dual inlet with single outlet. The silencer and exhaust piping shall be sized to ensure against loss of power due to excessive back-pressure

B. Exhaust Piping: Slope piping away from engine to prevent condensed moisture from running back into the engine.



C. Condensate Drain for Muffler: Schedule 40, black steel pipe connected to muffler drain outlet through a petcock at the exhaust systems lowest point.

D. Connection from Engine to Exhaust System: Flexible section of corrugated stainless-steel pipe.

E. Connection from Exhaust Pipe to Muffler: Stainless-steel expansion joint with liner.

F. Exhaust Piping External to Engine: Refer to specification 15550 Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks.

2.9 COMBUSTION-AIR INTAKE

A. Description: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator.

2.10 STARTING SYSTEM

A. Description; 24-V electric, with negative ground and including the following items:

1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in "Environmental Conditions" Paragraph in "Service Conditions" Article.

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding.

3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified and a minimum of 60 seconds.

4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in "Environmental Conditions" Paragraph in "Service Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging.

5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.

6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in "Environmental Conditions" Paragraph in "Service Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place.

7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.

8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:

a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.

b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.

c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d. Provide the following meters and indications flush mounted in door.

1) DC Ammeter and Voltmeter: Meters shall indicate charging rates. 2) 12 hour Equalizer charge timer 3) Battery Charger Malfunction 4) High Battery Voltage



5) Low Battery Voltage 6) Normal Battery Voltage

e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel.

2.11 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Functional Description: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of the generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, the generator set starts. The off position of the same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down the generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down the generator set.

B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, engine gages, instrument transformers, generator disconnect switch or circuit breaker, and other indicated components shall be grouped in a combination control and power panel. Control and monitoring section of panel shall be isolated from power sections by steel barriers. Panel features shall include the following:

1. Wall-Mounted Cabinet Construction: Rigid, self-supporting steel unit complying with NEMA ICS 6. Power bus shall be copper. Bus, bus supports, control wiring, and temperature rise shall comply with UL 891.

2. Current and Potential Transformers: Instrument accuracy class.

C. Indicating and protective devices and controls shall include those required by NFPA 110 for a Level 1 system, and the following:

D. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls:

1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter. 8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 11. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 12. Generator overload.

E. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel.

1. Engine high-temperature shutdown. 2. Lube-oil low-pressure shutdown.



3. Overspeed shutdown. 4. Remote emergency-stop shutdown. 5. Engine high-temperature prealarm. 6. Lube-oil low-pressure prealarm. 7. Fuel tank, low-fuel level. 8. Low coolant level. 9. Overcrank shutdown. 10. Coolant low-temperature alarm. 11. Control switch not in auto position. 12. Battery-charger malfunction alarm. 13. Battery low-voltage alarm.

G. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 110. Labeled LED shall identify each alarm event. Common audible signal shall sound for alarm conditions. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.

H. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation.

I. Provide BACNET compatible monitoring package for remote monitoring.

2.12 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous. 2. Trip Settings: Matched to generator thermal damage curve as closely as possible. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other

protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.

B. Generator Disconnect Switch: Molded-case type, 100 percent rated.

1. Rating: Matched to generator output rating. 2. Adjustments: Provide long time, short time and instantaneous adjustable settings.

C. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit that continuously monitors current level in each phase of generator output, integrates generator heating effect over time, and predicts when thermal damage of the alternator will occur. When signaled by the protector or other generator-set protective devices, a shunt-trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the switch to disconnect the generator from the load circuits. Protector shall perform the following functions:

1. Initiates a generator overload alarm when the generator has operated at an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms.

2. Under single or three-phase fault conditions, regulates the generator to 300 percent of rated full-load current for up to 10 seconds.

3. As the overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal damage point of the unit, the protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect device, and shuts down the generator set.

4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot.



2.13 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. The alternating current generator shall be of 4 salient pole, 2/3 pitch, synchronous, revolving field type with static exciter and torque matched voltage regulator. No commutator brushes shall be permitted. The generator shall be of single pre-lubricated sealed bearing type, air cooled by a direct drive centrifugal blower fan. The rotor shall be driven through rigid coupling to insure permanent alignment. The brushless type exciter shall be directly connected. The observable temperature rise as measured by resistance method under rated load conditions of the generator windings shall not exceed 80 degrees Centigrade based on a maximum cooling air temperature of 40 degrees Centigrade. The generator shall be provided with properly sized power terminal cabinet for connection of load conductors. The main generator breaker may be mounted on the power terminal cabinet.

B. Permanent Magnetic Generator (PMG): Permanent Magnetic Generator shall be included to provide a reliable source of excitation power for motor staring and short circuit performance. The PMG and controls shall be capable of sustaining and regulating current supplied to a single phase or three phase fault at approximately 300% of rated current for not more than 10 seconds.

C. Voltage Regulator: Provide an automatic, solid state type, voltage regulator shall be provided to match he characteristics of the generator (as prototype tested) and the engine. It shall regulate the generator output voltage at constant load from no-load to full-load within plus or minus two percent (2%). The voltage regulator shall maintain voltage at fourty percent (40%) maximum voltage dip or rise on one step application or removal of eight-tenth (0.8) Power Factor full-load. A voltage-adjusting tactile switch to adjust the voltage plus or minus five percent (5%) from rated value shall be provided. The regulator response to a full load application shall be a maximum of two (2) seconds to a steady state band of plus or minus two percent (2%). The regulator shall be immune from being non-operational due to load induced voltage distortion and provide a pulse width modulated output to the alternator exciter.

D. Comply with NEMA MG 1 and specified performance requirements.

E. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.

F. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.

G. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required.

H. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.

I. Excitation shall use no slip or collector rings, or brushes, and shall be arranged to sustain generator output under short-circuit conditions as specified.

J. Enclosure: Dripproof.

K. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point.

L. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

M. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.



N. Temperature Rise of Generator: The observable temperature rise under rated load conditions of the generator windings shall not exceed 80 degrees Centigrade based on a maximum cooling air temperature of 40 degrees by resistance.

2.14 FINISHES

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible standard primer.


A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.

1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 energy converters in Paragraphs 3.2.1, 3.2.1.1, and 3.2.1.2.

2. Generator Tests: Comply with IEEE 115. 3. Components and Accessories: Items furnished with installed unit that are not identical to

those on tested prototype shall have been factory tested to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.

B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:

1. Full load run. 2. Maximum power. 3. Voltage regulation. 4. Transient and steady-state governing. 5. Single-step load pickup. 6. Safety shutdown. 7. Inductive Load Bank Test: Provide 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% loads, one hour each load,

presented in tabulated format. 8. Observation of Factory Tests: Provide 21 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity

for observation of tests by Owner's representative. The manufacturer will incur no cost. The owner’s representative will provide independent transportation and lodging as required from the site to the factory. Conduct tests on day designated in all cases.

C. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation.




3.2 BASES

A. Coordinate size and location of the bases. Verify structural requirements with structural engineer.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Physical Generator Size: The space available for the generators is severally limited. Proposed generators must fit with-in the design footprint and height limitations.

B. Rigging of the Generator: Lifting the generator to the generator room penthouse will require removal of the radiator and day/belly tank. Provide on-site labor to remove, reinstall and test the cooling and fuel systems when complete. Coordinate the installation requirements with the Rigging Contractor in accordance with the attached Rigging Plan.

C. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.

D. Install packaged engine generators level on concrete base and supports as shown..

1. Vibration Isolation: Mount packaged engine generators on restrained spring isolators per manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.

F. Install exhaust-system piping. Extend to point of termination outside structure. Size piping according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install condensate drain piping for engine exhaust system. Extend drain piping from low points of exhaust system and from muffler to condensate traps and to point of disposition.

2. Support exhaust piping and muffler with pipe hangers spaced a maximum of 20 feet (6 m) horizontally and at each floor vertically. Pipe hangers are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

G. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance.

2. Connect cooling-system water supply and drain piping to diesel-engine heat exchangers. Install flexible connectors at connections to engine generator and remote radiator.

3. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union.

a. Diesel storage tanks, tank accessories, piping, valves, and specialties for fuel systems outside the building are specified in Division 15 Section "Fuel Oil Piping.”

4. Connect exhaust-system piping to engines.

B. Generator day tank frame shall be grounded by connection to the building structural steel. The generator WILL NOT act as a separately derived source



C. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" and Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Provide a portable load bank of sufficient capacity to load the generator to 100%(1500kw) of its rated capacity with adjustable steps capable of performing the test detailed below. Provide temporary cables to connect the load bank to the output breaker for testing. Once accept, remove the cables and connect specified cables to the output circuit breaker.

C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Sections 7.15.2.1 and 7.22.1 (except for vibration baseline test). Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 3. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to

those specified here including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Single-step full-load pickup test.

4. Load test: Operate the generator as detailed below taking measurements at 10 minute intervals as well as before and after each change in load. See the test form at the end of the specification for variables required.

a. Start the generator at 25% of full load capacity and run for a minimum of 30 minutes.

b. Increase the load to 50% of full load capacity and run for a minimum of 30 minutes. c. Increase the load to 100% of full load capacity and run for a minimum of 120

minutes. d. Unload the generator and run for a minimum of 20 minutes. At the end of the

period suddenly increase the load to 100% of rated capacity and run for additional 20 minutes.

e. Operate the two generator sets in parallel at 50% load for one hour. Monitor the percentage of load on each unit and record.

f. Unload the generator and run for a minimum of 20 minutes after which the generator will be de-energized and the load test completed.

5. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.



a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

6. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions.

7. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

8. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: The contractor shall use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch wg (120 kPa). Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine.

9. The contractor shall coordinate the witness and performance of an Exhaust Emissions Test in conformance with the Commonwealth of Virginia air quality test criteria.

10. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.

11. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at the property line, and compare measured levels with required values.

D. Inspect and test fuel tank according to NFPA 30, "Testing" Paragraph and according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect.

E. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

F. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of the National Institute for Standards and Technology, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request.

G. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

H. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

I. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

J. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

K. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.



L. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.

C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel with 4 hours of training to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

1. Coordinate this training with that for the paralleling switchgear and transfer switches.

3.9 GENERATOR FULL LOAD TEST FORM:

A. Complete the following form during load testing:



GENERATOR FULL LOAD TEST FORM

GENERATOR SET NO.: SERIAL NO. OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE: DATE: WEATHER CONDITIONS: INSIDE TEMPERATURE (BEFORE TEST): DATA TAKEN BY:

ROOM ENGINE BATTERY LOAD TEMP. Oil Water CHARGER

TIME

Ambi-ent

@ Rad.

Fuel Pres

s

Tem

p

Pres

s

Temp In

Temp

Out

Volt

s

Amp

s

Volts

Amp

s

kW

RPM/Freq

Start +5 min +10 min +15 min

+20 min

+25 min

+30 min

+40 min

+50 min

+60 min

+70 min

+80 min

+90 min

+100 min

+110 min

+120 min

+130 min

+140 min

+150 min

+160 min

+170 min

+180 min

+190 min

+200 min

+210 min

+220 min

+230 min

+240 min +250 min +260 min

+270 min

INSIDE TEMPERATURE ATER TEST:



GENERATOR FULL LOAD TEST FORM

(Continued)

I. Prevent set from starting run complete Crank/Rest sequence by setting control switch to run. Battery Voltage: Passed Failed Sequence Specified: [ ] - [ ] Sec. Cranks W/[ ] sec. rests between Passed [ ] Failed [ ] Battery Charge Rate: Volts: Amps: II. Test Safeties: P = Passed F = Failed Alarms LOCAL REMOTE ________ Low Jacket Water Temp.

High Water Temp.

Low Lube Oil Press

High Diesel Oil Level

Low Diesel Oil Level

Three Hour Main Fuel Supply

Battery Charger Failure

Battery

Overspeed

Overcrank

Low Water Level

Low Water Level Pre-Alarm

High Water Temp Pre-Alarm

Low Oil Pressure Pre-Alarm

Engine Running Sensor

Oil Pressure Drop-Out PSI



GENERATOR FULL LOAD TEST FORM (Continued)

III. Test "Cold" Start (Disconnect power to transfer switch) Generator Set No.: Serial No.

Outside Temperature: Date:

Weather Conditions:

Inside Temperature:

Time for Louvers Full Open. (8 Sec. Max) Sec.

Time Delay on Power Failure to Crank Sec.

Cranking Time to Start Sec.

Time to Operating Speed (60 Hz) Sec.

Time to transfer All immediate Transfer Switches Sec.

Time Delay Transfer Switches transfer after Time Delay

Yes No

Voltage Overshoot

Frequency Overshoot

Oil Pressure Water Temp

Battery Charge Rate: Volts ________ Amps ____________

Generator # Date _____________



GENERATOR FULL LOAD TEST FORM (Continued)

ATTENDEES: Name Company Witnessed (Signature)



LOW VOLTAGE ROLL UP GENERATOR TERMINATION CABINET 16235 - 1

SECTION 16235 – LOW VOLTAGE ROLL UP GENERATOR TERMINATION CABINET

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Free-standing, termination cabinet for use as an intermediate termination point between the customer supplied roll up generator and the disconnecting means servicing the loads.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables" 2. Section 16415 “Transfer Switches”


A. Provide the following:

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. c. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. d. Short-circuit current rating of connection bus. e. Equipment anchorage details

B. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain connection box, components, and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of connection box and are based on the specific system indicated. Contractor assumes responsibility for installation of equipment not physically fitting into the space provided.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.



D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of connection box and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Electrical Equipment & Engineering. Alternative products meeting the specification by the following available include:

1. Eaton / Cutler-Hammer. 2. Schneider Electric (Square D)Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Enclosures: Free standing, NEMA PB 1, Type 3R.

1. Vertical free-standing section bolted together to form a rigid assembly. The sides and rear shall be covered with removable bolt-on covers. All edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. Provide lockable front hinged door for access to terminations within the enclosure.

2. Provide permanently attached data plate that is visible with on the panel face with the door open. Plate to indicate voltage, amperage and short circuit ratings.

3. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

4. Finish: All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchboard shall be properly cleaned and provided with a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating and finished with ANSI-61 gray polyester powder paint

C. Ratings: The assembly shall be rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short-circuit conditions when connected directly to a power source having available fault current of 35,000 amperes symmetrical at 400A, 480V, 3-phase.

D. Terminations:

1. Cable termination landings shall be copper. Main horizontal landing bars shall be mounted with all three phases arranged in a staggered vertical plane to accommodate wire terminations. Sizing shall be based on NEMA standard temperature rise criteria of 65 degrees C over a 40 degrees C ambient.

2. Provide a full capacity neutral bus. 3. A copper ground bus (minimum 1/4 x 2 inch). 4. Mobile generator connections will be ‘Cam-Type connections color coded Phase A-

Brown, Phase B-Orange, & Phase CYellow

E. Nameplates: provide engraved laminated plastic or metal name plates per the “Electrical Identification” section of this specification.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install connection box and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."

C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

D. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section “Electrical Identification."

B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install equipment grounding connections for connection box with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus.

B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

C. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit. 3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3.5 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.



ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 1

SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 4. Enclosures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

D. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings.

E. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field quality-control reports.

1. Test procedures used. 2. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

B. Manufacturer's field service report.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.




A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Fairfax County Project Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Project Manager's written

approval. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.



D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

4. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

4. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS



Circuit breakers added to existing panelboards will be manufactured by the manufacturer of the panelboard

B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.



D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

E. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic

circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. 5. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.




A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit. 3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 4. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 5. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

6. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.



TRANSFER SWITCHES 16415 - 1

SECTION 16415 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic transfer switches.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.

1. Wiring Diagrams:

a. Single-line diagram. Show connections between transfer switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.

b. Control diagrams: Show internal relay wiring connections. Identify external command contact connections points.

c. Indicate Building Automation Monitoring connection.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.



B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, for emergency service under UL 1008, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 99.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and mounting space shown on the drawings, provide products by one of the following:

1. Transfer Switches:

a. GE Zenith Controls b. Onan Corp./Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. c. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project to withstand a minimum of 100 kAIC, based on testing according to UL 1008.

1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.

C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings is plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

E. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.

G. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations.

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.



2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated. Provide solid neutral plate with fully rated lugs.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

I. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

J. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.

1. Number: Three pole switch with solid neutral. 2. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case

circuit-breaker components are not acceptable. 3. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 4. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional

automatic transfer-switch units shall have separate arcing contacts.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

D. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is controlled by the Generator Control Panel.

E. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator has a programmed neutral position arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, with an intentional, time-controlled pause at midpoint during transfer. Pause is adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds minimum and factory set for 0.5 second, unless otherwise indicated. Time delay occurs for both transfer directions. Pause is disabled unless both sources are live.

F. Control Power: An independent source of control power will be provided to each switch to allow monitoring when no normal power source is available.

G. Provide BACNET compatible monitoring package for remote monitoring.

2.4 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER-SWITCH FEATURES

A. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Senses low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage is adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

B. Time delay for override of normal-source voltage sensing delays transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.



C. Transfer lockout relay. Relay inhibits transfer to generator source until associated contact is closed in the Generator Synchronizing Control Panel.

D. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevents premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage is adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency is adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

E. Load Shed Relay: Relay controlled by the Generator Control Panel will open if generator over load is imminent and start retransfer to normal source timer. Transfer will be immediate if power is not present.

F. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes. Provides automatic defeat of delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

G. Unloaded running (engine cool-down) delay. Set to zero. Generator cool down cycle will be controlled by the Generator Control Panel..

H. Test Switch: Simulates normal-source failure.

I. Load Shed Relay: Relay controlled by the Generator Control Panel will open if generator over load is imminent and start return to normal source immediate if not present and start switching sequence if normal power is available.

J. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.

K. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and emergency-source sensing circuits.

1. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available."

2. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available."

L. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

M. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

N. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

O. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

P. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Not provided, Generator Exercise schedule will be maintained bu the Generator Control Panel.

2.5 BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES

A. Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.



B. Description: Manual type, arranged to select and connect either source of power directly to load, isolating transfer switch from load and from both power sources. Include the following features for each combined automatic transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch:

1. Means to lock bypass/isolation switch in the position that isolates transfer switch with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of transfer switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks prevent transfer-switch operation, except for testing or maintenance.

2. Drawout Arrangement for Transfer Switch: Provide physical separation from live parts and accessibility for testing and maintenance operations.

3. Bypass/Isolation Switch Current, Voltage, Closing, and Short-Circuit Withstand Ratings: Equal to or greater than those of associated automatic transfer switch, and with same phase arrangement and number of poles.

4. Contact temperatures of bypass/isolation switches shall not exceed those of automatic transfer-switch contacts when they are carrying rated load.

5. Operability: Constructed so load bypass and transfer-switch isolation can be performed by 1 person in no more than 2 operations in 15 seconds or less.

6. Legend: Manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction signs shall describe operating instructions.

7. Maintainability: Fabricate to allow convenient removal of major components from front without removing other parts or main power conductors.

C. Interconnection of Bypass/Isolation Switches with Automatic Transfer Switches: Factory-installed copper bus bars; plated at connection points and braced for the indicated available short-circuit current.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and primer.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Floor-Mounted Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.

1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 2 inches (50 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

B. Identify components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials & Methods.

3.2 WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS

A. Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.



3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.


1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.22.3. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages, minimum resistance and procedure recommended by manufacturer.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings. e. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer

time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.



3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

1. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.



PARALLELING SWITCHGEAR 16435 - 1

SECTION 16435 - PARALLELING SWITCHGEAR

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal-clad, low-voltage, circuit-breaker switchgear rated 480V and associated control systems, for paralleling generators on an isolated bus and for distributing power to the electrical distribution system.


1. Section 16231 - Packaged Engine Generators 2. Section 16415 – Automatic Transfer Switch

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. HMI: Human machine interface.


A. Product Data: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:

1. Technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for

individual circuit breakers. 3. Features, characteristics, ratings, factory settings, and time-current characteristic curves

for individual relays and overcurrent protective devices. 4. Description of sequence of operation for paralleling controls.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the following:

a. Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings. b. Enclosure types and details. c. Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions, shipping sections,

and weights of each assembled section. d. Floor plan drawing showing locations for anchor bolts and leveling channels. e. Bus configuration with current rating, size, and number of conductors in each bus

run, including phase, neutral, and ground conductors of main and branch buses.



f. Short-time and short-circuit current rating of switchgear assembly. g. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. h. Nameplate legends. i. Mimic-bus diagram. j. Fault current withstand rating.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For switchgear, paralleling control system, and related equipment, include the following:

a. Power, signal, and control wiring. b. Schematic control diagrams. c. Diagrams showing connections of component devices and equipment. d. Three-line diagrams of current and future circuits showing device terminal numbers

and internal diagrams. e. Single line diagram of internal bussing with tie and connection points.

C. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components and their connection points. Provide size and quantities of conductors.

D. Provide factory labeling of all conductors, relays, modules, interconnecting wiring, breakers, gages, fuses, and other components.


A. Source quality-control test reports.

B. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for sequence of operation. 2. Manufacturer's sample system checklists and log sheets. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting relays and overcurrent

protective devices. 4. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of relay and overcurrent

protective device.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS


1. Fuses: Six of each type and rating used. 2. Fuses are specified in Section 16491 "Fuses." 3. Indicating Lights: Six of each type or module installed. 4. Touchup Paint: Three containers of paint matching enclosure finish each 0.5 pint.




A. Source Limitations: Obtain paralleling switchgear and generators (Section 16231) through one source with components from each from a single manufacturer.



A. Deliver switchgear in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation at indicated ampere ratings for the following conditions:

1. Ambient temperature not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude of 1,000 feet above sea level.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERATOR PARALLELING MONITOR AND CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Basis-of-Design Product: System will be supplied by the manufacturer of the generators. Relays and circuit breakers will by a single manufacturer or be manufactured by one of the listed panelboard manufacturers listed in Section 16442. Subject to compliance with requirements and the space limitations, provide a system by Cummins Power Generation or a comparable product by Caterpillar; Engine Div.

B. Individual Generator Control and Monitoring Panel: Provide each generator with a set mounted control and monitoring section that allows the operator to view status and control operation of each respective generator. Provide panel with the following features and characteristics: Monitoring panels are mounted on the generator sets and the information is displayed on the HMI-touchscreen.

1. Analog Display digitally transmitted of the Generator Metering Screen at the HMI: 1 percent accuracy class or better.

a. Ammeter, Voltmeter, Frequency Meter, Wattmeter, Kilowatt-Hour Meter, and Power Factor Meter:

1) For three-phase and four-wire systems, indicate line-to-line and line-to-neutral conditions on voltmeter.

2) Provide tactile switches or other provision to allow reading of both generator and bus voltages and frequencies from this metering set.



b. Digital Synchroscope and "Generator Set Synchronized" Indication:

1) Provide indication of synchronization.

c. Engine run-time meter, start counter, rpm meter, and battery voltage meter. d. Engine oil temperature gage and engine coolant temperature gage.

2. Generator Protective and Control Switches: Provide oiltight, industrial-grade switches in generator control and monitoring panel.

a. Mode Selector Switch (Run/Off/Auto):

1) "Run" mode to start and accelerate unit to rated speed and voltage, but not close paralleling circuit breaker.

2) "Off" mode to prevent generator from starting or to immediately shutdown generator if running.

3) "Auto" mode to allow generator to start on receipt of remote start signal.

b. Circuit-Breaker Trip/Close Switch: Interlocked with system control so that circuit-breaker closure is impossible unless the following occurs:

1) Mode selector switch is in "Run" position. 2) Generator set is synchronized with system bus.

c. Control/reset push button with flashing lamp to indicate generator is locked out due to fault condition.

d. Lamp test push button to simultaneously test all lamps on panel. e. Control Panel Illumination: DC lamps to illuminate panel when lighting from

surrounding environment is not available. f. Emergency Stop Push Button: Red mushroom-head switch with clear hinged

Plexiglas cover maintaining its position until manually reset. g. Generator Set Mounted Voltage and Frequency Tactile Raise/Lower Switches:

1) Allow plus/minus 5 percent adjustment when generator set is operating but not paralleled.

3. Generator Protective and Control Devices: Integrated microprocessor-based control devices, and other accessories and devices located either in generator control and monitoring panel or in switchgear control section to provide the following features and functions:

a. Kilowatt Load Sharing Control:

1) Operates engine governors during synchronizing and provides isochronous load sharing when paralleled.

2) Allows generator set to ramp up to kilowatt load level signaled by system master controller.

b. Load-Demand Governing Control:

1) Causes generator set to ramp down to zero load when signaled to shut down in load-demand mode.

2) Causes generator set to ramp up to a proportional share of total bus load.

c. Kilovolt Ampere Rating Load Sharing Control:

1) Operates alternator excitation system while generator set is paralleled. 2) Causes sharing of reactive load among all generator sets to within 1 percent

of equal levels without voltage drop.

d. Sync-Check and Paralleling Monitor and Control:

1) Monitors and verifies that generator set has reached 90 percent of nominal voltage and frequency before closing to bus.



2) Prevents out-of-phase paralleling if two or more generator sets reach operating conditions simultaneously, by sending "inhibit" signal to sets not designated by system as "first to close to bus."

3) Recognizes failure of "first-to-close" generator set and signals system paralleling to continue.

4) Prevents out-of-phase closure to bus due to errant manual or automatic operation of synchronizer.

e. Synchronizer Control:

1) Adjusts engine governor to match voltage, frequency, and phase angle of paralleling bus.

2) Maintains generator-set voltage within 1 percent of bus voltage, and phase angle within 20 electrical degrees of paralleling bus for 0.5 seconds before circuit-breaker closing.

3) Provides "fail-to-synchronize time delay" adjustable from 10 to 120 seconds; with field selectivity to either initiate alarm or shut down generator set on failure condition.

f. Reverse Power Monitor and Control:

1) Prevents sustained reverse power flow in generator set. 2) Trips generator circuit breaker and initiates generator set shutdown when

reverse power condition exceeds 10 percent of generator set kilowatt for three seconds.

g. Phase Rotation Monitor and Control:

1) Verifies generator set and paralleling bus phase rotation match prior to closing paralleling circuit breaker.

h. Electronic Alternator Overcurrent Alarm and Shutdown Control:

1) Monitors current flow at generator-set output terminals. 2) Initiates alarm when load current on generator set is more than 110 percent

of rated current for more than 60 seconds. 3) Provides overcurrent shutdown function matched to thermal damage curve

of alternator. Provide without instantaneous-trip function.

i. Electronic Alternator Short-Circuit Protection:

1) Provides shutdown when load current is more than 175 percent of rated current and combined time/current approaches thermal damage curve of alternator. Provide without instantaneous-trip function.

j. Loss of Excitation Monitor:

1) Initiates alarm when sensing loss of excitation to alternator while paralleled to system bus.

k. Generator-Set Start Contacts: Redundant system, 10 A at 32-V dc. l. Cool-Down Time-Delay Control: Adjustable, 0 to 600 seconds. m. Start Time-Delay Control: Adjustable, 0 to 300 seconds. n. Paralleling Circuit-Breaker Monitor and Control:

1) Monitors circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. 2) Initiates fault signal if circuit breaker fails to close within adjustable time-

delay period (0.5 to 15 seconds). 3) Trips open and locks out paralleling circuit breaker upon paralleling circuit

breaker failure to close, until manually reset.

4. Engine Protection and Local Annunciation:

a. Provide annunciation and shutdown control modules for alarms indicated.



b. Provide visual alarm status indicator and alarm horn with silence/acknowledge push button on generator control and monitoring panel.

c. Annunciate the following conditions:

1) Status, Light Only (Nonlatching):

a) Generator engine control switch not in auto (red). b) Generator engine control switch in auto (green). c) Emergency mode (red). d) Generator circuit breaker closed (red). e) Generator circuit breaker open (green). f) Engine stopped (green). g) Engine running (red). h) Engine cool-down (amber).

2) Pre-Alarm, Light and Horn (Nonlatching):

a) Pre-high coolant temperature (amber). b) Pre-low oil pressure (amber). c) Low coolant temperature (amber). d) Engine low battery (amber). e) Engine low fuel (amber). f) Generator fails to synchronize (amber).

3) Shutdown Alarm, Light and Horn (Latching):

a) Engine overcrank (red). b) Engine overspeed (red). c) Engine low oil pressure (red). d) Engine high coolant temperature (red). e) Engine low coolant level (red). f) Engine remote emergency shutdown (red). g) Generator circuit breaker tripped (red). h) Generator loss of field (red). i) Generator reverse power (red). j) Generator undervoltage (red). k) Generator overvoltage (red). l) Generator underfrequency (red). m) Generator overfrequency (red).

C. Master Control System and Monitoring Equipment: Paralleling and monitoring equipment, components, and accessories for multiple generators with the following features and characteristics:

1. The master control, due to space requirements, shall be a separate free standing vertical section, and will not be an integral section in the switchgear lineup.

2. For redundancy, all Master Control automation functions shall be capable of being executed from any of multiple distributed processors. If the automation processor executing Master Control automation functions should fail, the next available automation processor shall automatically assume control of all Master Control automation functions. The number of redundant processors for Master Control automation functions shall be equal to the number of generators in the system. The redundant automation processors shall each consist of a fully redundant power supply and CPU. Transfer of Master Control functions to a redundant processor shall be bumpless. The Master Control automation functions shall include:

a. Automatic start of the generator plant when a run request is received b. First-up and dead-bus control logic c. Automatic active synchronizing and paralleling of the generator plant d. Automatic generator load and VAR sharing controls



e. Automatic Generator Demand Priority control logic f. Automatic Load Shed / Add control logic

3. The Automation and Controls system shall be capable of surviving a fault of any one of it’s’ automation processors. The failure of any single Master Control or any single generator power source automation processor shall only cause loss of automatic operation of a single generator.

4. Paralleled System Metering: Metering information displayed on the touchscreen, 1 percent accuracy class or better to monitor total output of generator bus. .

a. Ammeter, voltmeter, frequency meter, wattmeter, kilowatt-hour meter, power factor meter, kilovolt ampere, and kilovolt ampere rating.

1) For three-phase/four-wire systems, indicate line-to-line and line-to-neutral conditions on voltmeter.

2) Display all functions on the HMI device.

5. Full-Color HMI Device: Touchscreen with minimum viewing area of 60 square inches. The display shall support a minimum resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels, 16 million displayable colors, 24~60kHZ horizontal scan rate, 56-75kHZ refresh rate

a. Allows operator to monitor and control the complete system of paralleled generator sets.

b. Screens shall include the following:

1) Main Menu: Include date, time, and system status messages with screen push buttons to access one-line diagram, system controls, load controls, alarms, bus metering, and individual generator-set data.

2) One-Line Diagram Screen: Depicting system configuration and system status by screen animation, screen colors, text messages, or pop-up indicators. Indicate the following minimum system conditions:

a) Generator sets, buses, and paralleling circuit breakers energized/de-energized.

b) Generator-set mode (run/off/auto). c) Generator-set status (normal/warning/shutdown/load-demand stop). d) Paralleling circuit-breaker status (open/closed/tripped). e) Bus conditions (energized/de-energized). f) Provide access to other screens.

3) AC Metering Screen: Displays the following minimum meter data for the paralleling bus:

a) Phase volts and amperes, kilowatt, kilovolt ampere, kilovolt ampere rating, power factor, frequency, kilowatt hour, and kilowatt demand.

b) Real-time trend chart for system kilowatts and volts updated on not less than one-second intervals.

c) A minimum of one historical trend chart for total system loads with intervals no shorter than five minutes and a minimum duration of four hours.

4) Generator-Set Control Screen: Provides control over individual generator sets from master system control panel. Includes the following minimum functions:

a) Generator manual start/stop control (functional only when generator-set mounted control switch is in "Auto" position).

b) Generator-set alarm reset. c) Manual paralleling and circuit-breaker controls.



5) Generator-Set Data Display Screen: Provide the following minimum parameters:

a) Engine speed, oil pressure and temperature, coolant temperature, and engine operating hours.

b) Three-phase voltage and current, kilowatt, power factor, and kilowatt hour.

c) Generator control switch position and paralleling circuit-breaker position.

d) All generator-set alarms.

6) System Control Screen: Password protected and with the following minimum functions:

a) System Test Modes: Test with load/test without load/normal/retransfer time-delay override.

b) Test with Load: Starts and synchronizes generator sets on paralleling bus; all loads are transferred to bus.

c) Test without Load: Starts and synchronizes generator sets on paralleling bus but does not transfer loads to bus.

d) Time adjustments for retransfer time delay, transfer time delay, system time delay on stopping, and system time delay on starting.

7) Load-Demand Control Screen: Monitors total load on system bus and controls number of generator sets running so that capacity tracks load demand.

a) Load-Demand Control: On/off. b) Load-Demand Pickup Set Point: Adjustable from 90 to 40 percent in

5 percent increments. c) Load-Demand Dropout Set Point: Adjustable from 20 to 70 percent in

5 percent increments.

8) Manual Load Control Screen: Allows operator to manually add or delete generator sets from paralleled system in response to system load parameters.

a) Indication of system available in kilowatts and amperes. b) Control functions allow manual addition/removal of generator sets on

system, and activation of load-shed/load-restore functions.

9) Load-Add/Load-Shed Sequence Screen: Password protected and with the following minimum functions:

a) Assigns "load-add sequence priority" to each load control relay with designation for relay operation after a set number of generator sets are online.

b) Assigns "load-shed sequence priority" to each load control relay with designation for relay operation depending on number of generator sets online.

10) Alarm Summary and Run Report Screen:

a) Lists most recent alarm conditions and status changes. b) Lists a minimum of the most recent 32 alarm conditions by name and

time/date; acknowledges alarm conditions with time/date. c) For each start signal, lists start time and date, stop time and date,

maximum kilowatt and ampere load on system during run time, and start and stop times of individual generator sets.



6. Solid-State System Status Panel:

a. Provides visual alarm status indicator and alarm horn with silence/acknowledge push button.

b. Annunciates the following conditions:

1) Status, Light Only:

a) Running Status: Display generator set number and "green" running-status light.

b) Load demand mode (green). c) Priority Load Status: Display load number and "green" on-status light. d) System test (green). e) Remote system start (red). f) Normal source available (green). g) Connected to normal (green). h) Generator source available (green). i) Connected to generator source (green).

2) Status, Light and Alarm:

a) Load-Shed Level Status: Displays load number and red load-shed, status light.

b) Generator Alarm Status: Displays generator number and red "Check Generator" status light.

c) Controller malfunction (red). d) Check station battery (red). e) Bus overload (red). f) System not in auto (red).

D. Description of System Operation:

1. Loss of Normal Power:

a. System receives "start" signal from the Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS); all generator sets start and achieve rated voltage and frequency.

b. System closes the first generator set achieving 90 percent of rated voltage to paralleling bus.

c. When the switchgear bus is within 95% of the rated voltage a signal will be sent to the highest priority ATSs to close to the generator switchgear.

d. "Priority load add" controls prevent overloading of system. e. Remaining generator sets switched to synchronizers that control and then allow

closure of generator sets to paralleling bus. f. On closure to paralleling bus, each generator set assumes its proportional share of

total load. g. As additional generators come on line additional ATSs will be closed to the bus.

2. Failure of a Generator Set to Start or Synchronize:

a. After expiration of overcrank time delay, generator set shuts down and alarm is initiated.

b. Priority controller prevents overload of system bus. c. Manual override of priority controller at HMI allows addition of low-priority load to

bus. d. Bus overload monitor protects bus from manual overloading.

3. Bus Overload:

a. On bus overload, load-shed control initiates load shedding. b. If bus does not return to normal frequency within adjustable time period, additional

load continues to be shed until bus returns to normal frequency.



c. Loads shed can be reconnected to bus only by manual reset at HMI until the utility service is returned to normal operation

d. On return to utility power and after completion of the cool down cycle, bus over-load will be reset.

4. Load-Demand Mode:

a. With "load-demand" function activated, controller continuously monitors total bus load.

b. If bus load is below preset limits for 30 minutes, demand controller shuts down generator sets in predetermined order until minimum number of sets are operating.

c. On sensing available bus capacity diminished to set point, controller starts and closes generator sets to bus to accommodate load.

5. Return to Normal Power:

a. Process starts on removal of start signals from the ATSs. b. When no load remains on paralleling bus, all generator breakers open, go through

cool-down period, and shut down. c. If start signal is received during cool-down period, one generator set is

reconnected to bus, and system operation follows that of "loss of normal power."

6. No Load Test Mode

a. The No Load Test Switch is placed in the ON position. b. All available generators are started. c. The first generator up to voltage and frequency is closed to the bus. d. The remaining generators are synchronized and paralleled to the bus as they

come up to voltage and frequency. e. The system is now in No Load Test Mode.

7. Exit from No Load Test Mode

a. The No Load Test Switch is placed in the OFF position. b. All generator breakers are opened. c. The generators are allowed to run for their programmed cool down period. d. The system is now back in Automatic/Standby Mode.

8. Utility Fail Test Mode:

a. Entrance into Utility Fail Test Mode

1) The Utility Fail Test Switch is placed in the ON position. 2) A dry contact is sent to each ATS, which simulates a loss of utility within the

ATS controls. 3) The system enters into Emergency Mode as described in the “Emergency

Mode” sequence above.

b. Exit from Utility Fail Test Mode:

1) The Utility Fail Test Switch is placed in the OFF position. 2) A dry contact is removed from each ATS, which simulates the return of utility

within the ATS controls. 3) The system exits into Emergency Mode as described in the “Emergency

Mode” sequence above.

9. Generator Demand Priority Control: When the generators are operating the generators will be controlled to automatically match the on-line generator capacity to the loads to avoid unnecessary operation of all the generators when the loads are low.

a. The following controls shall be provided for each generator:

1) User-settable Generator Priority Selector 2) Status indicator for the Generator Priority Selected



3) Status indicator for generator On-line or Off-line

b. The Generator Demand Priority Control shall have the following controls:

1) Generator Demand Priority Control Switch (On/Off) 2) User-settable Generator Remove % (as a function of a single generator

capacity) 3) User-settable Generator Remove Delay 4) User-settable Generator Add % (as a function of a single generator

capacity) 5) User-settable Generator Add Delay

c. Upon entrance into Emergency mode, all generators shall be started and paralleled to the bus. After the Remove Time Delay, generators shall be removed from the bus as a function of the generator percentage loading by the user selected Generator Remove time delay. Generators shall be removed from the bus in descending priority. Should the generator percentage loading increase to the user selected Generator Add limits for the user selected Add Delay, the next generator will be started, synchronized and paralleled to the bus. Generators shall be added to the bus in ascending priority order. Should the generator plant ever reach 95% loading, the next priority generator shall be started and added to the bus with no time delay.

E. Long Term Historical Trending: Long Term Historical Trending shall log EPS historical data on the system hard drive. This data shall be displayed in a strip chart format. Historical data file format shall be “dbf” to facilitate manipulation of these files in other software programs. Long Term Historical Trending shall record and display up to 20 selected pieces of information for each Generator set.

F. Site Monitoring: The system shall be provided with the ability for web-based site monitoring services. Web-based EPS access shall employ high security to insure against unauthorized system access.

G. Remote Power Monitoring System: A hardwired remote monitoring HMI touchscreen shall be provided to monitor breaker status, alarms, metering and other operating parameters. All displays, metering and other information described previously in these specifications shall be available to the operator of the Remote System. The Remote System shall not in any way impede the selected automatic operation of the System Control. Any failure of the Remote System shall have no impact to the automatic operation of the System Control.

H. Building Management System Interface/ Gateway: The system shall allow interface from the user’s Building Management System such that the Building Management System or external user interface can in no way compromise the integrity or interfere with the critical operations of the EPS Control System. Coordinate the interface to the user’s Building Management System shall be via RS-232, RS-485 or Ethernet MODBUS communications protocol.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Ratings: Suitable for application in 3-phase, 60-Hz, solidly grounded neutral system.

B. Indoor Enclosure Material: Steel.

C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on phosphatizing-treated metal surfaces.



D. Phase-, Neutral-, and Ground-Bus Materials: Extend full length of switchgear.

1. Phase and Neutral Bus: Copper, silver plated at connection points. 2. Ground Bus: Copper, silver plated; minimum size 1/4 by 2 inches (6 by 50 mm). 3. Coordinate field connections to bus with installation contractor. Provide all bussing to

accept 2-hole long barrel lugs with compression fittings for each phase and neutral connection from each generator and for each phase and neutral connection to each automatic transfer switch (ATS) as shown on the riser diagram.

E. Switchgear Components: Incorporate components as indicated on Drawings.

1. Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.

a. Potential Transformers: Secondary-voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.

b. Current Transformers: Burden and accuracy class suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments.

2. Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, integrated digital type; with test blocks and plugs. 3. Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets,

supports, necessary appurtenances, and bus connections. 24VDC Control Power shall be fed from the generator batteries for the trip and close circuits.

4. Transient Voltage Suppression Device:

a. IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, bolt-on, solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit rating with peak single-impulse surge current rating of 160 kA/module/320 kA per phase. Provide the following features and accessories:

1) Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 2) Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 3) Integral disconnect switch. 4) Redundant suppression circuits. 5) Redundant replaceable modules. 6) Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground

bus. 7) LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 8) Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 9) Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one

normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

10) Six-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.

b. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1) Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277. 2) Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 3) Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277.

5. Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and complying with the following:

a. Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.



b. Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for duty required.

F. Identification: Provide electrical identification devices for the switchgear and each circuit breaker.

1. Identify units, devices, controls, and wiring. 2. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with

white letters on a dark-gray background. Provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

3. Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, applied to front of switchgear, arranged in one-line diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved mimic-bus diagram.

a. Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in switchgear sections to which applied, to produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchgear components and connections.

b. Medium: Painted graphics, as selected by Architect. c. Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background; as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.

2.3 METAL-CLAD, CIRCUIT-BREAKER SWITCHGEAR

A. Manufacturers:

1. Cutler-Hammer; Eaton Corporation. 2. Square D; Schneider Electric. 3. ABB

B. Nominal System Voltage: 480/277 V, 4-wire, 60 Hz.

C. Main-Bus Continuous: 5,000 A.

D. Fault Current Withstand rating: 65 kAIC minimum or 125% of total fault current generated by the two proposed and one future generator. We are supplying 100,000 KAIC rated switchboard.

E. Short-Time and Short-Circuit Current: Match rating of highest-rated circuit breaker in switchgear assembly.

F. Switchgear Fabrication: Provide a NEMA Class II UL891 switchboard with draw out generator paralleling circuit breakers, and fixed mounted molded case output circuit breakers. Each vertical section has a full depth barrier between sections.

1. Generator Circuit-breaker compartments shall be equipped to house drawout-type circuit breakers and shall be fitted with hinged outer doors.

2. Auxiliary Compartments: Match and align with basic switchgear assembly. Include the following:

a. Hinged front panels for access to accessory and blank compartments.

3. Bus bars connect between vertical sections and between compartments. Cable connections are not permitted.

a. Main Phase Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of assembly. b. Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity, except as indicated. Include

braces for neutral-bus extensions for busway feeders. c. Vertical Section Bus Size: Comply with IEEE C37.20.1, including allowance for

spare circuit breakers and spaces for future circuit breakers.



d. Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit currents.

e. Provide for future extensions from either end of main phase, neutral, and ground bus by means of predrilled bolt-holes and connecting links.

4. Circuit-Breaker Terminals for Cable Connections: Silver-plated copper bus extensions equipped with pressure connectors for conductors.

5. Provide dedicated switchgear sections for emergency systems.

G. Circuit Breakers: Comply with IEEE C37.13.

1. Ratings: As indicated for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for each circuit breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear.

2. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism with the following features:

a. Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator. b. Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment. c. Stored-Energy Mechanism: Electrically charged, with optional manual charging.

3. Trip Devices: Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two current transformers or sensors per phase, microprocessor-based trip device and flux-transfer shunt trip. Current sensors shall provide operation and signal function. The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to provide the basic adjustable time-current protection functions. a release mechanism, and the following features:

a. Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions, independent of each other in both action and adjustment.

b. Temperature Compensation: Ensures accuracy and calibration stability from minus 5 to plus 40 deg C.

c. Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics. d. Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units or sensors on

circuit breakers, or a combination of these methods. e. Three bands, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-delay functions; marked

"minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum." f. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. Equip

short-time-trip function for switchable I2t operation. g. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions. h. Ground-fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three trip-

time-delay bands; adjustable current pickup. Arrange to provide protection for the following:

1) Four-wire circuit or system.

i. Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip device to indicate type of fault.

4. System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor-based programmable time-current curve shaping adjustments. The short-time pickup adjustment shall be dependent on the long delay setting.

a. Programmable long-time setting. b. Programmable long-time delay with selectable I2T or I4T curve shaping. c. Programmable short-time setting. d. Programmable short-time delay with selectable flat or I2T curve shaping, and zone

selective interlocking. e. Programmable instantaneous setting. f. Programmable ground fault setting trip or ground fault setting alarm. g. Programmable ground fault delay with selectable flat or I2T curve shaping and

zone selective interlocking.



5. Auxiliary Contacts: For interlocking or remote indication of circuit-breaker position, with spare auxiliary switches and other auxiliary switches required for normal circuit-breaker operation, quantity as indicated. Each consists of two Type "a" and two Type "b" stages (contacts) wired through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal block in stationary housing.

6. Generator Circuit Breaker Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking mechanism to position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and disconnected positions. Include the following features:

a. Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position when it is closed.

b. Circuit-Breaker Positioning: An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from connected, test, and disconnected positions only with the associated compartment door closed, unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield. An open circuit breaker may be manually withdrawn to a position for removal from the structure with the door open. Status for connection devices for different positions includes the following:

1) Test Position: Primary disconnect devices disengaged, and secondary disconnect devices and ground contact engaged.

2) Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground contact disengaged.

7. Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in disconnected position; arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit breaker from switchgear.

8. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each circuit breaker to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism.

9. Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation. 10. Electric Close Button: One for each electrically operated circuit breaker. 11. Undervoltage Trip Devices: Adjustable time-delay and pickup voltage. 12. Shunt-Trip Devices: Where indicated. 13. Indicating Lights: To indicate circuit breaker is open or closed, for main and bus tie circuit

breakers interlocked either with each other or with external devices.

H. Accessories: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for circuit-breaker and switchgear tests, inspections, maintenance, and operation.

1. Racking handle to manually move circuit breaker between connected and disconnected positions.

2. Portable test set for testing all functions of circuit-breaker, solid-state trip devices without removal from switchgear.

3. Relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchgear meters and switchgear class relays.

I. Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of maintenance manual.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FACTORY TESTING

A. The switchgear shall be completely and functionally tested in the manufacturer's facility prior to shipment. For systems shipped in multiple sections, the switchgear shall be quality tested utilizing the plug-together wiring system which shall be unplugged prior to shipment and



plugged together again when the equipment is installed in order to maintain the integrity of the manufacturer's quality assurance testing.

B. The switchgear shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted and tested at the factory. After assembly, the complete switchgear shall be tested to ensure the accuracy of the wiring and the functioning of all equipment. The main bus system shall be given a dielectric test of 2200 volts for one minute between live parts and ground and between opposite polarities.

C. The wiring and control circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 1500 volts for one minute, or 1800 volts for one second, between live parts and ground, in accordance with ANSI C37.20.1

D. A certified test report of all standard production tests shall be shipped with each assembly.

E. Factory test as outlined above may be witnessed by the owner’s representative. Provide notification of the testing to the owner in writing three (3) weeks prior to testing.

3.2 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following:

1. Inspect switchgear installation, including wiring, components, connections, and equipment. Test and adjust components and equipment.

2. Verify that electrical control wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal by means of point-to-point continuity testing.

3. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

4. Test continuity of each circuit. 5. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of equipment and

components. 7. Load and test generator synchronizing programs. 8. Report results in writing


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of the following NETA categories:

a. Switchgear. b. Circuit breakers. c. Protective relays. d. Instrument transformers. e. Metering and instrumentation. f. Battery systems. g. Surge arresters.

2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results in Section 16055 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination."



B. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics.

3.4 PERFORMANCE TEST

A. After switchgear acceptance and demonstration provide a factory-authorized service representative to assist the contractor with Commissioning. Commissioning will be performed in two stages the first with a temporary generator and the second once the complete system is in operation. .

1. Temporary generator: Prior to the generators being installed, the paralleling switchgear will control a temporary generator, the three emergency ATSs and the fire pump. See Section 01800 and allow two man days on site to assist the contractor during testing.

2. Final Testing: Once the building generators have been and installed and connected to the paralleling switchgear along with all of the outputs demonstrate the following:

a. Automatic generator start-up under simulated utility failure. b. Automatic shedding of generator under low load conditions. c. Start-up of shed generator under increased load. d. Shedding of the output loads if the load exceeds the capacity of the generators e. Failure of either generator. f. See Section 01800 g. Allow two mandays on site to assist the contractor during testing.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide a factory-authorized service representative to provide a minimum of two eight hour classes to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear. The training program shall also include instruction on the operation of the assembly, circuit breakers, and major components within the assembly. Provide a course materials and operations manuals for a minimum of six participants.



SWITCHBOARDS 16441 - 1

SECTION 16441 - SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. 2. Transient voltage suppression devices. 3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 4. Instrumentation. 5. Control power. 6. Accessory components and features. 7. Identification.



A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation

and isolation. 6. Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company. 7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 9. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.




A. Field Quality-Control Reports:


requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices. 3. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEMA PB 2.


A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.



2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify County Project Manager 14 days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service County Project Manager's written

permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings as manufactured Cutler Hammer or comparable product by one of the following:

1. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Front- and Side-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted. 2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted. 3. Sections front and rear aligned.

C. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V.

D. Main-Bus Continuous: 1200 A.

E. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.

F. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

G. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.



H. Removable Compartment Covers: Secured by Captive thumb screws for access to interior of switchboard.

I. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.

J. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.

1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver-plated, with copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.

2. Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material as through buses, equipped with compression connectors for outgoing circuit conductors. Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere rating of circuit-breaker position.

3. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch- (6-by-50-mm-), hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with compression connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.

4. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

5. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with compression connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.

K. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.

L. Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C.

2.2 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson

2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 3. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired-in, solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:

1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 3. Integral disconnect switch. 4. Redundant suppression circuits. 5. Redundant replaceable modules. 6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 9. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed,

for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of



any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

10. Six-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.

C. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277. 2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277.

2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Provide electronic trip circuit breakers for trip ratings 1,000 A and above. Provide circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

material. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage.

e. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay.

B. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.

C. Fuses are specified in Section 16491 "Fuses."

2.4 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:

1. Potential Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, single tapped secondary; disconnecting type with integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.



2. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary; bar or window type; double secondary winding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

3. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA.

4. Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground-Fault Current Sensing: Connect secondary wiring to ground overcurrent relays, via shorting terminals, to provide selective tripping of main and tie circuit breaker. Coordinate with feeder circuit-breaker, ground-fault protection.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:

1. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances as indicated:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated

values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.

2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door.

2.5 CONTROL POWER

A. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control-power transformer.

B. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.



C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.

C. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards.

D. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation.

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

F. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.



2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:



3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 16055 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based trip, monitoring, and communication units.



PANELBOARDS 16442 - 1

SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective

devices and auxiliary components. 6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

C. Field Quality-Control Reports:


requirements.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.




A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner in writing no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission received 48 hours prior to scheduled interruption.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.

4. Directory Card: Removable, inside panelboard door, mounted completely in metal frame with transparent protective cover with the complete directory visible without removing the card..

B. Incoming Mains Location: Top.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Basis of design is Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following alternate manufacturers will be considered:

1. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 2. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.



C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Device: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Basis of design is Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following alternate manufacturers will be considered:

1. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 2. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage.

e. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

f. Handle Padlocking Device: For Panelboard SB-DP provide fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in off position.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

C. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section “Electrical Identification."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."





1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

3. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Tests and Inspections:



C. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated/



FUSES 16491 - 1

SECTION 16491 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes cartridge fuses, rated 600 V and less, for use in switches, panelboards, switchboards, controllers, and motor-control centers; and spare fuse cabinets.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings for each fuse type indicated.

B. Product Data: Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

2. Let-through current curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current curves, coordination charts and tables, and related data. 4. Fuse size for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.

C. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information. If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses adjusted.

1. For each adjusted fuse, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

2. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

D. Maintenance Data: For tripping devices to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Source Limitations: Provide fuses from a single manufacturer.


C. Comply with NEMA FU 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


FUSES 16491 - 2


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with HVAC and refrigeration equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Industries, Inc.; Bussmann Div. 2. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. 3. Ferraz Corp. 4. General Electric Co.; Wiring Devices Div. 5. Gould Shawmut. 6. Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indicated; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

B. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.


3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Main Feeders: Class L, fast acting..

B. Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay].


FUSES 16491 - 3

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch.



FUSES 16491 - 4



ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING 16995 - 1

SECTION 16995 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 INTENT: The intended result of the Electrical Commissioning process is to assure the Owner

that the Electrical systems are installed, operate, and perform in accordance with Contract documents and that Owner’s personnel are properly trained to operate and maintain the systems – all prior to the Owner's acceptance of the building.

1.2 SCOPE:

A. Work Included: This project will have selected building systems commissioned in phases.

The equipment and systems to be commissioned are specified in Part 3 of this section. That portion of the commissioning effort that the Contractor is responsible to execute is defined herein. The commissioning process will be directed by a Commissioning Authority. The Electrical commissioning shall provide substantial verification that systems and equipment are installed and performing in accordance with the Contract Documents and design intent. This independent commissioning shall be complementary to the construction administration services performed by the Architect and/or Electrical Consulting Engineer. The Contractor shall provide all manpower required to start/stop, run, operate and test all electrical equipment and systems throughout the entire commissioning process as required by the commissioning plan and directed by the commissioning authority.

B. Work Not Included: It shall not be incumbent upon the Commissioning Authority to verify

adequacy of Electrical systems to accommodate the loads imposed upon them, i.e. to evaluate design. Systems installed and performing in accordance with Contract Documents that do not achieve and/or maintain conditions in accordance with design intent will be so noted when observed. Commissioning of fire protection sprinkler and mechanical systems are excluded from the Electrical commissioning process except as may be incidental to the operations of the Electrical system; i.e. note would be made if sprinkler piping blocked access to Electrical equipment, etc.

1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental

Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.

B. This section complements and forms an integral part of Division 16 and all other sections of Division 16 shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

C. The specification Section 01800 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS forms a

part of this section and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.4 RELATED WORK:

A. Contractor: The contractor responsible for the installation of the equipment and/or systems to be commissioned shall be responsible for all pre-commissioning work as defined within this specification section, in addition to all associated work in the individual commissioned equipment and/or systems related Division 16 specification sections.

B. Mechanical: All Division 15 Mechanical specification sections form a part of this section and

shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.



C. Electrical: All Division 16 Electrical specification sections form a part of this section and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.5 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS:

A. All work of Division 16 and related Division 15 work must be complete prior to functional performance verification, unless approved in writing by the Owner’s Project Manager.

An exception to this is any required seasonal or approved deferred performance verification. Required work includes completion and acceptance of the following tasks for all systems, including but not limited to: 1. Submission of all data requested by the Commissioning Authority

2. Correction of all identified issues or written approval by the Owner for exception from this milestone

3. Completed and signed start-up and pre-functional checklist documentation

4. Required training of Owner personnel completed and approved

5. Submission of acceptable and complete O&M manuals approved by the A/E.

B. Remedial Work: Completion of remedial work required as a result of failed functional

performance verification shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The time period for completion of remedial work required as a result of failed functional performance verification shall be a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days prior to the date of Owner’s acceptance of Substantial Completion; the time period shall be greater as required to meet the contractual Substantial Completion date.

C. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for liquidated damages for costs incurred due

to delays in Substantial Completion of the project. These damages shall include costs for Owner’s commissioning team members.

1.6 AUTHORITY OF THE COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY: Throughout the commissioning

process, the Commissioning Authority's role is primarily one of an observer/witness; monitoring the installation, start-up, operation, and performance of the AC, UPS and standby power systems. The commissioning Authority shall have no authority to alter design or installation procedures. If acceptable performance cannot be achieved, it will be the commissioning Authority's responsibility to apprise the Owner, design engineer, and/or contractor of the deficiency. Corrective actions shall be the responsibility of the Owner, design engineer, and/or contractor; and not that of the commissioning Authority. The commissioning Authority shall have the authority to require and review tests and demonstrations to verify proper performance.

1.7 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER RESPONSIBILITY:

A. In addition to their normal performance of Construction Period Services, the Architect/

Engineer will furnish to the Commissioning Authority one copy of all approved Electrical systems Shop Drawings and Submittals and place the Commissioning Authority on the mailing list for all communications (including progress meeting minutes) regarding the commissioned Electrical systems.

B. The Architect/Engineer shall respond in writing to issues cited in correspondence provided

by the Commissioning Authority.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY:

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the Commissioning Authority is



provided with all relevant correspondence, submittals, notifications, and assistance as may be required to satisfactorily complete the commissioning process using whatever personnel, time and resources that are required. This Section provides minimum commissioning requirements; however, the Contractor shall exceed those requirements whenever necessary to achieve the intent of Electrical Commissioning.

B. The Contractor shall include in his Bid the cost of furnishing the material requested and

manpower necessary for the verification of proper Electrical system installation and operation as specified in this Section.

C. The Contractor shall respond in writing to issues cited in correspondence provided by the

Commissioning Authority. D. The Contractor shall provide and conduct all functional performance testing for equipment

and systems and commissioning as required by this specification

1.9 CONTRACTORS’ SUBMITTALS AND DOCUMENTATION:

A. Contractor’s Commissioning Team: The Contractor shall provide the Commissioning Authority with a list of team members (including: member’s name, contract affiliation, title, responsibility, phone, fax, email, and mailing address) who will represent the Installing Contractors in pre-functional checks and functional performance verification. Submit no later than at the Pre-Commissioning Meeting.

B. Schedule and Notification:

1. The Contractor’s Construction Schedule shall adequately incorporate and provide for

commissioning milestones and activities. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Electrical Subcontractor to provide adequate time to accommodate all commissioning activities including the witnessing of milestone events, equipment start-ups, Owner training, Operating and Maintenance Manuals review and all other activities requiring scheduled participation of the Commissioning Authority as defined in the pre-functional checks and functional performance verification forms.

2. Notification of an impending event shall be provided to the Commissioning Authority at

least 48 hours in advance. The 48 hour notice is acceptable if the event is accurately scheduled on the most current Construction Schedule. Events not accurately identified in the Construction Schedule shall require one week notice.

C. Submittals:

1. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer for

review at least eight (8) weeks before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Operating and Maintenance Manuals must be approved by A/E prior to Contractor’s Request for Substantial Completion. A/E shall provide the approved Operating and Maintenance Manuals to the Commissioning Authority after the A/E’s review. The Manuals with A/E and Commissioning Authority’s review comments will be returned to the Contractor for preparation for use in training of Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel. Training of Owner’s personnel must occur before Contractor’s Request for Substantial Completion.

2. Demonstration and Training schedule shall be submitted to the Commissioning

Authority at the time of submission of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals; time for Demonstration and Training shall be included in the contractor’s project schedule throughout the project. Schedule shall fully detail all demonstrations and training that shall be provided by the Contractor to the Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel. Actual dates and times, if used, shall be understood as tentative and



subject to change based upon actual construction progress. However, at a minimum, the Demonstration and Training schedule shall include time allocations (i.e. hours) for each piece of equipment or system for which demonstration and training are specified.

D. Documentation:

1. The Contractor shall maintain on site the pre-functional checklists, organized by

system and by subsystem. Entries shall be made on the checklists as items are completed.

2. Two weeks prior to scheduled start of functional performance verification, the Contractor

shall provide the Commissioning Authority with a comprehensive report asserting that systems are ready for functional performance verification. The report shall include the following materials:

a. Detailed descriptions of any deviations from the Contract Documents (including but

not limited to: change orders, addenda, and field changes) organized by system and by subsystem.

b. Complete set of as-built drawings and documents, clearly identifying all deviations

from the Contract Documents and organized by system and by subsystem.

c. Complete set of all required manufacturer’s equipment tests, organized by system and by subsystem.

d. Completed pre-functional checklists, organized by system and by subsystem.

e. Results of any failed tests and detailed description of corrective actions taken,

organized by system and by subsystem.

E. Additional Information

1. The Contractor may receive a written request from the Commissioning Authority requesting specific information needed about each piece of commissioned equipment or system.

2. Typically this request for specific information will include: detailed manufacturer

installation and start-up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures; full details of any Owner-contracted tests; breaker performance curves; full factory testing reports, if any; and full warranty information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. In addition, copies of the installation and checkout materials shipped with the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Commissioning Authority.

3. The Commissioning Authority may request further documentation deemed necessary for

the commissioning process. These data requests may be made prior to the normal submittal process.

F. Contractor’s responsibility to have no deviations in submittals from requirements of the

Contract Documents is not relieved by the Commissioning Authority’s review.

1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: The Electrical systems commissioning may be construed to be in three parts: Installation verification, training and demonstrations, and performance verification.

A. Installation verification utilizes Pre-Functional Check Lists, documenting that equipment/



systems is/are installed and started in accordance with Contract Documents and is/are serviceable.

B. Contractor’s training of and demonstrations for Owner’s operating and maintenance

personnel occurs after Pre-Functional Checks are complete and all test and inspection reports and operation and maintenance manuals have been submitted and approved by the Architect/Engineer. Training and demonstrations usually precede Performance Verification; some training, such as use and operations of the automation system, occurs during and after performance verifications.

C. Performance verification employs Functional Performance Verification forms and occurs only

after all work required in related Sections, including TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING and submission of automation system trends, has been successfully completed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM AND CHECKLISTS

A. The Contractor shall designate team members to participate in the pre- functional

checks and functional performance verification specified herein. In addition, the project manager, the architect/engineer and the manufacturer will represent the Owner. The team members shall be designated as follows: Designation Function

CA Commissioning Authority

GC General Contractor

MC Electrical Contractor

TC Temperature Control Contractor

TAB Testing and Balancing Contractor

O Owner

A/E Architect/Engineer EC Electrical Contractor MFR Manufacturer

B. The Pre-Functional Checklists attached in Appendix A and Functional Performance

Verifications attached in Appendix B assign responsibility for specific commissioning activity tasks. An unshaded box indicates where participation by a specific commissioning team member is required. The Contractor and responsible Installing subcontractor(s) and any additional commissioning team members identified on the checklist shall initial and date the appropriate forms for each task indicated in these Checklists. One form shall be completed for each piece of commissioned equipment or system. By initialing and dating the entry, the responsible Installing Contractor(s) and identified additional commissioning team members shall indicate completion and verification of proper installation in accordance with Contract requirements and acceptance of responsibility for the installation of the equipment and/or systems.



1. Forms are to be initialed and dated at the time of completion of the specific checklist task item.

2. Where additional forms are required, the Contractor shall be responsible for

photocopying or replicating the appropriate form(s).

3.2 RESPONSIBILITIES: Each member of the commissioning team has responsibilities to the successful completion of the commissioning process as follows:

A. The Owner's Representatives shall perform their normal construction contract administration

functions.

B. The Architect shall provide adequate support to the Consulting Electrical Engineer as related to his duties in the commissioning process. It shall also be the Architect's responsibility, either directly or through his assignee, to assure that the commissioning Authority is:

1. Provided copies of approved shop drawings as they are returned to the Contractor

2. Notified of time, date, and place of all regularly scheduled progress meetings, and of

any special meetings that may be called regarding Electrical systems.

3. Copied on all correspondence pertinent to the Electrical systems including but not limited to minutes of progress meetings, responses to contractor requests for information, change order documentation.

C. The Consulting Electrical Engineer shall perform his normal construction contract

administration functions including resolution of Contractor Requests for Information on Electrical documents and installation.

D. The Contractor shall, in addition to his normal responsibilities for construction of the

project, assure that his subcontractors, suppliers and and vendors recognize the authority of the commissioning Authority and perform in accordance with the requirements of the commissioning process. The Contractor shall assure that proper notification, at least 48 hours in advance, is provided to the Commissioning Authority of the milestones of the Electrical systems installation, at a minimum as follows:

1. Start-up of equipment specified to be performed by factory authorized personnel.

2. Phase rotation Testing

3. Adjusting and testing of breakers

4. Load bank testing

5. Date of punch-out inspections

6. Date of training and instructions to Owner's operating personnel regarding operations of the Electrical system.

. E. The Electrical Subcontractor shall perform his normal contract obligations and be responsive

to the authority of the Commissioning Authority.

F. The Commissioning Authority will follow the procedures as set forth in the paragraph titled Commissioning Authority Procedures to execute his responsibility for:

1. Verifying that the required Electrical systems are installed and operating in accordance

with Contract Documents.

2. Assuring that Owner's Operating and Maintenance personnel are fully trained on



systems operation and maintenance.

3. Assuring that Close Out documentation is properly provided to the Owner.

3.3 TESTS

A. The pre-functional checks and functional performance verification shall be performed in a manner that essentially duplicates the checking, testing, and inspection methods established in the related Sections. Where checking, testing and inspection methods are not specified in other Sections, methods shall be established that will provide the information required. Testing and verification required by this Section shall be performed throughout the commissioning process. Requirements of this Section do not supplant those in related Sections but may expand upon them. The Contractor shall provide all materials, services, and labor required performing the pre-functional checks and functional performance verification. A pre-functional check or functional performance verification shall be aborted if any system deficiency prevents the successful completion of the test or if any non-Owner commissioning team member is not present for the test. After two failed tests, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all Owner costs associated with additional testing. These costs shall include costs for Owner commissioning team members.

1. Pre-Functional Checks: Pre-functional checks shall be performed for the items listed

on the checklists in Appendix A. Deficiencies discovered during these checks shall be corrected and re-tested in accordance with the applicable Contract requirements.

2. Functional Performance Verification: The Contractor shall provide Functional performance

verification for the items listed on the checklists in Appendix B. The Contractor shall provide equipment and system operational tests, failure mode tests, load tests, alarm tests, and control system testing as required by the CA. Functional performance verification shall begin only after all pre-functional checks have been successfully completed. Verifications shall prove all modes of the sequences of operation, and shall verify all other relevant Contract requirements. Verifications shall begin with equipment or components and shall progress through subsystems to complete systems. Upon failure of any functional performance verification checklist item, the Contractor shall correct all deficiencies in accordance with the applicable contract requirements. The checklist shall then be repeated until it has been completed with no errors.

3. Building Management System

3.4 COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY PROCEDURES: The Commissioning Authority will perform

systems commissioning following the procedures listed herein, and all members of the Commissioning Team shall cooperate fully with the execution of these procedures. To achieve Electrical systems commissioning, the Commissioning Authority shall:

A. Attend periodic construction progress meetings and perform unscheduled walks through the

building to observe and keep abreast of Electrical systems installation progress, means, and methods. Commissioning Authority's presence at meetings and in the building will be for his benefit in preparing to commission the building and shall in no way be construed as superseding the authority of the project architect/engineers.

B. Review Electrical shop drawings and submittals after approval of the Project

Consulting Electrical Engineer. The purpose of this review is familiarization with equipment to be furnished on the project for onsite verification by the Commissioning Authority and in no way relieves the Consulting Electrical Engineer of his duties or supersedes his authority for shop drawing review. Note: The Contractor may proceed with equipment procurement after receipt of Architect/Engineer approval of Electrical shop drawings and/or submittals.

C. Issue Pre-Functional Check Lists relevant to the project for Contractor monitoring and



verification of installation progress (See Appendix A). Establish milestones in the Electrical system installation at which time interim commissioning status reports will be prepared and issued by the Commissioning Authority.

D. Observe electrical connections

E. Observe representative sampling of panels, switchgear, and equipment for cleanliness,

damage, or leakage.

F. Be present to observe the start-up of equipment that is supervised and certified by the equipment manufacturer's authorized representative.

G. Visit the project periodically during testing and adjusting, of automatic control systems to

observe the actual work being performed.

H. Periodically observe the installation of the automatic control (BMS) system: verify calibration of a representative sampling of sensing devices, relays, and alarms.

I. Observe the operation of all new electrical equipment. Observations shall include

exercising equipment/systems through their respective control sequences including safeties.

J. Verify the commissioning of the Building Management System by reviewing point histories and by being present during hardware and software punch outs at the facility. The operational and monitoring capabilities of the BMS system will be employed in the commissioning of the Electrical systems.

K. Review Contractor prepared Operating and Maintenance Manuals and be present

during Electrical Contractor instructions to the Owner's operating personnel regarding operations and maintenance of the Electrical system.

L. Review Contractor prepared As-Built drawings and all certifications and warranties required

for submission by project specifications.

M. Furnish a written report and recommend acceptance of the Electrical system upon satisfactorily completing the commissioning process. Commissioning Authority’s recommendation to accept Electrical systems shall occur prior to Substantial Completion (i.e. Owner acceptance).

N. Recommendations for approval, will be forwarded to the project Architect/Engineer for

inclusion in their final submission of project close out documentation to the Owner.

3.5 CONTRACTOR COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES: The Contractor and all relevant subcon t rac to rs , supp l ie rs and vendors shall, in addition to being responsive to the procedures cited for execution by the Commissioning Authority in paragraph titled Commissioning Authority Procedures, perform as follows to achieve satisfactory electrical systems commissioning. The Contractor shall:

A. Demonstrate the performance of each piece of equipment and system to the

Commissioning Authority and Owner's Representative when ready. Schedule the Building Management System (BMS), subcon t rac to rs , supp l ie rs and vendors as may apply to demonstrate the performance of the equipment and systems.

B. Evaluations

1. The Owner’s Commissioning Authority shall observe the calibrations and measurements

associated with the functional performance verification of the equipment, systems and control systems identified herein; set the time schedule of functional performance



verification; and make any necessary corrective or remedial work recommendations to ensure that the commissioned equipment and systems function as described in the control sequence of operation and perform in accordance with design intent.

2. The relevant contractor, supplier or vendor shall operate all equipment and systems in

support of the commissioning work effort and shall provide all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to allow operational and performance verification of all commissioned equipment and systems.

C. Weather-Dependent Verification Procedures: Weather-dependent performance verification

that cannot be adequately achieved by simulation shall be performed in the appropriate climatic season. When simulation is used, the actual results may also require re-verification in the appropriate season.

D. At a minimum, the performance and operation demonstrations of the following equipment

and/or systems will be required:

1. Generators including remote radiators and cooling system 2. Generator Fueling System including day tanks, transfer pumps, controls, main tank,

and fuel polisher. 3. Paralleling Switchgear 4. Automatic Transfer Switches 5. Emergency system loading and unloading 6. Interface to the Building Management System

E. The Contractor shall repeat any measurement contained in the TAB report where required

by the Commissioning Authority for verification or diagnostic purposes.

F. Should any performance verification reveal operation or performance not in accordance Contract Documents, the Contractor shall rectify the deficiency, and re-inspection shall be performed. Should operation or performance still not be as specified on the reinspection due to Contractor’s work, the time and expenses of the Commissioning Authority to make further re-inspections shall be considered as additional cost to the Owner. The total sum of such costs shall be deducted from the final payment to the Contractor.

3.6 ISSUES RESOLUTION:

A. During the commissioning process, the Commissioning Authority may identify issues that

require corrective action. The Commissioning Authority has no authority to dictate ways and means of issues resolution other than enforcing the dictates of Contract Documents. Resolution of issues to be compliant with Contract Documents resides with the Contractor. Resolution of issues that require interpretations or modifications to the Contract Documents shall be the responsibility of the Architect/Engineers. Project completion date shall not be delayed due to lack of timely issues resolution unless authorized contract extensions have been executed.

B. Written responses shall be made to issues reported by the Commissioning Authority. The

Commissioning Authority shall provide status reports and issues logs as deemed appropriate during the commissioning process with original provided to Owner and copies to the Contractor, and Architect/Engineer. The Contractor and/or Architect/Engineer shall provide the Owner with a written response to each issue cited by the Commissioning Authority as to corrective actions implemented. The written response shall be provided to the Owner within a maximum of two (2) weeks of the issue date of the Commissioning Authority's issues; faster resolution of issues shall be performed as required to maintain project schedule and to avoid project delay. Copies of all responses shall be provided to the Commissioning Authority, Contractor, and Architect/Engineer. Issues that have not been fully resolved within the two week period shall be noted as such with explanation of intended



resolution; and subsequent status reports of the continued issue resolution shall be made in writing at two week intervals until such time as the issue has been fully rectified. The Owner reserves the right to withhold partial payment for construction contract or professional services until satisfactory resolution of electrical issues have been documented and verified.

3.7 SATISFACTORY COMPLETION: The Contractor's personnel shall be made available to

execute all aspects of the commissioning process until the Owner accepts final results. Commissioning tasks and meetings may be repeated until the Owner is satisfied and will not be fixed as one-time, one-chance events for the Contractor.

3.8 PHASING OF CONSTRUCTION AND COMMISSIONING: Where project completion is

performed in stages, the commissioning plan will take into account the staged start-up of each phase as shown on the Contract Documents.

3.9 CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS:

A. Close out documents, consisting of but not limited to As-Built Drawings, Certificates of

Inspections, and transmittals documenting delivery of spare parts, submitted to the Architect/Engineer shall be copied to the Commissioning Authority for concurrent review.

B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted for Architect/Engineer review and

approval well before any equipment/systems demonstrations or training occur; a minimum of eight (8) weeks before Substantial Completion. The approved O&M Manuals shall be employed during demonstrations and training.


A. Demonstrations and training shall be responsive to the requirements of Division 16

specification sections. Contractor shall provide schedule for demonstration and training of Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Preliminary schedule shall be prepared and submitted along with O&M Manuals review submittal and shall be honed after O&M Manuals have been approved. Final demonstration and training schedule shall provide specific dates, times, and subject matter and shall be re-submitted at least four (4) weeks prior to any demonstrations/training occurring to allow for review, approval, notification, and coordination. Demonstrations and training shall be completed before Substantial Completion.

B. The commissioning Authority shall be present at all sessions to observe the demonstrations/training and to contribute as the Authority may deem appropriate.

3.11 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION AND REPORTS

A. The Contractor shall document all commissioning tests and submit copies of all test results

and reports to the CA and OR. The documents shall confirm operational readiness or separately list issues observed or discovered requiring correction. The documents shall be distributed to Commissioning Team members.

B. The Commissioning Authority shall prepare a final formal report to the Owner that will

include a narrative in the form of an Executive Summary of the results of commissioning process, impressions of the demonstration and training sessions, and a certification that the verification of each item is complete and all systems are operating as intended.



COMMISSIONING APPENDICIES

Appendix A: Pre-Functional Checklists

System / Equipment

1. Generators including cooling system 2. Fueling System including day tanks, transfer pumps, controls, main tank, and fuel

polisher 3. Automatic Transfer Switches 4. Paralleling Switchgear

NOTE: Checklists for the complete project will be provided during Construction Period after all the submittals have been approved. Pre-functional checklists will be provided by the CA. Items on the checklists will include, but not be limited to:

1. Manufacturer’s start-up complete 2. All mechanical and electrical connections complete and verified 3. All TAB procedures complete 4. Automatic controls (BMS) work complete 5. Alarms functioning and verified 6. Supporting sub-systems and equipment ready and operational



Appendix B: Functional Performance Verification

System / Equipment

1. Generators including cooling system 2. Fueling System including day tanks, transfer pumps, controls, main tank, and fuel

polisher 3. Automatic Transfer Switches 4. Paralleling Switchgear

NOTE: Checklists and commissioning scr ipts for the complete project Func t iona l Per fo rmance Ver i f i ca t ion will be provided by the CA during Construction Period after all the submittals have been approved. Items on the checklists (scripts) will include, but not be limited to:

1. Pre-Functional checklist complete and verified 2. Occupied (normal) operation 3. Unoccupied (standby) operation 4. Emergency operation 5. Failure mode testing 6. Alarms and safeties functioning and verified 7. Automatic temperature controls and BMS interface 8. Fire alarm interface 9. Load testing


Rigging & Lifting Plan

for

***All information provided by A&A Transfer, Inc. is for planning purposes only. It is the responsibility of the rigging contractor to perform the due diligence required to develop a

plan of action to complete the scope of work detailed in this plan***

THE NAME THAT CARRIES WEIGHT THE NAME THAT CARRIES WEIGHT

Table of Contents

44175 Lavin Lane, Chantilly, VA 20152 Office: (703) 471-8338 Fax: (703) 327-6634 www.AATransferInc.com44175 Lavin Lane, Chantilly, VA 20152 Office: (703) 471-8338 Fax: (703) 327-6634 www.AATransferInc.com

1. Method of Procedure2. Activity Hazard Analysis - Crane Work3. Crane Plan - Hoist Existing Generators

a. Lift Imageb. Lift Worksheetc. Crane Mats

4. Crane Plan - Hoist New Day/Base Tanksa. Lift Imageb. Lift Worksheetc. Crane Mats

5. Crane Plan - Hoist New Generators without Radiatorsa. Lift Imageb. Lift Worksheetc. Crane Mats

6. Crane Plan - Hoist New Radiatorsa. Lift Imageb. Lift Worksheetc. Crane Mats

7. Detailed Rigging Procedure Images8. Crane Information & Inspection9. Crane Operator Certifications10. Rigger Certifications11. Rigging Equipment Information


1. Method of Procedure


Date: December 30, 2015 Project: Fairfax County Government Center Generator Replacement Customer: SWSG Rigger: A&A Transfer, Inc. Scope of Work: Rig and replace (2) Generators

Method of Procedure Event #1 – Rig and Remove (2) Existing Generators (Friday Night, Saturday & Sunday)

1. The crane along with all luffing, wing & counterweight trailers will move in to the job site late afternoon/early evening on a Friday. 2. The crane will be assembled and prepare for lifting operations planned to be completed the following morning. 3. Rigging crew will arrive on site first thing Saturday morning and begin preparing the existing generators to be picked from the penthouse

using the crane. 4. It is understood that the penthouse wall will be opened by others prior to the rigging crew’s arrival on site. 5. Each existing generator will be rigged toward the exit of the penthouse using rigging skates. 6. Once the generator is beginning to overhang outside of the penthouse, the crane will connect the first (2) slings to the lifting eyes. At this

point, the crane will assist in pulling the generator out of the penthouse. 7. As the generator moves out of the penthouse it will gradually be turned 90 degrees. 8. When the generator reaches approximately 75% being outside of the penthouse, the remaining (2) slings will be connected to the

generator and the unit will be moved the rest of the way out of the penthouse and will reach the full 90 degree turn. 9. At this point, the generator will be full suspended from the crane and will be 100% outside of the penthouse turned at a 90 degree angle

in reference to its original position. Note: the generator will never rest on the roof outside the penthouse at any point during the rigging process.

10. The generator will then be hoisted up and loaded onto a truck provided by the rigger. 11. Steps 5 through 10 will then be repeated for the second existing generator. 12. The crane will then disassemble and depart from the job site.

Event #2 – Rig and Set in Place (2) New Generators (Friday Night, Saturday & Sunday) 1. The crane along with all luffing, wing & counterweight trailers will move in to the job site late afternoon/early evening on a Friday. 2. The crane will be assembled and prepare for lifting operations planned to be completed the following morning. 3. Rigging crew will arrive on site first thing Saturday morning and begin preparing for the lifts. 4. First, the day/base tanks will be hoisted to the area between the cooling towers and penthouse wall. 5. The tank will be lowered down to just above the penthouse slab level while parallel to the outside penthouse wall. 6. The tank will be turned 90 degrees as it enters the penthouse louvered opening. 7. Once inside the penthouse, the tank will be set in place. 8. Second, the new generators with the radiators removed will be hoisted to the area between the cooling towers and penthouse wall. 9. The generators will be lowered down to just above the level of the steel I-beams installed in the penthouse to allow space for the I-beam

skates. Note: the generator will be parallel to the outside penthouse wall at this time. 10. The generators will then be turned 90 degrees as they enter the penthouse. 11. Once the generator has been fully turned 90 degrees and has approximately 25% of the unit inside the penthouse, chain falls attached to

the rigging will be used to lower the front end of the generator down onto I-beam skates installed on the beams. 12. At this point, a line puller will be anchored in the penthouse room opposite the louvered openings and attached to the front end of the

generator in order to help pull the unit inside. 13. The front (2) slings will be disconnected from the generator and the crane, using the back (2) slings and the beam skates will drift the

generator into the penthouse. 14. Once approximately 75-80% of the generator is inside the penthouse, the (2) rear I-beam skates will be installed on the beams and the

rear end of the generator will be lowered onto the skates. 15. From here, the line puller will be used to the move the generator the rest of the way into the penthouse. 16. The generator will be jacked up, the skates will be removed and the generator will be lowered into place on the I-beams. 17. Lastly, the generator’s radiators will be hoisted and drifted into the penthouse without the need to be turned 90 degrees. 18. Once the radiators are inside the penthouse, they will be rigged into place in order for the bolts to be secured by others. 19. The crane will then be disassembled and depart from the job site.


44175 Lavin Lane, Chantilly, VA 20152 Office: (703) 471-8338 Fax: (703) 327-6634 www.AATransferInc.com 44175 Lavin Lane, Chantilly, VA 20152 Office: (703) 471-8338 Fax: (703) 327-6634 www.AATransferInc.com

CRANE/TRUCK ENTRY PATH

Set Up Location

mitchmaines

Line

mitchmaines

Line

mitchmaines

Line

mitchmaines

Line

mitchmaines

Line

mitchmaines

Line

mitchmaines

Line

mitchmaines

Line

mitchmaines

Line

mitchmaines

Line

mitchmaines

Line

mitchmaines

Line

mitchmaines

Line

mitchmaines

Polygon

mitchmaines

Crane

mitchmaines

Truck

mitchmaines

Line


2. Activity Hazard Analysis-Crane Work


Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)

Activity/Work Task: Hoist Existing & New Generators Overall Risk Assessment Code (RAC) (Use highest code) H

Project Location: 12000 Government Center Parkway, Fairfax, VA Risk Assessment Code (RAC) Matrix

Contract Number: n/a Severity

Probability

Date Prepared: 12/30/15 Frequent Likely Occasional Seldom Unlikely

Prepared by (Name/Title): Mitch Maines / Estimator Catastrophic E E H H M Critical E H H M L

Reviewed by (Name/Title): Lindsey Ott / Safety Manager Marginal H M M L L Negligible M L L L L

Notes: (Field Notes, Review Comments, etc.)

All involved personnel will use proper PPE at all Times: Hard hats, leather gloves, steel toe boots, safety glasses, and safety reflective vest.

Step 1: Review each “Hazard” with identified safety “Controls” and determine RAC (See above) “Probability” is the likelihood to cause an incident, near miss, or accident and identified as: Frequent, Likely, Occasional, Seldom or Unlikely.

RAC Chart

“Severity” is the outcome/degree if an incident, near miss, or accident did occur and identified as: Catastrophic, Critical, Marginal, or Negligible

E = Extremely High Risk H = High Risk

Step 2: Identify the RAC (Probability/Severity) as E, H, M, or L for each “Hazard” on AHA. Annotate the overall highest RAC at the top of AHA.

M = Moderate Risk

L = Low Risk

Principal/Job Steps Hazards Controls RAC Logistics and preparation for beginning work.

Permits required, training, emergency egress, order of work.

Make sure all necessary permits have been obtained and filled out daily prior to work beginning. Make sure all personnel have been trained in the tasks that will be performed. Make sure everyone involved knows the evacuation routes and what to do in case of an emergency. Make sure that all workers know the plan for the task and are on agreement with the plan for the day. Make sure everyone has all standard PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest) and has additional safety equipment available and knows when to use it.

L

Prepare Site Slips and trips. Poor housekeeping, and particles in eyes

Inspect and clear site for delivery truck. Ensure that there are no holes or debris that will hinder the equipment. Wear all needed PPE. L

Drive crane into location Pinch points, muscle strains, hand injuries, head injuries, slips and trips, back injuries

Be aware of hand and body placement. Wear proper PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest).Use proper lifting techniques.

L

Back assist tractor trailer up to crane Pinch points, slips and trips, and struck by/caught in between

Inspect and clear site for delivery truck. Ensure that there are no holes or debris that will hinder the equipment. Use back-up alarm and or spotters with flag or paddle to back truck into position. Wear all needed PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest).

L

Remove hand pads from trailer and put in desired location for crane

Pinch points, muscle strains, hand injuries, head injuries, slips and trips, back injuries

Be aware of hand and body placement. Wear proper PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest).Use proper lifting techniques.

L

Extend outriggers half way and level crane on hand pads

Pinch points Be aware of hand and body placements. L

Attach chain bridle to hook and inspect Pinch points, muscle strains, hand injuries, head injuries, slips and trips, back injuries

Be aware of hand and body placement. Wear proper PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest).Use proper lifting techniques. Inspect all equipment per manufactures requirements and inspect all rigging equipment.

L

Attach chain bridle to large mats on trailer and locate in desired location


Be aware of hand and body placement. Wear proper PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest). Use proper lifting techniques. Inspect all equipment per manufactures requirements and inspect all rigging equipment.

M

Reposition crane onto large mats and level crane


Set barricade up using cones and danger tape to protect swing radius of crane and another CAZ 35’ past the swing radius of all crane movements.


Be aware of hand and body placement. Wear proper PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest). Use proper lifting techniques. Cones and tape to be set 2 feet from swing radius of counterweights.

L

Detach chain bridle and attach counterweight cables/slings to hook and inspect


Be aware of hand and body placement. Wear proper PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest). Use proper lifting techniques. Inspect all equipment per manufactures requirements and inspect all rigging equipment.

L

Attach counterweight cables/slings to counterweight and place on deck of crane (repeat for all counterweights)

Pinch points, muscle strains, hand injuries, head injuries, slips and trips, back injuries, falls

Be aware of hand and body placement. Wear proper PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest). Use proper lifting techniques. Inspect all equipment per manufactures requirements and inspect all rigging equipment. 100% tie off if over 6 feet ( Ladder, harness, lanyard, yoyo)

M

Swing crane into position and bring counterweights up to working position


Using either the flatbed 4’ tall trailer or an 8’ step ladder, whichever is more accessible, reeve cable through sheaves and to load block

Pinch points, muscle strains, hand injuries, head injuries, slips and trips, back injuries, falls

Be aware of hand and body placement. Wear proper PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest). Use proper lifting techniques. 100% tie off if over 6 feet. 3 points of contact when any work is to be done off a ladder at no greater than 6’.

L

Attach anti-two block device to cable and connect to switch on jib and attach wind meter to crane.


Be aware of hand and body placement. Wear proper PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest). Use proper lifting techniques. No work to be done past 23fps or 16 mph.

L

Re-level crane and swing boom into safe lifting position


Perform inspection of all components to be in safe operating conditions

Pinch points, head injuries Be aware of hand and body placement. Wear proper PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest). L

Attach rigging to load hook and inspect Pinch points, muscle strains, hand injuries, head injuries, slips and trips, back injuries

Be aware of hand and body placement. Wear proper PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest). Use proper lifting techniques.

L

Equipment and Rigging Inspection Faulty equipment Inspect all equipment per manufactures requirements and inspect all rigging equipment. L

Attach rigging to material to be lifted. Pinch points, muscle strains, hand injuries Be aware of hand and body placement. Wear proper PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest).Use proper lifting techniques.

L

Attach rigging to crane hook. Back injuries, Struck by, hand injuries, head injuries

Be aware of all crane movements. Wear proper PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest). Pay attention to task.

L

Perform lifts to desired location. Crushing, struck by, pinch points, overhead hazards, operator error.

Only qualified operator will run the crane and signalman will be designated. Wear all required PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest). Stay clear of suspended loads and clear landing area of non-essential personnel. Be aware of crane movement. . Crane signals will be done with 2-way radios when hoisting to the roof and 2-way radios or hand signals on the ground.

H

Break down work area and daily clean up. Housekeeping particles in eye, struck by, slips and trips

Use flaggers and spotter when moving mobile equipment, clean up all debris and dispose of in appropriate container. Use all required PPE (hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses, leather gloves, reflective vest).

M

Equipment to be Used Training Requirements/Competent or Qualified Personnel name(s) Inspection Requirements

1. Grove GMK7550 (550-ton crane)

2. Rigging equipment “see attached”

• Forklift (OSHA 1910.178)• Qualified Riggers (OSHA 1926.251)

Competent Person supervising the work will be: (TBD)

All Rigging equipment used by qualified personnel and is in good working condition.

• Daily Forklift Inspection (OSHA 1910.178)• Daily Vehicle Inspection (OSHA 1926.601)• Daily Rigging Equipment Inspection (OSHA 1926.251)

Daily Rigging Inspection by competent person. All tags and capacities are clearly labeled.


3. Crane Plan - Hoist Existing Generators


Title: Lift Plan

Project: Fairfax County Goverment Center

Customer: SWSG

Description: Hoist Existing Generator

Drawn By: Mitch Maines 12/29/2015

CRANE

Grove GMK7550 Mega Wing Lift w/ Luffing Jib

115.9' Main Boom at 70° at 70°

200.1' Luffing Jib (43.6° offset)

Base: 100% Outriggers

Counterweight: 352700 lbs

219.3' Lift Radius (360°)

Crane Capacity at 219.3' = 32,200 lbs

LOADHoist Line 362 lbs

Block 1,500 lbs

Hook

Sling (2) 26 lbs

Crosby Shackle G-209 7/8"(2)

7 lbs

Spreader Bar 295 lbs


7 lbs

Sling (4) 104 lbs


14 lbs

Load 22,500 lbs

TOTAL LOAD 24,816 lbs

77% of capacity

Upper Sling Tension: 12,380 lbs

Lower Sling Tension: 5,906 lbs

Grid: 10' x 10'Not issued for construction. For pre-planning only.

mitchmaines

Rectangle

mitchmaines

Rectangle

Critical Lift Worksheet

Title: Existing Generator Lift Plan


Date: 12/29/2015

Job Number:

Description: Hoist Existing Generator

Jobsite Address: 12000 Government Center Parkway, Fairfax, VA 22035

Customer: SWSG P.O./ Contract#:

Lift Plan Drawing and Load Placement Drawing attached? Yes

Notes:

Crane Information

Manufacturer: Grove

Model: GMK7550 - MegaWingLift - Luffing

Serial #: See Attached

Crane Rating: 550 t

Crane Inspection Date: See Attached

Notes:

Lift Information

Crane Radius: 219.3 ft

Crane Capacty at Radius: 32,200 lbs

Capacity at Pick Point: 32,200 lbs

Capacity at Set Point: 32,200 lbs

Notes:

Crane Configuration

Crane Carrier: 100% Outriggers


Chart Capacity: 32,200 lbs

Main Boom Length: 115.9' Main Boom at 70°

Boom Sections: 88-88-0-0

Parts of Line: 2

Line Size: 24 mm

Capacity of Line @ Parts: 49,458 lbs

Radius: 219.3 ft

Boom Angle: 70°

Tip Height: 214.73 ft

Jib Used? Yes

Jib: 200.1' Luffing Jib

Jib Offset: 43.57°

Jib Angle from Ground: 26.43°

Outrigger Load: 307,201 lbs at 225° Swing Angle

Load Configuration

Net Load Weight: 24,815.96 lbs

Description: Existing Generator

Dimensions: 13.25 ft x 4.25 ft, Height: 6 ft

Load Weight: 22,500 lbs

Rigging Weight: 453.96 lbs

Hook Weight: 0 lbs

Block Weight: 1,500 lbs

Load Line Weight: 362 lbs

Hook Height: 115.74 ft

Sling Length: Upper: 10' - Lower: 20'

Sling Angle: 73.2°, 68°

Sling Equipment #: ENR7

Sling Type: Endless Round Slings - Synthetic

Spreader Bar #: See Attached

Spreader Bar Capacity: 20 ton

Hook Block: 40 ton

Shackle Type: Crosby G-209

Shackle Qty: 8

Shackle Capacity: 6.5 ton EA

Additional Rigging: N/A

Additional Rigging Capacity: N/A

% of Chart Capacity: 77%

Chart Capacity Deduction: N/A

Deduct Capacity: N/A

Notes:

Setup Information

Crane Setup: 360°

Setup Distance: See Attached

Mat Used? Yes

Mat Dimensions: 8' x 12' x 8" H (steel)

Ground Bearing Pressure below Mat: 3,200 psf

Notes:

Not for construction use. For pre-planning only.

Title: Existing Generator Lift


Date: TBD

Job Number:

Notes: Notes:

Pre-Lift Checklist

Crane Operator: Name:

Signalperson Assigned: Name:

Communication Method:

Crane Inspected by Operator? Yes No

Rigging Inspected? Yes No

All Permits Obtained? Yes No

Are weather conditions OK? Yes No

Wind OK? Yes No

Are there Power Lines? Yes No

Is Operators Certification Card current? Yes No

Is area OK for entry and exit of jobsite? Yes No

Has a pre-lift meeting between operator, signalperson, supervisor, and any and all other persons occured?

Yes No

Other Considerations:

Signatures

Engineer: Name: Signature: Date:

Supervisor: Name: Signature: Date:

Operator: Name: Signature: Date:

Client: Name: Signature: Date:


Job Information

ProjectFairfax County Goverment

Center

Customer SWSG

Description Hoist Existing Generator

Drawn By A&A Transfer

Date 12/29/2015

Crane Information

Grove GMK7550

115.9' Main Boom at 70°

200.1' Luffing Jib

100% Outriggers

Cwt: 352700 lbs

Outrigger Load 'P' 307,200.8 lbs

Outrigger Pad Length 4 ft

Outrigger Pad Width 3 ft

Mat Information

Mat Material Steel

Mat Thickness 8 in

Mat Length 12 ft

Mat Width 8 ft

Mats in Width 1

Effective Mat Length 'c' 12 ft

Effective Mat Width 'b' 8 ft

Moment Arm 'a' 4.5 ft

Matting Layers 'n' 1

Total Mat Thickness 'd' 8 in

Calculations

Ground Bearing Pressure below mat...

q = P / (b·c) 3,200 psf

Bending Stress on Mat...

f = 3·n·q·a²/d² 3,037.5 psi OK

27,000 psi maximum allowed

Horizontal Shear Stress on Mat...

V = 1.5·q·a/d ---

Ground Bearing Pressure Below Crane Mats

Notes


mitchmaines

Rectangle


4. Crane Plan - Hoist New Day/Base Tanks


Title: Lift Plan

Project: Fairfax County Government Center

Customer: SWSG

Description: Hoist New Day/Base Tank


CRANE









Block 1,500 lbs

Hook

Sling (2) 26 lbs


7 lbs



7 lbs

Sling (4) 104 lbs


14 lbs

Load 5,000 lbs


23% of capacity




mitchmaines

Rectangle

mitchmaines

Rectangle

Lift Worksheet

Title: New Day/Base Tank Lift Plan


Date: 12/29/2015

Job Number:

Description: Hoist New Day/Base Tank




Notes:

Crane Information

Manufacturer: Grove



Crane Rating: 550 t


Notes:

Lift Information





Notes:

Crane Configuration






Parts of Line: 2

Line Size: 24 mm


Radius: 219.3 ft

Boom Angle: 70°


Jib Used? Yes


Jib Offset: 43.57°



Load Configuration


Description: New Day/Base Tank

Dimensions: 20 ft x 6.5 ft, Height: 1.5 ft



Hook Weight: 0 lbs









Spreader Bar Capacity: 20 ton

Hook Block: 40 ton


Shackle Qty: 8







Notes:

Setup Information

Crane Setup: 360°


Mat Used? Yes

Mat Dimensions: 8' x 12' x 8" (steel)


Notes:


Title: New Day/Base Tank Lift


Date: TBD

Job Number:

Notes: Notes:

Pre-Lift Checklist








Wind OK? Yes No





Yes No


Signatures






Job Information

ProjectFairfax County

Government Center

Customer SWSG

Description Hoist New Day/Base Tank


Date 12/29/2015

Crane Information

Grove GMK7550


200.1' Luffing Jib

100% Outriggers

Cwt: 352700 lbs

Outrigger Load 'P' 194,688 lbs



Mat Information

Mat Material Steel

Mat Thickness 8 in

Mat Length 12 ft

Mat Width 8 ft

Mats in Width 1






Calculations


q = P / (b·c) 2,028 psf


f = 3·n·q·a²/d² 1,925 psi OK



V = 1.5·q·a/d ---


Notes


mitchmaines

Rectangle


5. Crane Plan - Hoist New Generators without Radiators


Title: Lift Plan

Project: Fairfax County Government Cntr

Customer: SWSG

Description: Hoist New Generator w/o Radiator


CRANE









Block 1,500 lbs

Hook

Sling (2) 26 lbs


7 lbs



7 lbs

Sling (4) 104 lbs


14 lbs

Load 22,145 lbs


76% of capacity




mitchmaines

Rectangle

mitchmaines

Rectangle

Critical Lift Worksheet

Title: New Gen w/o Radiator Lift Plan


Date: 12/29/2015

Job Number:

Description: Hoist New Generator w/o Radiator




Notes:

Crane Information

Manufacturer: Grove



Crane Rating: 550 t


Notes:

Lift Information





Notes:

Crane Configuration






Parts of Line: 2

Line Size: 24 mm


Radius: 219.3 ft

Boom Angle: 70°


Jib Used? Yes


Jib Offset: 43.57°



Load Configuration


Description: New Generator w/o Radiator

Dimensions: 18 ft x 7.5 ft, Height: 8 ft



Hook Weight: 0 lbs








Spreader Bar #: See Attached S

preader Bar Capacity: 20 ton

Hook Block: 40 ton


Shackle Qty: 8







Notes:

Setup Information

Crane Setup: 360°


Mat Used? Yes



Notes:


Title: New Gen w/o Radiator Lift


Date: TBD

Job Number:

Notes: Notes:

Pre-Lift Checklist








Wind OK? Yes No





Yes No


Signatures






Job Information

ProjectFairfax County

Government Cntr

Customer SWSG

DescriptionHoist New Generator w/o

Radiator


Date 12/29/2015

Crane Information

Grove GMK7550


200.1' Luffing Jib

100% Outriggers

Cwt: 352700 lbs




Mat Information

Mat Material Steel

Mat Thickness 8 in

Mat Length 12 ft

Mat Width 8 ft

Mats in Width 1






Calculations


q = P / (b·c) 3,175 psf


f = 3·n·q·a²/d² 3,013.8 psi OK



V = 1.5·q·a/d ---


Notes


mitchmaines

Rectangle


6. Crane Plan - Hoist New Radiators


Title: Lift Plan

Project: Fairfax County Govt Center

Customer: SWSG

Description: Hoist New Radiator


CRANE



200.1' Luffing Jib (44° offset)



220' Lift Radius (360°)

Crane Capacity at 220' = 32,200 lbs


Block 1,500 lbs

Hook

Sling (4) 104 lbs


3 lbs

Load 5,000 lbs


22% of capacity

Sling Tension: 1,306 lbs


mitchmaines

Rectangle

mitchmaines

Rectangle

Lift Worksheet

Title: Hoist New Radiator Lift Plan


Date: 12/29/2015

Job Number:

Description: Hoist New Radiator




Notes:

Crane Information

Manufacturer: Grove



Crane Rating: 550 t


Notes:

Lift Information

Crane Radius: 220 ft




Notes:

Crane Configuration






Parts of Line: 2

Line Size: 24 mm


Radius: 220 ft

Boom Angle: 70°


Jib Used? Yes


Jib Offset: 44.03°



Load Configuration


Description: New Radiator

Dimensions: 4 ft x 7.5 ft, Height: 8 ft



Hook Weight: 0 lbs




Sling Length: 20'

Sling Angle: 77.8°




Spreader Bar Capacity:

Hook Block: 40 ton


Shackle Qty: 4

Shackle Capacity: 2 ton EA






Notes:

Setup Information

Crane Setup: 360°


Mat Used? Yes



Notes:


Title: New Radiator Lift


Date: TBD

Job Number:

Notes: Notes:

Pre-Lift Checklist








Wind OK? Yes No





Yes No


Signatures






Job Information

ProjectFairfax County Govt

Center

Customer SWSG

Description Hoist New Radiator


Date 12/29/2015

Crane Information

Grove GMK7550


200.1' Luffing Jib

100% Outriggers

Cwt: 352700 lbs




Mat Information

Mat Material Steel

Mat Thickness 8 in

Mat Length 12 ft

Mat Width 8 ft

Mats in Width 1






Calculations


q = P / (b·c) 2,008 psf


f = 3·n·q·a²/d² 1,905.7 psi OK



V = 1.5·q·a/d ---


Notes


mitchmaines

Rectangle


7. Detailed Rigging Procedure Images



8. Crane Information & Inspection


da

ta productguidefeatures

• 550 ton (450 mton) capacity

• 197 ft (60 m) 5 section full power boom

• Patented TWIN-LOCKTM boom pinning system

• 82 ft - 240 ft (25 m - 73 m) lattice luffing jib

• 39 ft - 230 ft (12 m - 70 m) fixed lattice jib

• 430 ft (131 m) overall tip height

• Grove MEGAFORM boom

• New control console with EKS5 and ECOS

• Right side mounted cab stows to the rear

• Superstructure cab tilts up to approx 20°

• 264,500 lbs (120 Tonnes) hydraulically installed/removed counterweight

• 255 hp (190 kW) Mercedes OM906LA diesel, water cooled superstructure engine

• 563 hp (420 kW) Mercedes, diesel, water-cooled turbocharged carrier engine

• 53 mph (85 km/h) travel speed

• Boom removal and trailing boom kits (less dolly)

• Self removable rear outrigger box

• Optional 8th axle

• MEGATRAKTM independent suspension system

GMK7550

All Terrain Crane

contentsFeatures 2

Specifications 3

Dimensions 5

Jib Dimensions 6

Counterweight 8Dimensions

Travel Proposals 9

Main Boom Range/Charts 11

Luffing Jib Range/Charts 14

Fixed Lattice Extension 25

Special Offset Fixed 28Lattice Extension

Heavy Duty Jib Extension 31

5

dimensions

GM

K75

50

18' -

1"

(550

0)

10' (

20.5

tire

s)9'

- 10

" (1

6.0

tires

)

20'

(610

0)

29' -

2"

(890

0)

R20' - 11"(R6370)

12' - 11" (3940)

28' - 9" (8760)

9' - 2" (2800)

R53' - 11" (R16427)

R47' - 9" (R14548)

51' - 10" (15788)

Shown with 8th axle

5' - 9" (1750)

3' - 7"(1090)

13' -

1"

(398

5)

10' - 1" (3085)

52' - 9" (16082)

14°

9' - 10" (3000)

5' - 5" (1650)

8' - 1"(2450)

2' - 4" (710)5' - 5" (1650)

7' - 3" (2216)

5' - 5"(1650)

11" (284) 5' - 9" (1740)

12" (297)

13' -

1"

(399

0)

8' - 8"(2648)

51' - 9-1/2"(15788)

6' - 3"(1893)

5' - 5"(1650)

64' - 5"(19622)

Length and Type of Boom

THIS CHART IS ONLY A GUIDE AND SHOULD NOT BE USED TO OPERATE THE CRANE. The individual crane’s load chart,operating instructions and other instructional plates must be read and understood prior to operating the crane.

0255075100125150175200225250275300

0

25

50

75

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

275

300

325

350

375

400

425

R (ft)

H(ft)

240 ft

220 ft

200 ft

180 ft

161 ft

121 ft

102 ft

82 ft

62 ft

163 ft163 ft

148 ft

148ft 132 ft

116 ft

100 ft

84 ft

69 ft

52 ft

179ft

20o - 7

4o

60o

70o

81o

240ft

8ft

141 ft

240 ft Hydraulic Luffing Jib

Hei

ght

from

the

gro

und

in fe

et

Operating radius in feet from axis of rotation

Boo

m a

nd e

xten

sion

leng

th in

feet

14

working rangeG

MK

7550

Load ChartProject

Customer

Description

Grove GMK7550

Boom: Main Boom at 70°




Range: 360°

Capacity: 85% Cap

Chart ID:

Boom SectionPercentages

Boom Length(ft)

Boom AngleJib Length

(ft)Jib Offset

Tip Height(ft)

Lift Radius(ft)

Capacity(lbs)

Note

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 11° 296.6 145 40,400

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 12.7° 293.4 150 40,400

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 14.5° 290 155 40,400

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 16.2° 286.4 160 40,400

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 18.1° 282.5 165 40,400

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 19.9° 278.3 170 40,400

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 21.8° 273.9 175 40,400

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 23.8° 269.2 180 40,400

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 25.8° 264.1 185 40,400

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 28° 258.6 190 39,800

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 30.2° 252.7 195 38,400

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 32.5° 246.3 200 37,000

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 35° 239.3 205 35,800

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 37.6° 231.6 210 34,600

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 40.4° 223 215 33,400

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 43.6° 213.3 220 32,200

88-88-0-0 115.9 70° 200.1 47.1° 202.1 225 31,200

This data is for reference use only. Operator must refer to in-cab charts to determine allowable lifting capacities.


9. Crane Operator Certifications


WWW.WOGRUBB.COM

Crane Rental Rigging Steel Erection Machine Installation Heavy Hauling Plant Maintenance

Alexandria, VA703-370-7500

Baltimore, MD410-796-3661

Fredericksburg, VA540-891-7279

Portsmouth, VA757-465-4072

Winchester, VA540-665-5180

Headquarters Richmond, VA: 804-271-9471 Crawler Crane Division Richmond, VA: 804-233-3613

CONFID

ENTIA

LNOTICE: This document contains information that is Con�dential and which is regarded as Proprietary to W. O. Grubb Steel Erection, Inc. By accepting this document, the recipient agrees to keep such information con�dential except to the extent that it must be disclosed to those who have a business need to know such information. This information is to be used only for the business purpose for which it was furnished. Any other use or disclosure to other parties, including the public, without the written permission of W. O. Grubb is prohibited and any infringement could result in legal action. If you are not the intended recipient of this information, please destroy this document and contact the sender.


10. Rigger Certifications


Lindsey Ott

Safety Manager

4/15/1957

Yes

Jose Santos Herrera

Crew Lead

No

3/19/1980

Fermin Amaya

Crane Operator/Crew lead

8/31/1978

Yes

Andrew Kalos

Crew Lead/PM

8/28/1981

Yes

Mynor Estrada

Crew Lead

Yes

1/29/1962


11. Rigging Equipment Information


www.liftex.com(800) 299-0900

SLING FAILURE RESULTS FROMMISUSE, DAMAGE, AND

EXCESSIVE WEAR

WArningSLING FAILURE CAN CAUSE

ADHERE TO INDUSTRY STANDARDS & REGULATIONS

deATh or inJurY

*Before ordering slings that are going to be used in a chemically active environment, contact Liftex ® Customer Service, to recommend the right sling for the right usage.

Chemically Active Environments can affect the strength of webbing slings in varying degrees, ranging from little to total degradation.

endless roundsling CAPACiTY ChArT

Part Number Vertical Choker Basket Minimum Length

Approx. Diameter

Approx. WT / FT

PURPLE ENR1 2600 2100 5200 3’ .625” 0.3 LB

GREEN ENR2 5300 4200 10600 3’ .875” 0.4 LB

YELLOW ENR3 8400 6700 16800 3’ 1.125” 0.5 LB

TAN ENR4 10600 8500 21200 3’ 1.125” 0.6 LB

RED ENR5 13200 10600 26400 3’ 1.375” 0.8 LB

WHITE ENR6 16800 13400 33600 6’ 1.375” 0.9 LB

BLUE ENR7 21200 17000 42400 6’ 1.625” 1.3 LB

ORANGE ENR8 25000 20000 50000 6’ 1.750” 1.6 LB

ORANGE ENR9 31000 24800 62000 6’ 2.125” 2.0 LB

ORANGE ENR10 40000 32000 80000 6’ 2.350” 2.6 LB

ORANGE ENR11 53000 42400 106000 8’ 3.150” 3.4 LB

ORANGE ENR12 66000 52800 132000 8’ 3.950” 4.3 LB

ORANGE ENR13 90000 72000 180000 8’ 4.800” 5.9 LB

CROSBY G209

http://www.splicingallied.com/crosby_g209.htm[6/28/2012 8:23:14 AM]

TEL 01784 464447 FAX 01784 454788

PRODUCTS

SERVICES

SCREW PIN

G-209 S-209

Screw pin anchor shackles meetthe performance requirements ofFederal Specification RR-C-271D Type IVA, Grade A, Class2, except for those provisionsrequired of the contractor.

Working Load Limit permanently shown on everyshackle.Forged - Quenched and Tempered, with alloy pins.Capacities 1/3 thru 55 tons.Look for the Red Pin™ . . . the mark of genuineCrosby quality.Shackles can be furnished proof tested withcertificates to designated standards, such as ABS,DNV, Lloyds, or other certification. Charges forproof testing and certification available whenrequested at the time of order.Hot Dip galvanized or Self Colored.Fatigue rated.

ROUND PIN

G-213 S-213

Round pin anchor shackles meetthe performance requirements ofFederal Specification RR-C-271DType IVA, Grade A, Class 1,except for those provisionsrequired of the contractor.

NominalSize(in.)

WorkingLoad

Limit *(tons)

Stock No. Weight Each(lbs.)

G-209Galv.

S-209S.C.

G-213Galv.

S-213S.C.

G-209S-209

G-213S-213

3/16 † 1/3 1018357 — — — .06 —1/4 1/2 1018375 1018384 1018017 1018026 .10 .13

5/16 3/4 1018393 1018400 1018035 1018044 .19 .183/8 1 1018419 1018428 1018053 1018062 .31 .29

7/16 1-1/2 1018437 1018446 1018071 1018080 .38 .381/2 2 1018455 1018464 1018099 1018106 .72 .715/8 3-1/4 1018473 1018482 1018115 1018124 1.37 1.50

3/4 4-3/4 1018491 1018507 1018133 1018142 2.35 2.327/8 6-1/2 1018516 1018525 1018151 1018160 3.62 3.491 8-1/2 1018534 1018543 1018179 1018188 5.03 5.00

1-1/8 9-1/2 1018552 1018561 1018197 1018204 7.41 6.971-1/4 12 1018570 1018589 1018213 1018222 9.50 9.751-3/8 13-1/2 1018598 1018605 1018231 1018240 13.53 13.251-1/2 17 1018614 1018623 1018259 1018268 17.20 17.25

1-3/4 25 1018632 1018641 1018277 1018286 27.78 29.46

2 35 1018650 1018669 1018295 1018302 45.00 45.752-1/2 †55 1018678 1018687 — — 85.75 —

G-209

http://www.splicingallied.com/index.htm

http://www.splicingallied.com/shackles.htm

http://www.splicingallied.com/feedback.htm

http://www.splicingallied.com/toc.htm

http://www.splicingallied.com/search.htm

http://www.splicingallied.com/products.htm

http://www.splicingallied.com/services.htm

APPROVED BY:

DATE:

NOTE:DIMENSIONS IN INCHES [MILLIMETERS]1.CAPACITY: 15 METRIC TONS2.W10 x 49 I-BEAM SUPPLIED BY OTHERS3.

30

5 CONTACT ROLLS

1.18

14 ROLLSACCU-ROLL GUIDE

HAR-1.50

38

(4 REQUIRED)

270 5/8"

3.88

10 5/8"

98

16

1.50

2 1/2" 64

TYP

THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS

DF

JBS

efij^k=fk`K

SCALE:1:4

SIZE DWG. NO.

AREV.

NAME DATE

DRAWN

.005

ENG APPR.

SALES APPR.

SHEET 1 OF 1

04/28/2015

-REPRODUCTION IN PART OR AS A WHOLE

69 lb / 32 kgWEIGHT:

DRAWING IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF

HILMAN INCORPORATED. ANY

HILMAN INCORPORATED IS PROHIBITED.

04/27/2015

MODIFIED ROLLER, 15-OT-15093

COMMENTS:

12 TIMBER LANE, MARLBORO, NJ 07746 USA

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION

GN

PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL

CHECKED

15-OT-15093

A & A TRANSFER

TF

04/28/2015

WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF

UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED

DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

TOLERANCES:

FRACTIONAL: 1/8

ANGULAR: .5

ONE PLACE DECIMAL: .03

TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .015

THREE PLACE DECIMAL:

04/28/2015

18

14

13 1/2"

.70

343

.38±.03 10±0.8

25410.00CLEARANCE

NOMINAL3

254

.13

10"

.56

2 1/2" 64

2.75 70 2168.50

.696X 17943.69 943.69

15 5/8" 397